\nri  AT" 


)0  AT  BOOK 

rESNAVY 


The 

Deck  and  Boat  Book 

of  the 

United  States  Navy 


NAVY  DEPARTMENT 

1914 


Reprinted  July.   I9I6,  with  all  changes  incorporated 


NAVAL  INSTITUTE 

ANNAPOUS 

1916 


BALTIMOBS,  UD.,  U.  8.  ▲. 


Navy  Department, 
Washington,  D.  C,  January  20,  1914. 

1.  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book,  United  States  Navy,  1914,  is  issued 
for  the  use  of  the  Navy.  The  instructions  contained  herein  super- 
sede all  others  of  a  similar  nature  and  shall  be  strictly  observed. 
No  changes  shall  be  made  without  the  approval  of  the  Navy  De- 
partment; but  suggestions  regarding  changes  or  improvements 
shall  be  made,  and  any  errors  discovered  shall  be  reported  at  once 
to  the  Navy  Department. 

2.  Deck  and  Boat  Books  shall  be  issued  for  use  on  the  ship's 
bridge.  No  boat  expedition  shall  ever  be  without  a  Deck  and 
Boat  Book  for  each  boat  and  the  means  of  making  signals.  As  far 
as  practicable  all  boats  away  from  their  ships  on  any  duty  where 
signal  communication  may  be  desirable  shall  have  a  copy.  Cox- 
swains as  well  as  signalmen  shall  be  thoroughly  instructed  in  its 
contents. 

JosEPHus  Daniels, 
Secretary  of  the  Navy. 

Corrected  in  accordance  with  changes  in  Conventional  Signals, 
effective  January  i,  1916. 

3 


361245 


Digitized  by4lie  Internet  Arcinive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


littp://www.archive.org/details/deckboatbookofunOOunitrich 


GENERAL  INDEX. 


SUBJECT.  '^^^^ 

LWTRODUCTION       ... 

1    Boats  in  general q 

General  description    ' 

Nomenclature     

II.  Boat   gear   and   equipment ^^ 

Boat    gear    |2 

Boat  box  ^g 

Cooking   utensils    j' 


Provisions 


20 


Hospital  boats  „^ 

Artillery   boats    ^ 


Ammunition 

Senior  officer's  boat. 


21 
21 


22 


III.  Lifeboats     

At  sea  and  in  port ^^ 

Notes  on   lifeboats • .••• • ^* 

Lowering   a   lifeboat   at    sea   in    bad    weather,   wind    and    sea 

forward    of    beam f* 

Hoisting  a  lifeboat  at  sea  in  bad  weather...... ••••  ^" 

Method  of  picking  up  a  man  overboard,  wind  and  sea  abatt 

beam     |  £ 

Life   buoys    ^L 

Signals  for  lifeboats ^^ 

IV,  Drills    and    exercises |^ 

Definitions  and  general  instructions ^" 

Ordinary  service  under  oars. ^* 

Commands     ^t 

Handling  boat^  in   surf *" 

Running  a  line 2a 

Towing ** 

Carrying    stores    *^ 

Boarding  a  wreck J^ 

Notes  on  handling  boats  under  oars J^ 

Boats   under   sail ji 

Sliding    gunter    rig ™ 

Standing  lug   rig ^! 

Notes  on  handling  boats  under  sail ^ 

Power  boats   °X 

Armed   boat   expeditions ^ 

Abandon   ship    *** 

5 


6  The  Deck  akd  Boat  Book. 

subject.  page. 

V.  Detail  note^  'jk  if^cAT  du rv 66 

Duties  of  boai   oincer 66 

Duties  of  coxswain    68 

Care  and  cleaning  of  boats 70 

Miscellaneous    instructions    71 

Boatkeepers 72 

Management  and  handling  of  boats 73 

Abbreviated  rules  for  coxswains 74 

**  Always  "  to  be  done 74 

"  Never  "  to  be  done " 75 

VI.  Boat  salutes  and  boat  etiquette 76 

VII.   Rules  of  the  road  and  buoyage  system 80 

Rules  of  the  road    80 

Buoys    82 

VIII.  Navy  signal  system   85 

Methods 85 

Communication  with   United   States   Army 85 

Calls 86 

Flags  and  pennants  of  Navy  flag  code 92 

Special  flags  and  pennants 95 

Man-of-war    lights    99 

Speed    indicators    99 

Signaling   with    flags    101 

Signaling  by  other  methods  than  flag  signaling 105 

The  dot-and-dash  code    105 

The  wigwag  system    106 

Flashing   or   occulting  light   system 109 

Sound   system    109 

Signaling  with  steam  whistle    110 

The   Ardois  system    Ill 

The  two-arm  semaphore  system    115 

The  Very  system    119 

Towing   signa  s 120 

IX.  Miscellaneous    •. 122 

Storm    signals 122 

Life-Saving  Service  signals    123 

International    signals    123 

International  signals  of  distress    125 

To   dress   ship 126 

To  pass  in  review 127 

X.  Deck   signals    129 

XI.   Boat  signals   « 150 

Boat-drill   signals • 150 

Formation   and    order    150 

Primary    movements    151 

Compass   signals    154 

Evolutions 158 

Speed 159 

Distance  and  interval    160 

Guide 160 

Exercise  urider  sail  or  oars 160 

Exercise  with   landing  force    163 

Target-practice   signals    165 

Miscellaneous  signals 176 


INTRODUCTION. 

1.  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book  contains :  Instructions  in  matters 
pertaining  to  boats  and  boat  exercises ;  rules  of  the  road ;  United 
States  buoyage  system ;  instructions  for  making  United  States 
Navy  signals ;  international,  distress,  storm,  and  Life-Saving 
Service  signals ;  instructions  for  dressing  ship  and  for  passing  in 
review ;  deck  signals ;  boat  signals. 

2.  The  "  deck  signals  "  which  shall  be  so  termed  for  conven- 
ience, are  nonconfidential  general  signals  reproduced  in  the  Deck 
and  Boat  Book  for  convenient  use  upon  the  signal  bridge  to  facili- 
tate smart  work  in  sending  and  answering,  and  for  the  use  of 
Naval  Militia  and  Auxiliary  vessels  to  which  the  General  Signal 
Book  is  not  supplied. 

3.  The  "boat  signals,"  which  shall  be  so  termed  for  conveni- 
ence, are  provided  for  intercommunication  between  ships  and 
boats,  and  under  some  conditions  with  stations  and  parties  on 
shore.  Many  of  them,  especially  the  (magnetic)  compass  signals 
and  some  of  those  under  "  Speed  "  and  "  Miscellaneous,"  are  well 
adapted  to  communication  with  tugs  and  auxiliaries  and  should  be 
used  for  that  purpose.  Supplemented  by  the  deck  signals,  they 
form  a  suitable  and  fairly  complete  code  for  such  vessels,  which 
may  also  be  useful  for  other  ships  at  times.  Boat  signals  should 
not  be  made  to  a  vessel  where  there  can  be  any  danger  of  their 
being  misunderstood  as  being  addressed  to  her  boats.  See  articles 
55-58.  As  divisions,  squadrons,  or  a  fleet  will  never  be  called  and 
signaled  to  by  boat  signals  under  conditions  of  uncertainty  as  to 
whether  the  signal  is  intended  for  those  units  or  for  a  flotilla  of 
boats,  no  confusion  can  arise  from  their  calls. 

4.  Boat  signals  are  divided  into  three  classes,  as  follows: 

(a)  Boat-drill  signals. 

(b)  Target-practice  signals. 

(c)  Miscellaneous  signals. 

5.  Boat-drill  signals  have  been  reduced  in  scope  from  those  of 
previous  signal  books.  In  the  fleets  of  the  present  day  the  hand- 
ling of  boats  by  signals  has  of  necessity  been  reduced  to  simple 
exercises  under  oars  and  sail  and  the  movements  necessary  to 
handle  a  number  of  ship  flotillas  (generally  in  tow  of  power- 
propelled  boats)  in  making  or  preparing  for  landings.  These 
signals  are  arranged  under  the  subheadings  "  Formation  and  ' 
order,"  "  Primary  movements,"  "  Compass  signals,"  "  Evolutions 
from  column,"  "  Evolutions  from  column  of  ship  or  division 
fl.otillas,"  "  Evolutions  from  line,"  "  Evolutions  from  line  of  ship 
or  division  flotillas,"  "  Speed,"  "  Distance  and  interval,"  "  Guide," 


8  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

"  Exercise  under  sail  or  oars,"  **  Exercise  with  landing  force." 
The  evolutions  as  signaled  are  all  performed  by  the  oblique  or 
direct  method ;  rectangular  evolutions,  if  desired,  can  be  per- 
formed by  the  necessary  individual  signals  for  each  movement. 

6.  Target-practice  signals  will  cover  all  general  situations  of 
gun  and  torpedo  target  practice.  Special  temporary  codes  may 
still  be  necessary  to  meet  the  requirements  of  special  phases  of 
firing  and  will  be  provided  in  the  special  instructions  governing 
such  firings.  These  signals  are  arranged  alphabetically.  All  that 
apply  to  torpedo  practices  are  grouped  under  "  Torpedo." 

7.  Miscellaneous  signals  comprise  all  boat  signals  not  included 
in  classes  (a)  and  {b)  of  article  4.  They  are  arranged  alpha- 
betically, incuding  references  to  the  subdivisions  of  (a)  and  (b). 

8.  It  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  boats  are  in  general  not 
well  adapted  to  the  use  of  flag  signals  and  therefore  that  the 
semaphore  and  wigwag  systems  should  be  used  when  practicable 
for  transmitting  boat  signals.  The  megaphone  may  also  fre- 
quently be  of  convenient  use  in  flag  boats  in  place  of  visual  signals. 

9.  In  general  the  rules  for  signaling  prescribed  in  the  Introduc- 
tion to  the  Signal  Books  hold  where  practicable  in  making  deck 
and  boat  signals.  The  rules  are  reproduced  in  this  book  so  far  as 
needed,  with  some  modifications  which  apply  only  to  the  use  of 
this  book ;  among  these  the  following  will  be  observed :  Ship 
flotilla  flag  boats  repeat  signals  unless  otherwise  directed,  but 
other  boats  and  all  vessels  using  only  the  Deck  and  Boat  Book 
acknowledge  by  showing  the  answering  pennant,  boats  using  a 
hand  pennant ;  the  compass  signals  indicate  magnetic  courses  and 
bearings ;  night  signals  to  boats  are  answered  by  a  hand  lantern  or 
torch  or  Very's  red  star. 


CHAPTER  I.  . 
BOATS  IN  GENERAL. 

10.  The  following  instructions  concerning  boats  and  boat 
service,  boat  salutes  and  etiquette,  the  handling  of  boats  under 
varied  conditions,  etc.,  are  essentially  taken  from  the  Boat  Book 
of  1908,  corrected  to  date  to  conform  with  authorized  changes, 
such  as  relate  purely  to  seamanship  having  been  taken  originally 
from  either  Knight's  Modern  Seamanship  or  Luce's  Seamanship 
(Ward)  1895. 

11.  The  term  "  power  boat "  as  used  in  this  book  and  in  all  sig- 
naling applies  to  boats  propelled  by  any  mechanical  power,  such 
as  steam  or  internal  combustion  engines  or  electric  motors ;  the 
two  last-named  types  are  specifically  termed,  respectively,  motor 
boats  (of  various  kinds)  and  electric  boats  (of  various  kinds). 

12.  Vessels  of  the  United  States  Navy  are  supplied  with  one  or 
more  of  the  following  classes  of  boats : 

Steamers.  Motor  whaleboats. 

Motor  boats.  Dinghies. 

Sailing  launches.  Dories. 

Motor  sailing  launches.  Motor  dories. 

Cutters.  Wherries. 

Whaleboats.  Punts,  catamarans,  etc. 

Steam  barges  or  motor  barges  are  furnished  flagships. 

13.  A  whaleboat  habitually  used  by  a  commanding  officer  and 
flying  his  pennant  is  known  as  a  gig  while  so  employed. 

GENERAL  DESCRIPTION. 

14.  General  remarks. — The  size  of  ships'  boats  is  indicated  by 
their  length  in  feet;  for  example,  a  28-foot  cutter,  a  36-foot 
steamer,  etc.  The  following  is  the  length  (in  feet)  of  the  boats 
now  supplied  to  vessels :  Steamers,  50,  40,  and  30  feet ;  motor 
boats  of  various  sizes ;  motor  sailing  launches  and  sailing  launches, 
50,  40,  36,  S3,  30,  and  24  feet ;  cutters,  30,  28,  26,  and  24  feet,  and  a 
standard  31-foot  racing  cutter;  whaleboats,  30,  28,  24,  and  20  feet; 
dinghies,  20  and  16  feet;  motor  dories,  21  feet;  dories,  17  feet; 

9 


10  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

wherries,  14  and  12  feet ;  and  punts,  14,  12,  and  10  feet.  Boats  of 
the  various  classes  are  distinguished  in  each  ship  by  their  num- 
bers in  each  class — first,  second,  and  third  steamers;  first  and 
second  whaleboats,  etc. 

15.  Steamers. — All  steamers  of  the  regulation  type  are  fitted  to 
mount  a  light  rapid-fire  or  machine  gun  in  the  bow.  They  are  not 
fitted  with  sail  power,  but  are  fitted  with  rowlock  sockets  in  the 
gunwale  and  should  always  carry  two  oars  and  rowlocks  for  use 
in  an  emergency.  Those  assigned  to  the  use  of  flag  officers  are 
termed  steam  barges. 

16.  Sailing  launches  are  heavy  working  boats,  square  sterned, 
and  generally  sloop  rigged.  They  are  fitted  to  mount  a  light 
.'apid-fire  or  machine  gun  in  the  bow.  They  are  supplied  with 
oars,  and  instead  of  rowlocks  tjiey  have  gromp-tets  and  thole  pins ; 
by  double  banking  the  oars  a  considerable  speed  may  be  attained. 
These  boats  are  specially  designed  for  ships'  heavy  work,  such  as 
carrying  stores  or  large  liberty  parties  or  landing  force,  carrying 
out  anchors,  weighing  kedge  anchors.  All  sailing  launches  are 
now  built  with  engine  foundation,  shaft  log,  etc.,  so  that  a  motor 
may  readily  be  installed.  When  motors  are  installed  in  saihng 
launches  the  boats  are  termed  motor  sailing  launches.  Motor 
sailing  launches  are  considered  primarily  as  pulling  (or  sailing) 
boats,  and  they  have  all  of  the  outfit  of  sailing  launches,  and,  in 
addition,  the  running  lights,  bell,  fog  horn,  etc.,  required  by  law. 
The  24-foot  sailing  launch  is  fitted  with  swivel  rowlocks  and  lug 
rig. 

17.  Cutters  are  double-banked,  square-sterned  boats,  with  finer 
lines  than  launches,  pulling  10  or  12  oars,  according  to  size.  They 
are  used  as  running  boats  and  for  ship's  general  duties  and  are 
fitted  with  either  sunken  or  swivel  rowlocks.  Their  sailing  rig  is 
the  sliding  gunter  or  double  standing  lug  rig,  either  with  or  with- 
out jib.  They  are  frequently  fitted  to  carry  a  light  rapid-fire  or 
machine  gun  in  the  bow.  These  boats  are  not  being  supplied  to 
the  newest  vessels. 

18.  Whaleboats  are  double-ended  and  may  be  either  single  or 
double  banked,  pulling  6  or  12  oars,  respectively.  They  are  used 
as  running  boats  and  for  ship's  general  duties  of  a  lighter  char- 
acter than  that  assigned  to  launches  and  cutters.  They  are  fitted 
with  swivel  rowlocks.  Their  sailing  rig  is  the  sliding  gunter  or 
double  standing  lug  rig,  frequently  without  jib.  In  port  they  are 
steered  with  a  rudder,  but  at  sea  are  fitted  with  a  steering  oar 
passed  through  a  steering  rowlock  on  the  quarter.  These  boats 
are  therefore  particularly  adapted  for  use  at  sea  and  are  generally 
used  as  lifeboats. 

19.  Dinghies  are  small  handy  boats,  shaped  like  cutters,  single 
banked  with  four  oars.     They  are  used  as  market  boats  or  for 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  ii 

light  rough  work  or  ship's  light  duties.  Owing  to  the  small  crew 
required,  they  are  particularly  convenient  for  nearly  any  light 
work  in  port.    They  carry  sails  and  are  sprit  rigged. 

20.  Wherries  are  light  handy  boats  for  officers'  use.  They  can 
be  pulled  by  one  man  and  are  not  furnished  sails. 

21.  Punts  are  rectangular  flat-bottomed  boats,  intended  for 
painting  and  general  cleaning  around  the  ship's  water  line.  They 
are  fitted  with  rowlocks  on  each  side,  but  are  usually  propelled  by 
sculling. 

22.  Catamarans  (or  balsas)  are  platforms  secured  to  two  hollow 
floats.  They  are  used  for  the  same  purpose  as  punts,  but  are  less 
handy.  They  are  really  carried  on  account  of  their  demonstrated 
value  in  case  of  shipwreck.  They  are  fitted  with  swivel  rowlocks 
and  oars,  but  are  usually  sculled.  Life  rafts  of  various  designs 
are  sometimes  carried,  but  no  regulation  type  has  been  adopted. 

23.  Motor  boats  are  classified  as  follows : 

(i)  The  barge  of  a  flag  officer  as  a  "motor  barge." 

(2)  Service  type  launches  built  for  heavy  duty,  and  speed  and 
semispeed  boats,  as  '*  motor  boats." 

(3)  Sailing  launches  with  auxiliary  engines  as  "motor-sailing 
launches." 

(4)  Double-ended  power  boats,  whaleboat  type,  as  "  motor 
whaleboats." 

(5)  Power  dories  as  "motor  dories." 

NOMENCLATURE. 

24.  The  following  are  the  authorized  names  of  the  various  parts 
of  a  naval  boat : 

Backboard. — The  thwartship  board  immediately  forward  of  the 
coxswain's  box,  placed  across  the  stern  sheets  of  the  boat  to  sup- 
port the  backs  of  the  occupants. 

Bilge. — The  flat  part  of  a  boat's  bottom,  on  each  side  of  the 
keel,  on  which  the  boat  would  rest  if  aground.  The  bilge  extends 
out  to  where  the  frames  turn  upward,  which  part  is  known  as  the 
"  turn  of  the  bilge." 

Blade. — The  board  flattened  part  of  an  oar. 

Boom. — The  long  pole  or  spar  used  to  extend  the  foot  of  a  fore- 
and-aft  sail,  for  example,  main  boom,  jib  boom.  / 

Bottom  boards. — The  fore-and-aft  strips  secured  to  the  frames, 
forming  the  floor  of  the  boat. 

Brails. — The  lines  used  for  hauling  the  clew  of  a  sliding  gunter 
sail  up  to  the  masthead.  They  are  secured  to  the  clew  of  the  sail, 
lead  up  through  leaders  at  the  masthead,  thence  down  into  the  boalL 


12  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

Clezv  (of  a  sail). — The  lower  after  corner  of  a  fore-and-aft  sail. 

Deadwood. — A  body  of  timber  built  on  top  of  the  keel  at  either 
end  of  the  boat  to  afford  a  firm  fastening  for  the  cant  frames. 

Frames. — The  ribs  of  the  boat ;  curved  timbers  secured  to  the 
keel  and  extending  upward  to  the  gunwale. 

Fore  sheets. — The  portion  of  the  boat  forward  of  the  foremost 
thwart. 

Gaff. — A  spar  used  to  extend  the  upper  edge  of  the  quadrilateral 
fore-and-aft  sail  of  a  sloop  rig. 

Gooseneck. — A  sort  of  iron  hook,  fitted  to  the  inner  end  of  main 
boom,  used  for  securing  the  latter  to  the  mainmast.  It  permits 
free  movement  of  the  boom  in  any  direction,  with  the  gooseneck  as 
a  center. 

Gripes. — Boat  gripes  are  made  of  sennit  or  canvas  and  go 
around  the  bottom  of  the  boat  in  securing  a  boat  for  sea,  those  for 
lifeboats  being  usually  fitted  with  a  slip  hook.  Boat  gripes  for 
steamers  and  sailing  launches  are  made  of  chain,  have  a  hook  or 
clamp  on  the  rail  and  are  secured  to  the  deck  by  turnbuckjes. 

Gudgeons. — Small  metal  fittings,  similar  to  eyebolts,  secured  to 
the  stern  post  of  a  boat  for  the  rudder  to  hand  on.  They  receive 
the  pintles  and  thus  support  the  rudder. 

Halliards. — Lines  used  to  hoist  and  lower  topmasts  or  yards  or 
jib,  or  the  gaff  of  a  sloop. 

Handle  (of  an  oar). — The  small  part  of  an  oar,  on  the  inboard 
end  of  the  loom,  which  the  oarsman  grasps  when  pulling. 

Head  of  sail. — The  upper  corner  of  a  triangular  sail.  The  upper 
edge  of  a  quadrilateral  sail. 

Heel  of  mast. — The  lower  part  of  the  boat's  mast ;  the  end  of  the 
mast  which  fits  in  the  step  on  the  keel. 

Keel. — The  principal  timber  of  a  boat,  extending  from  stem  to 
stern  at  the  bottom,  and  supporting  the  whole  frame. 

Leather. — The  portion  of  an  oar  which  rests  in  the  rowlock. 
This  is  sometimes  covered  with  canvas,  but  is  usually  covered  with 
leather,  hence  the  name. 

Loom. — The  portion  of  an  oar  extending  from  blade  to  handle. 

Lug  rig. — Applied  to  large  quadrilateral  sails  bent  to  yards  that 
hang  obliquely  to  the  mast ;  the  halliards  being  secured  nearer  to 
one  end  of  the  yard  than  to  the  other.  In  the  "  standing  lug"  rig 
used  in  the  Navy,  the  foretack  is  lashed  or  hooked  to  an  eyebolt 
on  the  after  side  of  the  foremast. 

Main  boom. — The  boom  on  the  mainmast  which  spreads  the  foot 
of  the  mainsail. 

Oars. — Long  wooden  implements  for  propelling  boats  by  falling. 
Oars  consist  of  blade,  loom,  and  handle. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  13 

Painter. — A  rope,  secured  in  the  bow,  for  towing  or  for  securing 
the  boat. 

Peak. — The  upper  after  corner  of  a  quadrilateral  fore-and-aft 
sail. 

Pintles. — Small  straight  pieces  of  metal  secured  to  the  rudder 
and  fitting  in  the  gudgeons  on  the  sternpost,  thus  supporting  the 
rudder.  In  some  boats  the  pintle  is  a  long  erect  pin  on  the  stern- 
post  fitting  in  rings  or  gudgeons  on  the  rudder. 

Plug. — The  stopper  which  is  placed  in  the  drain  hole  when  the 
boat  is  lowered.  It  should  be  secured  in  the  boat  by  a  small 
lanyard  or  chain. 

Rising. — The  narrow  fore-and-aft  strakes  inside  of  a  boat, 
secured  to  the  frames,  on  which  the  thwarts  rest. 

Rowlocks. — Forked  pieces  of  metal  in  which  the  leathers  of  oars 
rest  while  pulling.  Sunken  or  box  rowlocks  are  those  which  are 
set  down  into  the  gunwale  of  the  boat.  Swivel  rowlocks  are 
movable,  the  shank  of  the  rowlock  fitting  in  a  socket  in  the  gun 
wale. 

Rudder. — A  flat  board  hung  abaft  the  sternpost  by  means  of 
gudgeons  and  pintles,  used  for  steering  a  boat. 

Sheer. — The  rise  of  the  longitudinal  lines  of  a  boat  from  the 
horizontal  plane,  as  seen  in  looking  along  a  boat's  side.  The  curve 
of  the  gunwale  when  compared  with  the  straight  water  line. 

Sheer  stroke. — The  upper  strake  of  the  boat. 

Sheets. — The  lines  secured  to  the  clew  of  a  sail,  or  to  the  main 
boom,  used  to  set  the  sail  and  hold  it  in  position. 

Shrouds. — Lines  stretched  from  the  masthead  to  a  boat's  rail. 
They  support  the  mast  on  each  side. 

Sliding  gunter  rig. — A  rig  for  boats  in  which  a  sliding  topmast  is 
used  to  extend  a  triangular  sail.  As  used  in  the  Navy,  it  consists 
of  two  triangular  sails  (fore  and  mainsail)  and  usually  a  jib.  The 
mainsail  is  fitted  with  a  main  boom. 

Sloop  rig. — Consists  of  a  large  fore-and-aft  quadrilateral  sail 
with  gaff  and  boom,  also  a  jib  and  jib  boom. 

Sprit  rig. — Consists  of  a  single  mast  carrying  a  large  quadri- 
lateral sail,  the  peak  of  which  is  held  out  by  a  light  movable 
wooden  boom,  called  a  sprit,  which,  when  in  place,  extends  from 
the  peak  of  the  sail  to  a  stirrup  on  the  lower  part  of  the  mast. 

Stem. — The  upturned  portion  of  the  keel,  at  the  bow  of  the  b*?at, 
to  which  the  forward  ends  of  the  planks  are  secured. 

Step  of  mast. — A  small  metal  receptacle  on  the  kee!  in  yfnU'h  tiie 
heel  of  the  mast  rests. 

Steering  rowlock. — A  peculiar  form  of  swivel  rowlock,  titted 
near  the  stern  of  a  whaleboat,  in  which  the  steering  oar  is  shipped. 
This  is  sometimes  called  a  crutch. 

Stern  fast. — A  stern  painter  for  use  in  securing  the  stern  of  a 
boat. 


14  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

Sternpost. — The  principal  piece  of  timber  in  a  boat's  stern 
frame.  It  is  a  vertical  continuation  of  the  keel  at  the  after  part  of 
the  boat. 

Stern  sheets. — The  space  in  the  boat  abaft  the  thwarts. 

Strokes. — Continuous  lines  of  fore-and-aft  planking.  Each  line 
of  planking  is  known  as  a  strake. 

Stretchers. — Athwartship,  movable  pieces  against  which  the 
oarsmen  brace  their  feet  in  pulling. 

Strongback. — The  spar  lashed  to  the  two  davits  on  which  a  boat 
is  hoisted. 

Tack. — The  forward,  lower  corner  of  a  fore-and-aft  sail. 

Thrum  mats. — Mats  made  of  a  small  piece  of  canvas,  with  short 
strands  of  rope  yarn  sewed  on  it — called  "  thrumming."  These 
are  placed  between  the  rowlocks  and  the  oars  to  prevent  noise  in 
pulling. 

Thwarts. — The  seats  on  which  the  oarsmen  sit. 

Throat. — The  forward  upper  corner  of  the  quadrilateral  fore- 
and-aft  sail  in  a  sloop  rig.    Also  called  the  nock. 

Tiller. — A  bar  or  lever,  fitted  fore-and-aft  in  the  rudder  head  by 
which  the  rudder  is  moved. 

Topping  lift. — A  line  used  for  supporting  or  hauling  up  the 
boom  of  a  fore-and-aft  sail. 

Trailing  lines. — Small  lines  secured  to  the  boat  and  around  the 
oars  to  prevent  the  latter  from  getting  adrift  when  trailed. 

Yard. — A  spar  to  which  the  head  of  a  lug  sail  is  attached.  The 
term  lug  is  applied  to  the  forward  part  of  it  when  it  has  to  be 
dipped  (in  some  rigs)  from  one  side  to  the  other  sof  the  mast  in 
going  about. 

Yoke. — Athwartship  piece  fitting  over  the  rudder  head,  and  by 
which  the  rudder  is  moved  when  the  tiller  is  not  shipped. 

Yoke  lanyards. — Small  lines  attached  to  or  rove  through  the 
ends  of  the  yoke  for  use  in  steering  when  the  yoke  is  shipped. 


CHAPTER  11. 

BOAT  GEAR  AND  EQUIPMENT. 

BOAT  GEAR. 

PULLING-BOATS. 

25.  The  following  boat  gear  shall  be  carried  by  pulling-boats  at 

all  times,  except  when  special  circumstances  render  it  undesirable : 
(i)  Anchor,  with  chain,  or  line,  bent  and  ready  for  use. 

(2)  Boat  painter. 

(3)  Stern  fast. 

(4)  One  complete  set  of  oars.  If  swivel  rowlocks  or  thole  pins 
and  grommets,  which  do  not  permit  tossing,  are  used,  each  oar 
must  be  fitted  with  a  trailing  line. 

(5)  Spare  oars  for  one  thwart  (fitted  with  trailing  line  if  the 
above-described  rowlocks  are  used). 

(6)  Three  boat  hooks,  except  dinghies  and  wherries,  two. 

(7)  Spars,  sails,  and  rigging,  in  spar  cover  complete,  ready  for 
use.  (Spars  and  sails  are  not  furnished  for  racing  cutters,  dories, 
or  wherries.  They  are  furnished  for  only  one  boat  on  destroyers 
or  torpedo  boats.) 

(8)  Awnings  and  stanchions  if  climatic  conditions  demand. 
(They  are  not  furnished  for  racing  cutters  or  dories.) 

(9)  Boat  bucket  for  bailing  and  for  general  use. 

(10)  Breakers  with  a  quantity  of  fresh  water  equal  to  at  least 
one-half  gallon  for  each  person  in  the  crew. 

(11)  One  set  of  stretchers  complete. 

(12)  A  canvas  bag  containing  one  boat  ensign  and  staff,  a  2-foot 
red  wigwag  signal  flag  and  staff,  one  answering  pennant  and  staff, 
one  boat  distinguishing  flag  and  staff,  and  in  the  case  of  gigs  a 
captain's  pennant  and  staff. 

(13)  Boat  compass  (when  boat  is  in  the  water). 

15 


i6  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

(14)  Boat  box.  (Boat  boxes  are  not  furnished  for  dinghies^ 
dories,  or  wherries,  or  for  boats  issued  to  destroyers  or  torpedo 
boats.; 

(15)  Tin  box  with  cover  for  cleaning  gear. 

( 16)  Key  to  boat  box. 

(17)  Rudder  and  tiller,  each  fitted  with  a  light  lanyard. 

(18)  Plug,  secured  to  keel  by  a  good  lanyard  or  to  hull  plug 
fitting  by  a  chain. 

(19)  One  set  of  rowlocks,  and  two  spare  ones  (if  swivel  row- 
locks are  used),  each  fitted  with  a  short  lanyard. 

(20)  One  set  of  boat  fenders,  fitted  with  lanyards. 

26.  (i)  A  tarpaulin  and  two  grapnels  fitted  with  chain  or  rope 
are  supplied  for  each  boat  for  use  if  needed. 

(2)  When  a  boat  is  to  be  absent  from  the  ship  after  dark  it 
shall  carry  a  deck  lantern  ready  for  use  in  addition  to  the  boat 
signal  lantern  in  the  boat  box. 

27.  The  compass,  unless  secured  in  boat,  shall  habitually  be  kept 
in  the  navigator's  storeroom  when  the  boat  is  not  in  the  water. 
The  remainder  of  the  boat  gear  shall  habitually  be  kept  in  the 
boat.  Water  in  breakers  shall  be  renewed  from  time  to  tiir.e,  to 
keep  it  palatable  and  healthful. 


STEAMERS  AND  MOTOR  BOATS. 

28.  The  following  articles  form  the  complete  equipment  of  a 
steamer  and  a  motor  boat,  and  shall  be  carried  at  all  times  except 
when  special  circumstances  render  it  undesirable : 

(i)  Anchor,  with  chain  or  line  bent  and  ready  for  use. 

(2)  Boat  painter. 

(3)  Stern  fast. 

(4)  Two  oars,  with  rowlocks,  or  grommets  and  thole  pins. 

(5)  Three  boat  hooks. 

(6)  Boat  bucket. 

(7)  Breaker,  filled  with  drinking  water  (same  amount  as  for 
pulHng  boats,  art.  25  (10)). 

(8)  A  canvas  bag  containing  a  boat  ensign  and  staff,  a  2-foot 
red  wigwag  flag  and  staff,  one  answering  pennant  and  staff,  one 
boat-distinguishing  flag  and  staff,  and,  in  case  of  a  special  boat, 
appropriate  flag  or  pennant  and  staff. 

(9)  Boat  compass. 

(10)  Boat  box,  complete. 

(11)  Tin  box,  with  cover,  for  cleaning  gear. 

ii2)  Key  to  boat  box. 
13)  Puddings  or  fenders. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  17 

(14)  Cushions  and  cushion  covers. 

(15)  Necessary  fuel,  lubricating  oil,  water,  etc. 

(16)  Lantern,  trimmed,  filled,  and  ready  for  lighting. 

(17)  Necessary  implements  for  service  of  engines. 

(18)  Two  circular  life  buoys,  one  aft  and  one  forward,  neatly 
secured  where  readily  detachable. 

(19)  Life  jackets  in  the  stern  sheets. 

(20)  Running  lights,  fog  horn,  fog  bell,  whistle,  etc.,  as  required 
by  ''  Rules  of  the  Road." 

(21)  Two  hand  grapnels,  fitted  with  chain  or  rope. 

(22)  A  bucket  of  sand  for  extinguishing  gasoline  fires  (for 
gasoline  boats). 

(23)  A  chemical  fire  extinguisher  (for  gasoline  boats). 

(24)  Tarpaulin. 

MOTOR   SAILING   LAUNCHES,   MOTOR   WHALEBOATS,   AND 
MOTOR  DORIES. 

29.  These  boats  shall  carry  the  following  equipment  at  all 
times,  except  when  special  circumstances  render  it  undesirable : 

(i)  AH  equipment  carried  by  pulling  boats  of  a  similar  type. 

(2)  Running  lights,  fog  horn,  fog  bell,  whistle,  etc.,  as  required 
by  "  Rules  of  the  Road." 

(3)  A  bucket  of  sand  for  extinguishing  gasoline  fires. 

(4)  A  chemical  fire  extinguisher. 

(5)  Fuel. 

(6)  Necessary  tools  for  service  of  engine. 

BOAT  BOX. 

30.  The  boat  box  shall  be  water-tight,  as  small  as  possible,  and 
arranged  to  go  under  the  thwarts  without  difficulty.  It  sliould  be 
provided  with  a  lock  and  key,  and  the  boat  shall  never  leave  the 
ship  without  the  latter.    It  shall  contain  the  following  articles: 


(I)  Ax. 

(9)   One  pair  of  cutting  pliers, 

(2)  Hatchet. 

large  size. 

(3)  Handsaw. 

(10)   One   brace,   with   i,   i,   f, 

(4)  Hammer. 

and  I  inch  bits. 

(5)   Screw  driver. 

(11)   Marlin  spike. 

(6)  Cold  chisel. 

(12)   Palm. 

(7)  Boat  calking  iron. 

(13)   Sail  needles. 

(8)  Giant  tool  handle. 

(14)  Assorted  wire  nails. 

i8 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


One  pound  of  tallow. 

Six  candles. 

Safety  matches  in  her- 
metically sealed  box,  or 
large-mouthed  bottle 
with  screw  top. 

Boat  signal  lantern. 

Bottle,  li-pint,  illuminat- 
ing oil. 

Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


31.  The  following  articles  shall  be  assigned  to  each  boat.  They 
shall  be  kept  in  a  designated  place  on  board  ship,  and  placed  in 
the  boat  only  when  required  for  drill  or  service. 

(i)  One  small  medical  emergency  box,  containing  the  follow- 
ing articles  and  directions  for  giving  medicines : 


(15)  Assorted  screws. 

(24) 

(16)  Tacks,  copper,  f-inch. 

(25) 

(17)   Sheet  lead. 

(26) 

(18)  Two    pounds    of    i-inch 

wire  seizmg. 

(19)  Lamp  wick. 

(20)   Spun  yarn. 

(27) 

(21)   Sail  twine. 

(28) 

(22)   Fishing  lines,  hooks,  and 

sinkers. 

(2Q) 

(23)  Lead    and    line,    first    2 

fathoms  marked  in  feet. 

Antiseptic     tablets      (bichlo- 
ride  mercury) bottle  i 

Bandages     6 

Beef,  extract  bottle  i 

Calomel,  tablets    do       i 

Cathartic  tablets .     do       i 

Chlorodyne    tablets...     do       i 

Gauze   yards  2 

Lead    and    opium    tablets 
bottle  I 


Mustard  plasters box  i 

Packages,    first-aid 6 

Plaster,  rubber roll  i 

Quinine      pills      (3-grain) 

bottle  I 

Soda,  bicarbonate can  i 

Tourniquets,  rubber,  instant.  4 

Vaseline,  carbolized jar  i 

Whisky bottle  I 


(2)   One  set  of  arm  curtains  with  fittings  complete. 


COOKING  UTENSILS. 

32.  These  are  supplied  only  when  required.  For  example,  at 
abandon  ship  they  are  undesirable  complications,  excepting  a 
kettle  and  mess  gear.  Boat  expeditions  may  or  may  not  require 
them,  depending  upon  the  nature  of  the  service. 

33.  The  cooking  outfit  for  boat  expeditions,  when  it  is  expected 
to  do  cooking  in  the  boat,  would  consist  simply  of : 

(i)  Galvanized  iron  bucket,  or  pan,  filled  with  sand. 

(2)  Fuel. 

(3)  Iron  mess  kettle  and  frying  pan. 

(4)  Mess  gear.  At  least  6  plates,  6  knives,  6  forks,  6  spoons,  6 
cups  or  bowls. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  19 

34.  (i)  If  cooking  in  the  boat  is  anticipated,  additional  por- 
tions of  the  ration,  such  as  butter,  salt,  pepper,  sugar,  coffee,  etc., 
would  be  necessary. 

(2)  These  can  be  most  expeditiously  supplied  by  the  man  who 
provides  mess  gear,  if  they  are  to  be  suppHed  in  small  quantities. 
If  providing  for  a  considerable  force  ashore,  the  amounts  of  each 
shall  be  carefully  determined  and  provided  by  the  commissariat. 

(3)  In  actually  abandoning  ship,  the  man  providing  mess  gear 
should  provide  a  small  amount  of  these  items,  if  landing  is 
probable,  since,  though  no  cooking  will  be  done  in  the  boat,  they 
might  be  necessary  on  shore. 

PROVISIONS. 

35.  (i)  The   amount   of   provisions   and   water   carried   under 

various  circumstances  will   depend  upon  the  probable  length  of 
service  and  the  probable  requirements  of  the  expedition. 

(2)  Bread,  if  carried,  will  be  carried  in  water-tight  tins.  These 
should  be  supplied  in  wooden  boxes,  in  order  to  preserve  the  tins 
intact. 

(3)  Fresh  water  is  carried  in  breakers  containing  8  gallons 
each. 

(4)  Canned  meats,  if  carried,  will  be  in  wooden  boxes  in  which 
shipped. 

(5)  The  specially  prepared  "emergency  abandon-ship  rations" 
are  packed  in  tins,  10  tins  in  a  wooden  box,  and  each  tin  containing 
I  day's  ration  for  i  man. 

(6)  Coffee,  tea,  sugar,  and  salt,  if  for  a  small  expedition,  are 
carried  in  small  waterproof  packages  ;  if  provided  by  the  com- 
missariat for  a  considerable  body  of  men,  in  the  original  cases  in 
.yv^hich  received  on  board  ship. 

(7)  Other  portions  of  the  Navy  ration  may  be  carried  in  actual 
service,  when  time  and  circumstances  permit. 

36.  (i)  Except  in  an  emergency,  such  as  abandon  ship,  the  com- 
missary officer  will  ration  men  leaving  the  ship,  having  in  mind 
the  character  of  the  service  and  probable  time  of  absence  from 
the  ship. 

(2)  The  following  is  suggested  as  a  basis  per  100  rations: 

100  rations. 

Bread  (hard- or  soft) pounds  100 

Corned  beef   (canned ) do.        75 

Baked  beans   (canned)    .^ do.        45 

Coffee  (roasted  and  ground)    do.  8 

Sugar    (granulated )     do.         15 

Tomatoes    (canned)    do.       100 

Salt   (table) do.  2 

Pepper   (black) ounces      4 


20  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

37.  Abandon  ship  provisions. — 

(i)  Rations. — There  are  generally  supplied  special  "Emer- 
gency abandon  ship  rations"  (see  art.  35  (5)).  When  these  are 
not  provided,  the  abandon  ship  ration  is  i  pound  of  hard  bread 
and  three-fourths  pound  canned  meat.  In  either  case  there  shall 
be  kept  ready  for  use  abandon  ship  rations  for  each  officer  and 
man  of  the  ship's  complement  sufficient  for  li  days  in  the  case  of 
battleships,  battle  cruisers,  and  armored  cruisers,  and  for  3  days 
in  the  case  of  all  other  vessels. 

(2)  Water. — The  amount  of  water  carried  in  breakers  for 
abandon  ship  is  based  upon  the  number  of  men  that  can  be  carried 
at  one  time  in  the  ship's  boats.  The  allowance  per  man  on  this 
basis  is  one-half  gallon  on  battleships,  battle  cruisers,  and 
armored  cruisers,  and  ih  gallons  on  all  other  vessels. 

HOSPITAL  BOATS. 

38.  (i)  The  boat  with  the  ambulance  party  shall  carry  the 
medical  officer  and  a  large  medicine  chest  containing  stimulants 
and  medicines.  Each  article  shall  be  labeled  in  English  and  dis- 
tinctly marked,  with  directions  for  administering  and  quantity  of 
dose,  in  terms  that  any  one  can  understand.  The  medical  officer 
shall  also  take  a  set  of  surgical  instruments,  stretchers,  and  other 
necessary  surgical  conveniences. 

(2)  The  hospital  boat  shall  carry  no  arms  whatever,  and  shall 
fly  a  Red  Cross  flag  on  a  staff  in  the  bow. 

ARTILLERY  BOATS. 

39.  (i)  If  gun  is  to  be  used  in  boat  only,  artillery  boats  shall 
carry  the  following: 

Boat  gun-mount,  complete,  secured  to  deck  plate. 

All  implements  for  service  of  the  gun. 

Box  of  accessories  and  spare  parts. 

Ammunition. 

In  short,  the  same  supplies  should  be  provided  as  are  required 
for  the  service  of  the  gun  on  board  ship. 

(2)  If  gun  is  to  be  landed — 

Field  carriage,  with  all  implements  for  service  of  the  gun. 

Shifting  spar,  grommet,  and  lashing,  and  skids  or  other  means 
for  landing  the  gun. 

Haversack  for  landing  armorer's  tools;  also  accessories,  spare 
parts,  and  all  articles  necessary  for  the  service  of  the  gun. 

Ammunition. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  21 

(3)  If  gun  is  to  be  used  both  in  the  boat  and  on  shore,  both  the 
boat  mount  and  field  carriage  shall  be  provided,  and  accessories, 
spare  parts,  etc.,  as  above  enumerated. 

(4)  The  equipment  of  the  artillery  boat  for  drill  shall  be  in  all 
respects\he  same  as  if  the  gun  were  to  be  fired  in  battle. 

AMMUNITIOPr. 

40.  Ammunition  shall  be  carried  in  the  chests  in  which  supplied. 
The  amount  will  be  specified  in  every  case  and  will  depend  upon 
the  nature  of  the  service.  The  following  is  the  minimum  anu)unt 
to  be  supplied : 

3-inch  field  gun. — Filled  ammunition  boxes  (32  rounds), 
i-pounder  R.  F. — Filled  ammunition  box  (60  rounds). 
Benet-Mercie  or  Colt. — 1000  rounds. 
RiHe. — 100  rounds  for  each  rifle. 
Pistol. — 48  rounds  for  each  pistol. 

SENIOR  OFFICER'S  BOAT. 

41.  The  boat  conveying  the  commander  of  the  expedition  shall 
carry  the  means  for  efficient  communication  with  other  boats,  and, 
if  practicable,  with  the  ship.  When  available  a  boat  radio  set 
should  be  used  ;  otherwise  acetylene  signal  lamps.  A  box  of  Very's 
stars  and  a  supply  of  rockets  may  be  useful  for  prearranged 
signals.   • 


CHAPTER  III. 
LIFEBOATS. 

AT  SEA  AND  IN  PORT. 

42.  At  sea. — (i)  When  at  sea,  every  ship  shall  at  all  times  keep 
on  each  side,  ready  for  lowering,  a  boat  which  is  best  adapted  as  a 
lifeboat. 

(2)  At  the  beginning  of  every  watch  at  sea  the  officer  of  the 
deck  shall  have  the  lifeboat  crew  of  the  watch  mustered  abreast 
the  lee  boat,  and  the  coxswain  of  the  lifeboat  crew  of  that  watch 
shall  satisfy  himself  by  personal  inspection  that  both  lifeboats  are 
ready  for  lowering  and  shall  report  the  fact  to  the  officer  of  the 
deck. 

(3)  A  lifeboat  is  secured  for  sea,  i.  e.,  ready  for  lowering,  when 
in  the  following  condition :  Boat  at  the  davits,  griped  in,  falls 
clear,  detaching  apparatus  ready  for  detaching  at  the  word,  steer- 
ing oar  shipped  in  crutch,  oars  fitted  with  trailing  lines  and  ready 
for  getting  out  quickly,  rowlocks  shipped  and  fitted  with  lanyards, 
plug  in,  sea  painter  half-hitched  around  thwart,  life  lines  bent  to 
span,  life  jackets  in  boat,  lantern  filled  and  trimmed  (and  at  night 
lighted),  and  all  other  articles  of  the  boat  equipment  in  the  boat 
and  ready  for  use,  with  two  days'  water  and  provisions  for  the 
crew.  When  the  coxswain  of  the  lifeboat  crew  of  the  watch 
reports  a  lifeboat  ready  for  lowering,  it  is  understood  that  the 
boat  is  in  the  above  condition  and  that  the  crew  of  the  watch  have 
been  mustered,  each  man  abreast  his  own  thwart  (or  station)  of 
the  lee  boat  and  that  each  man  understands  his  duties  at  "  Man 
overboard."  In  lowering,  the  officer  or  coxswain  in  charge  of 
the  lifeboat  will  give  the  command  for  detaching. 

43.  In  port — (i)  The  United  States  Naval  Instructions  require 
that  "  In  port  one  or  both  lifeboats  shall  be  kept  ready  for  im- 
mediate use  from  sunset  until  colors  the  next  morning."  Hence 
when  there  is  no  suitable  boat  in  the  water  ready  for  immediate 
use  as  a  lifeboat,  at  least  one  boat  suitable  for  this  purpose  must 
be  kept  ready  for  instant  Iqwering.  This  is  particularly  necessary 
when  the  boats  which  are  in  the  water  are  heavy  and  unwieldy  or 
are  so  secured  that  they  could  not  be  quickly  used  in  an  emergency 
or  in  rough  weather  or  in  a  strong  tideway. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  23 

(2)  Owing  to  its  handiness,  a  dinghy  is  well  suited  for  use  as  a 
lifeboat  in  port  in  good  weather,  and  under  such  conditions  it 
may  be  designated  as  the  lifeboat  for  port  service.  The  boats 
designated  for  use  as  lifeboats  in  port  are  required  to  carry  only 
the  usual  equipment  for  boats  in  port,  but  the  gear  must  be  in 
order  and  ready  for  instant  use,  and  the  lantern  must  be  ready  in 
the  boat  for  lighting,  or  else  a  lighted  lantern  ready  for  use  must 
be  kept  at  hand  on  deck. 

NOTES  ON  LIFEBOATS. 

44. — (i)  Lifeboats  should  be  griped  securely  against  their 
strongbacks,  with  chafing  pads  between  the  boat  and  the  strong- 
backs,  and  the  gripes,  secured  by  toggle  or  pelican  hook,  ready  for 
instant  freeing.  . 

(2)  If  gripes  stretch  and  become  slack,  they  shoula  be  set  up  taut. 

(3)  At  night,  boat  falls  should  be  coiled  down  on  deck,  clear  for 
running;  during  the  day  the  coils  may  be  triced  up  to  davit  with 
becket  and  toggle. 

(4)  The  sea  painter  is  led  from  a  point  well  forward  on  the 
ship,  outside  of  everything,  and  secured  to  the  inboard  side  of  the 
forward  thwart  in  such  a  manner  that  it  can  be  readily  cast  off; 
if  necessary,  it  is  stopped  up  out  of  the  water  by  a  rope  yarn. 

(5)  The  knotted  lifelines,  one  for  each  member  of  the  crew, 
hang  from  the  span  for  the  use  of  the  crew  in  case  of  accident  in 
lowering  or  hoisting. 

(6)  The  life  jackets  should  be  placed,  one  under  each  thwart 
and  one  under  e  stern  sheets,  and  each  man  in  the  lifeboat  shall 
put  one  on  before  the  boat  is  lowered.  This  is  necessary  because 
of  the  danger  of  the  boat  swamping  alongside  in  rough  weather. 

(7)  If  the  lantern  is  not  provided  with  .a  shutter,  it  shall  be 
fitted  with  a  canvas  screen,  and  when  lighted  and  not  in  use  shall 
be  put  in  the  boat  bucket. 

(8)  Lifeboat  .crews  for  each  watch  are  designated  on  the  ship's 
station  bill.  When  a  lifeboat  crew  is  mustered,  the  men  shall 
muster  in  line  abreast  their  boat  (or  the  lee  boat)  in  the  order  of 
their  thwarts,  facing  inboard ;  men  stationed  to  lower  will  be 
abreast  their  respective  davits,  and  shall  personally  see  that  the 
falls  are  clear. 

(9)  The  proper  members  of  the  crew  shall  be  permanently 
stationed  for  unhooking  the  falls,  tending  the  seaf  painter,  and  for 
performing  other  duties  in  connection  with  lowering.  The  life- 
boat crew  of  the  watch,  including  the  men  stationed  for  lowering, 
for  observing  the  man,  for  signaling,  etc.,  are  not  to  leave  the 
weather  deck  without  permission,  except  for  meals. 

(10)  At  night  the  lifeboat  crew  of  the  watch,  and  other  men 
stationed  in  connection  therewith,  shall  remain  near  their  stations. 


24  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

LOWERING  A  LIFEBOAT   COr  Other  Boat)   AT  SEA  IN  BAD 
WEATHER  (With  Wind  and  Sea  Forward  of  the  Beam). 

45.  (i)  At  the  call  "Man  overboard"  (which  may  be  given  by 
word  of  month  or  sounded  on  the  bugle)  every  member  of  the 
lifeboat  crew  of  the  watch  goes  to  his  station  on  the  run.  The  lee 
lifeboat  should  be  manned.  If  there  is  any  doubt  about  which  boat 
is  to  be  lowered,  the  officer  of  the  deck  immediately  indicates  it 
by  the  command  "  Clear  away  the  starboard   (or  port)  lifeboat." 

(2)  The  men  take  their  seats  on  the  thwarts ;  each  man  imme- 
diately puts  on  a  life  jacket,  gets  his  oar  ready,  and  then,  if  not 
otherwise  engaged,  seizes  a  life  line  as  a  safety  precaution  in  case 
of  accident. 

(3)  If  there  is  not  a  good  lee,  the  officer  of  the  deck  shall  make 
one  by  altering"  the  course  of  the  ship.  It  is  customary  to  bring 
the  sea  a  little  on  the  bow,  but  in  this  position  the  lee  for  the  boat 
is  far  from  perfect,  as  the  ship  will  roll  and  pitch  considerably, 
and  the  waves  wash  along  the  lee  side.  Some  seamen  prefer  to 
bring  the  sea  on  the  quarter  rather  than  on  the  bow,  while  others 
advise  lying  in  the  trough  of  the  sea,  notwithstanding  the  heavy 
rolling.  The  best  position  will  doubtless  depend  upon  the  build 
and  trim  of  the  ship,  and  the  nature  of  the  sea.  (If  in  formation, 
the  ship  shall  be  handled  as  directed  in  the  Fleet  Tactics.) 

(4)  Oil  should  be  used  in  any  case,  both  ahead  and  astern  of 
the  boat. 

(5)  The  ship  should  be  kept  moving  slowly  ahead.  A  sea 
painter,  from  well  forward,  should  be  brought  into  the  boat 
through  the  inboard  bow  rowlock,  and  a  turn  taken  around  the 
inboard  end  of  the  forward  thwart. 

(6)  To  keep  the  boat  from  swinging,  f rapping  lines  may  be 
passed  around  the  falls,  the  ends  leading  inboard,  to  hold  the  boat 
close  in  to  the  side  as  it  is  lowered.  In  some  ships,  jackstays  with 
traveling  lizards  are  fitted  from  the  davit  heads  to  the  side  of  the 
ship.  A  turn  of  the  lizard  is  taken  under  a  thwart,  or  around  the 
standing  part  of  the  fall,  and  the  boat  is  held  near  the  side,  as  by 
the  frapping  lines  above  described.  Under  no  circumstances 
should  the  lizard  be  secured  to  the  boat  so  that  it  could  jam ;  the 
end  must  be  held  in  the  hand. 

(7)  The  great  danger,  both  in  lowering  and  immediately  after- 
wards, is  that  the  boat  will  be  dashed  against  the  ship's  side.  A 
sea  painter  brought  in  on  the  inner  bow  of  the  boat,  as  already 
described,  helps  to  sheer  her  off  as  she  strikes  the  water.  The 
coxswain  sheers  the  bow  out  by  throwing  the  stern  in  with  the 
steering  oar  as  the  boat  strikes  the  water. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  25 

(8)  The  after  fall  is  always  unhooked  first. 

(9)  Under  no  circumstances,  short  of  the  most  imperative 
necessity,  should  a  boat  be  lowered  while  the  ship  has  sternway ; 
and  it  is  always  desirable  to  have  a  little  headway.  There  is  much 
difference  of  opinion  as  to  the  speed  at  which  it  is  safe  to  lower  a 
boat — an  important  question  in  picking  up  a  man  overboard.  Some 
officers  having  seen  boats  lowered  without  accidents  at  speeds  as 
high  as  8  and  10  knots,  maintain  that  it  is  perfectly  safe  to  lower 
at  this  speed.  A  more  conservative  view  fixes  the  maximum  at 
something  like  half  this  speed.  It  is  safe  to  say  that  there  is  far 
less  danger  at  5  knots  than  10,  and  most  practical  men  would 
prefer  to  wait  a  little  longer  rather  than  to  take  the  chance  of  hav- 
ing to  deal  with  a  whole  boat  crew  in  the  water. 

(10)  When  all  is  ready  the  officer  of  the  deck,  or  the  officer  in 
charge  of  the  lowering,  commands  "  Lower  away  together."  The 
bow  and  stroke  oars  tend  the  falls  to  keep  them  clear  and  to  keep 
the  blocks  from  striking  other  members  of  the  crew  when  let  go. 
In  case  the  tumbler  hook  is  used,  these  men  grasp  the  tumbler  lan- 
yard, and  as  soon  as  the  boat  is  water  borne,  unhook  the  fall,  in 
case  it  is  not  unhooked  automatically.  Should  the  boat  not  be 
supplied  with  detaching  apparatus,  these  men  unhook  the  boat  falls 
— the  after  fall  first — as  soon  as  possible  after  the  boat  touches 
the  water.  Men  in  the  waist  thwarts  hold  the  boat  off,  if  the  ship 
is  rolling.  The  second  bowman  tends  the  sea  painter,  which  is 
hauled  taut  and  brought  in  through  the  inboard  bow  rowlock  be- 
fore lowering.  He  takes  a  turn  with  the  painter  around  the 
thwart,  holding  the  end  in  his  hand ;  it  should  never  be  made  fast. 

(11)  In  lowering  a  boat  the  falls  must  invariably  be  lowered 
together,  and  in  rough  weather  smart  lowering  may  be  required. 

(12)  If  the  boat  is  held  in  by  lizards  traveling  on  jackstays,  or 
by  frapping-lines  around  the  falls,  some  of  the  men  in  the  waist 
should  breast  the  boat  off  the  ship's  side  with  the  boat  hooks, 
being  careful  to  hold  the  butt  end  above  the  outer  gunwale  to 
avoid  danger  of  the  boat  being  driven  against  it  and  its  staving  a 
hole  in  the  planking. 

(13)  It  is  well  to  have  an  ax  or  hatchet  handy  in  case  anything 
should  jam  at  a  critical  time. 

(14)  When  the  boat  is  a  short  distance  from  the  water  the 
officer  of  the  boat,  or  in  his  absence  the  coxswain,  lets  go  the  de- 
taching apparatus,  or  gives  the  command  '*  Let  go."  If  the  boat 
is  not  fitted  with  detaching  apparatus,  as  soon  as  boat  is  water 
borne,  the  boat  officer  or  coxswain  commands  "  Let  go  the  after 
fall,"  then,  "  Let  go  the  forward  fall."  The  coxswain  gives  the 
boat  a  sheer  out.    The  greatest  danger  occurs  at  this  instant,  as 


26  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

there  is  always  a  danger  of  the  boat  being  dashed  against  the  ship's 
side.  For  that  reason  the  coxswain  should  give  the  stern  a  sheer 
in,  to  get  the  bow  out.  The  strain  on  the  sea  painter  assists  to 
sheer  the  bow  out.  When  clear  of  the  ship's  side,  the  officer  or 
coxswain  directs  the  second  bowman  to  cast  off  the  sea  painter; 
thwartmen  get  out  their  oars  as  soon  as  possible,  and  the  boat 
makes  the  best  of  her  way  to  the  rescue. 

HOISTING  A  LIFEBOAT  (OR  OTHER  BOAT)  IN  A  SEAWAY. 

46.  (i)  The  same  general  principles  of  seamanship  apply  as  in 
lowering.  It  is  preferable  for  a  ship  to  have  a  little  headway  on 
in  case  she  is  under  way.  The  important  point  is  to  keep  the 
boat  off  the  ship's  side  to  prevent  it  being  injured. 

(2)  The  boat  comes  alongside,  a  lee  having  been  made  for  her, 
and  in  case  of  a  heavy  sea  oil  should  be  used  freely.  Oars  are 
boated,  before  getting  alongside,  as  soon  as  possible  after  receiv- 
ing the  sea  painter,  which  should  always  be  hove  to  her. 

(3)  The  bowman  seizes  the  seapainter  and  takes  a  turn  around 
the  forward  thwart.  The  boat  should  then  be  hauled  under  the 
davits  by  manning  the  sea-painter  on  deck. 

(4)  Tend  the  ship  carefully  to  retain  a  lee. 

(5)  Trapping  lines,  traveling  lizards,  etc.,  will,  if  necessary,  be 
used  as  in  lowering.  Similarly,  thwartmen  will,  by  the  use  of 
boat  hooks,  keep  the  boat  from  swinging  against  the  ship's  side. 

(6)  If  the  ship  has  considerable  way  on,  a  line  should  be  led 
from  the  stern  of  the  boat  to  a  point  well  aft  on  the  ship,  to  pre- 
vent the  boat  from  lurching  forward  when  she  leaves  the  water. 

(7)  The  boat  falls  should  be  well  overhauled,  led  along  the  deck 
so  that  the  men  have  a  clear  hauling  space,  and  they  must  be  well 
manned.  The  boat  should  never  have  to  wait  for  preparations  on 
deck. 

(8)  All  being  ready  on  deck,  stand  by,  wait  for  a  smooth  time, 
hook  forward,  then  aft,  haul  taut,  hoist  away.  Men  should  run 
away  with  the  falls  as  the  ship  rolls  toward  the  boat,  which  should 
be  run  up  quickly  but  steadily.  If  the  winch  is  used,  the  falls 
should  be  taken  around  the  barrel,  which  should  be  turning  at  the 
desired  speed  before  the  order  "  Haul  taut "  is  given. 

(9)  Boats  fitted  with  automatic  releasing  hooks  should  have 
their  falls  rove  off  in  one,  single  leaders  at  the  davit  heads,  and 
the  blocks  must  be  of  sufficient  size  to  permit  the  falls  to  render 
easily. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  27 

A  METHOD  OF  PICKING  UP  A  MAN  OVERBOARD   (Particu- 
larly With  Wind  and  Sea  Abaft  the  Beam). 

47.  (i)  The  following  method  of  picking  up  a  man,  in  good 
moderate  or  rough  weather,  with  a  quick-turning  steamer,  com- 
mends itself  to  many  seamen : 

(2)  At  the  call  "  Man  overboard  "  ascertain  the  position  of  the 
man,  put  the  rudder  hard  over,  toward  him,  so  as  to  throw  the 
stern  away  from  him,  and  handle  the  engines  so  as  to  make  a  short 
turn  without  stopping.  If  possible,  stop  the  engine  on  the  side  on 
which  the  man  falls,  so  that  he  will  not  be  struck  by  the  propeller. 

(3)  As  the  ship  turns,  clear  away  and  man  the  lifeboat  which  is 
to  be  lowered,  at  the  same  time  keeping  a  good  watch  on  the  man ; 
his  approximate  position  will  be  marked  by  the  life  buoy.  As  the 
ship  approaches  the  man,  toward  the  end  of  the  turn,  maneuver 
her  so  as  to  bring  her  just  to  windward  of  him,  and  slow  the  en- 
gines so  that  she  will  not  have  too  much  speed  for  lowering  when 
she  reaches  this  position.  Lower  and  let  go  with  such  precautions 
as  wind  and  sea  demand ;  stop  the  ship  or  get  her  in  position  to 
leeward  of  the  man. 

(4)  The  advantages  of  this  method  are : 

(a)  That  the  boat  may  be  dropped  near  the  man,  so  that  the 
coxswain  can  steer  straight  for  him  without  being  signaled  to. 

(b)  That  there  is  plenty  of  time  to  get  the  boat  ready  for  lower- 
ing, and  consequently  less  risk  due  to  haste. 

(c)  That  the  boat  has  a  short  leeward  pull  to  the  man,  and 
while  the  interval  before  the  boat  is  in  the  water  may  be  longer, 
the  interval  before  it  reaches  the  man  would  generally  be  shorter. 

(d)  That  the  officer  of  the  deck  has  better  control  for  regu- 
lating the  speed  at  which  he  is  to  lower  the  boat. 

(e)  That  the  interval  between  the  alarm  and  lowering  the  boat 
being  greater,  there  is  less  chance  of  accident  from  excitement 
and  confusion. 

(/)  That  by  turning  after  the  boat  has  been  lowered  the  boat 
will  have  a  pull  to  leeward  after  picking  up  the  man. 

LIFE  BUOYS. 

48.  (i)  In  connection  with  "Man  overboard,"  attention  is  in- 
vited to  the  regulations  concerning  life  buoys. 

(2)  The  Naval  Instructions  require  that  at  all  times  at  sea,  and 
where  anchored  in  a  strong  tideway  in  port,  an  efficient  person  be 
stationed  j:o  let  go  the  Hfe  buoy.  Except  in  small  ships,  one  man 
is  usually  detailed  for  each  Hfe  buoy.  These  men  also  act  as 
lookouts,  and  it  is  important  that  they  clearly  understand  their 
duties. 


28  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

(3)  Men  on  this  post  must  realize  that  should  a  mm  fall  over- 
board his  life  will  depend  largely  upon  the  intelligence  and  alac- 
rity with  which  they  perform  their  duty.  They  must,  therefore, 
know  (a)  how  to  let  go  the  life  buoy;  and  (b)  when  ho  let  it  go. 

(4)  Ordinarily  life  buoys  are  let  go  by  pulling  a  toggle,  which 
releases  the  buoy,  allowing  it  to  fall  in  the  water.  Should  it  not 
fall  of  its  own  accord  it  h  probable  that  a  slight  blow  will  cause 
it  to  do  so.  The  men  on  that  post  should,  however,  understand 
how  to  cause  it  to  drop  in  case  the  toggle  carries  away,  the  me- 
chanism jams,  or  the  buoy  fails  to  fall  through  any  cause.  They 
must,  above  all,  understand  that  the  buoy  must  be  dropped  imme- 
diately in  some  way,  and  that  it  is  insufficient  for  them  to  simply 
make  a  routine  effort  to  dirop  it,  and  then  report  that  they  can  not 
do  so.  To  familiarize  the  men  on  this  post  with  the  operation 
of  the  life  buoy  it  is  well  to  have  them  present  occasionally  when 
the  gunner  tests  the  life  buoys  in  making  preparations  for  sea. 

(5)  The  question  as  to  when  to  let  the  life  buoy  go  requires  in- 
telligence and  composure.  A  cool,  intelligent  lookout  will  let  the 
buoy  drop  within  a  few  f^et  of  the  man  overboard,  while  if  some- 
what excited,  or  if  he  does  not  clearly  understand  his  duties,  he 
may  drop  it  long  before  the  man  is  abreast  the  buoy,  or  long  after 
he  has  passed. 

(6)  At  the  call  "  Man  overboard,"  the  life-buoy  lookout  should 
endeavor  instantly  to  ascertain  the  side  on  which  the  man  fell  and 
to  get  sight  of  him;  then  drop  the  buoy  as  soon  as  possible  after 
the  man  is  abreast  the  buoy,  so  that  it  will  be  between  him  and  the 
ship,  toward  which  he  naturally  faces  and  swims. 

(7)  If  the  man  can  not  be  seen,  the  look-out  can  usually  deter- 
mine the  side  on  which  he  fell,  as  he  will  see  many  of  the  people 
about  decks  go  to  that  side.  Then,  to  avoid  the  possibility  of 
dropping  the  life  buoy  on  the  man  (instances  are  recorded  where 
men  have  thus  been  killed)  the  opposite  buoy  should  be  dropped 
when  judged  to  be  abreast  the  man  in  the  water. 

(8)  If  the  man  is  sighted  after  the  first  buoy  is  dropped,  and  it 
is  then  seen  that  the  second  buoy  can  be  dropped  nearer  to  him,  it 
should  be  let  go ;  but  as  a  general  rule  the  second  buoy  should  be 
kept  fast  (unless  it  is  really  needed)  for  use  in  case  men  fall 
overboard  in  lowering  or  hoisting  the  lifeboat. 

(9)  The  above  instructions  are  for  the  guidance  of  the  life- 
buoy lookout  in  case  he  hears  no  orders  and  must,  therefore,  act 
upon  his  own  initiative.  He  shall,  of  course,  strictly  and  promptly 
obey  any  commands  that  he  may  receive  from  proper  authority, 
regardless  of  the  above  instructions ;  but  as  the  Hf  e  buoy,  to  be  of 
use,  must  be  dropped  promptly,  the  lookout  must  clearly  under- 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  29 

stand  that  if  no  orders  have  been  received  by  the  time  it  is  neces- 
sary to  drop  it  (as  indicated  above),  he  must  drop  it  at  once. 

(10)  Modern  vessels  are  so  large,  and  life  buoys  so  far  removed 
from  the  officer  of  the  deck,  that  it  is  important  that  the  life  buoy 
lookouts  clearly  understand  the  above  general  principles,  and  then, 
in  the  absence  of  orders,  that  they  be  governed  by  their  common 
sense. 

(11)  After  dropping  the  buoy,  the  lookouts  should  keep  the 
man  in  sight  until  the  persons  specially  detailed  for  this  purpose 
reach  their  station  in  the  after  rigging,  and  get  the  bearing  from 
the  life-buoy  men.  If  one  lookout  is  attending  both  buoys,  it 
would  be  unwise  for  him  to  leave  his  station  to  go  into  the  after 
rigging  as  a  lookout,  but  if  there  are  two  life-buoy  lookouts,  each 
may  be  permanently  stationed  to  go  in  the  rigging  and  keep  a 
lookout  on  the  man  after  his  own  buoy  has  been  let  go. 

(12)  Life  buoys  should  be  dropped  frequently  when  the  crew 
are  in  swimming,  in  order  to  familiarize  the  men  with  their  use. 

'  SIGNALS  FOR  LIFEBOATS. 

49.  (i)  Signalmen,  previously  detailed,  man  the  rigging  and 
keep  their  eyes  on  the  man  in  the  water.  Signals  hoisted  at  a 
yard-arm  indicate  the  direction  the  boat  must  pull.  Numeral  i 
(numeral  flag  over  "Quack")  directs  the  boat  to  pull  to  the  right 
of  the  line  looking  from  the  ship  to  the  boat;  numeral  2,  to  pull 
to  the  left  of  the  line  from  the  ship  to  the  boat;  numeral  3,  to  pull 
straight  away  from  the  ship;  numeral  o,  to  pull  straight  toward 
the  ship.  These  (day)  signals  shall  be  obeyed  without  answer- 
ing. 

(2)  At  night  these  same  numbers,  made  by  Ardois,  shall  be 
used;  or,  in  the  absence  of  a  signal  set,  Very's  night  signals  shall 
be  used,  as  follows :  Red  star  instead  of  No.  i ;  green  star  instead 
of  No.  2;  a  bracket  instead  of  No.  3;  and  a  rocket  instead  of  No. 
o.  At  night  the  boat  will  acknowledge  signals  by  flashing  the 
lantern. 


CHAPTER  IV. 
DRILLS  AND  EXERCISES. 

DEFINITIONS  AND  GENERAL  INSTRUCTIONS. 

50.  The  term  "  ship  flotilla  "  applies  to  the  unit  formed  of  the 
boats  from  one  ship.  Normally  it  will  consist  only  and  entirely  of 
boats  from  one  ship,  though  at  times  it  may  be  convenient  for  drill 
or  other  purposes  to  transfer  one  or  more  boats  from  one  flotilla 
to  another  temporarily  in  order  to  equalize  the  units  especially 
for  towing. 

51.  A  '*  division  flotilla"  is  composed  of  the  ship  flotillas  of  one 
division  when  operating  together  as  a  unit. 

52.  A  "squadron  flotilla"  is  composed  of  the  ship  flotillas  of 
one  squadron  when  operating  together  as  a  unit. 

53.  A  "  fleet  flotilla  "  is  composed  of  the  division  flotillas  of  the 
fleet  when  operating  together  as  a  unit. 

54.  (i)  For  tactical  purposes,  the  boats  of  each  ship  shall  be 
numbered  consecutively,  beginning  with  No.  i. 

(2)  These  numbers  shall  be  assigned  in  succession  beginning 
with  the  power  boats  (first,  second,  third,  etc.),  then  sailing 
launches  (first,  second,  etc.),  then  cutters,  whaleboats,  barges, 
gigs,  and  dinghies,  each  in  the  order  of  their  ship's  numbers. 

(3)  Each  boat  shall  fly  at  drill  a  white  distinguishing  flag  in 
the  bow.  This  flag  shall  be  rectangular,  26  by  18  inches,  with  the 
ship's  call  letters  and  the  boat's  number  painted  upon  it  in  black 
letters  and  figures  to  read  from  staff  to  fly,  and  the  staff  to  show 
4  feet  above  the  rail. 

(4)  Hospital  boats  shall  display  the  Red  Cross  in  the  bow,  in- 
stead of  their  boat  number, 'the  dimensions  of  flag  and  staff  being 
the  same  as  prescribed  for  other  boats. 

55.  The  full  flag  call  of  any  boat  is  the  call  of  the  ship  over  the 
boat's  number ;  but  this  call  should  be  curtailed  as  much  as  may  be 
without  confusion.  Thus  it  will  generally  be  sufficient  to  show 
the  ship-call  pennant  over  the  numeral,  omitting  the  group-call 
flag;  and  in  the  case  of  a  ship  calling  one  of  its  own  boats,  the 
number  alone  is  sufficient.  A  ship  call  calls  all  the  boats  of  that 
ship  flotilla. 

30 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  31 

56.  A  division  call  calls  all  the  ship  flotillas  of  that  division. 

57.  A  squadron  call  calls  all  the  ship  flotillas  of  that  squadron. 

58.  The  general  call  calls  the  fleet  flotilla  or  all  boats  present  for 
a  wigwag  or  semaphore  message.  A  flag  signal  to  the  fleet  flotilla 
requires  no  individual  call. 

59.  Formations  of  division  and  ship  flotillas  will  habitually  be 
in  natural  order  unless  otherwise  prescribed,  the  order  being  the 
same  as  that  of  their  divisions  and  ships  in  the  fleet. 

60.  The  term  "  on  beam  "  will  habitually  mean  with  the  guides 
of  formations  abreast  the  boat  boom. 

61.  (i)  Unequipped  boats  are  those  carrying  only  the  regular 
boat  equipment,  which  is  kept  at  all  times  in  the  boat.  (See 
articles  25,  28.) 

(2)  EqulBped  boats  are  those  which  are  equipped  for  landing 
in  accordance  with  these  instructions.  They  will  always  contain 
arms,  ammunition,  and  the  amount  of  provisions  and  water  re- 
quired for  the  intended  service,  unless  the  commissariat  actually 
accompanies  the  expedition,  in  which  case  only  arms,  ammuni- 
tion, and  filled  canteens  are  required. 

62.  (i)  When  the  flotillas  are  exercised  in  tactical  maneuvers, 
it  is  chiefly  for  the  training  of  the  officers  and  coxswains  (with  a 
view  to  utilizing  this  training  at  some  other  time  when  the  boats 
are  equipped  for  landing),  and  hence  tactical  exercises  can  be  car- 
ried out  as  advantageously  with  an  unequipped  as  with  an  equipped 
boat.  *  ^ 

(2)  When  boats  are  called  away  for  exercise  under  sails  or 
oars,  no  arms  or  equipments  will  be  provided.  The  regular  buat 
gear  shall,  however,  be  carried  unless  the  nature  of  the  exercise 
renders  it  desirable  to  leave  some  of  it  on  board.  When  boats  are 
called  away  for  exercise  as  a  flotilla  or  for  landing,  dinghies  will 
not  be  required  to  go. 

(3)  When  a  preparatory  signal  for  getting  out  boats  is  made,  all 
preparations  shall  be  made  on  deck;  davits  rigged  out  and  boats 
made  ready  for  lowering. 

(4)  If  the  signal  indicates  that  the  exercise  will  be  for  equipped 
boats,  all  necessary  articles  are  to  be  provided  abreast  the  boats; 
but  no  article  shall  b.e  passed  into  a  boat,  nor  shall  any  boat  be  low- 
ered, until  the  signal  of  execution  is  made. 

(5)  At  the  signal  of  execution  (whether  preceded  by  prepara- 
tory signal  or  not)  all  boats  are  to  be  lowered,  equipped,  manned, 
and  formed  as  prescribed.  If  for  equipped  boats,  preparations 
shall  be  made  as  if  preparing  for  some  actual  specified  service  in 
accordance  with  article  103. 

63.  As  a  rule  in  all  operations  of  boats  except  for  simple  exer- 
cises under  oars  or  sails,  the  boats  of  each  ship  flotilla  will  be  in 


32  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

column  with  the  towing  power  boats  leading,  ready  to  tow  if  not 
actually  towing.  When  tows  are  formed,  the  least  powerful  tow- 
ing boat  of  each  ship  flotilla  should  head  its  column  ready  to  cast 
off  to  assist  any  boat  or  pick  up  a  man  overboard  or  perform  any 
other  dtity. 

64.  When  the  flotillas  are  called  away,  the  boats  will  first  form 
in  column,  unless  otherwise  indicated,  on  the  starboard  side  of 
their  respective  ships,  the  leading  boat  abreast  the  lower  boom,  in 
the  following  order:  Towing  power  boats,  sailing  launches,  cut- 
ters, whaleboats.  Small  power  boats,  such  as  motor  whaleboats, 
although  available  for  towing  if  needed,  shall  take  their  position 
at  the  rear  end  of  the  column  unless  used  for  towing.  The  bat- 
talion commander  shall  be  in  the  leading  or  second  towing  boat  at 
the  head  of  the  column.  Hospital  boats  when  present  shall  be  in 
the  rear  of  their  columns  or  lines. 

65.  (i)  Distance  is  expressed  in  boats'  lengths  and  is  measured 
from  stern  to  bow.  When  not  otherwise  prescribed,  it  shall  be  two 
boats'  lengths. 

(2)  For  the  sake  of  uniformity  a  boat's  length  shall  be  taken  as 
40  feet. 

66.  When  tactical  evolutions  begin,  the  leaders  of  the  ship 
flotillas  will  open  out  if  closed,  until  their  intervals  are  the  same 
as  their  distance  apart  in  line,  which  will  vary  with  the  number 
of  boats  in  each  ship  flotilla. 

67.  (i)  Being  in  any  formation,  to  form  for  landing,  first  form 
*Mine'of  ship  flotillas"  (or  line  of  division  flotillas)  and  head  the 
line  of  columns  toward  the  landing  place.  Then  the  formations 
described  in  The  Landing  Force  and  Small-Arm  Instructions  will 
be  assumed,  boats  with  Artillery  casting  off  and  assuming  position 
on  the  flanks,  while  the  main  body  of  the  column  (boats  carrying 
Infantry)  form  line  and  head  in  toward  the  beach.  If  machine  or 
small  rapid-fire  guns  are  carried  in  Infantry  boats,  they  shall  be 
used  to  sweep  the  beach  from  their  position  in  the  general  line. 

(2)  If  the  boats  of  a  single  ship  are  called  away  for  landing, 
they  shall  form  in  column,  in  the  above-mentioned  order,  as  soon  as 
they  shove  off  from  the  ship,  and  be  taken  in  tow.  The  tow  then 
heads  in  to  the  landing  place,  or  as  directe.d.  In  forming  for 
attack,  boats  cast  off  and  form  line ;  Artillery  boats  take  position 
on  the  flanks  and  cross  their  fire,  as  described  under  instructions 
for  landing. 

(3)  Being  m  tow,  and  preliminary  to  casting  off,  the  signals  to 
the  tow  are  made  as  follows : 

Three  blasts. — Oars  get  ready  and  prepare  to  cast  off. 
Tzvo  blasts. — Up  or  out  oars. 
One  blast. — Cast  off  and  let  fall. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  33 

68.  (i)  The  flag  boat  of  a  ship  flotilla,  when  exercising  as  a 
part  of  a  division  flotilla,  shall  lead  its  column;  when  the  ship's 
flotilla  is  exercising  independently,  it  may  lead  the  column,  or  it 
may  leave  the  formation  and  be  free  to  take  any  position. 

(2)  Similarly,  the  flag  boat  of  a  division  flotilla  or  squadron 
flotilla  may  lead  the  column,  or  it  may  leave  the  formation  and 
take  the  position  from  which  the  flotilla  can  best  be  maneuvered. 

(3)  Flag  boats  shall,  when  possible,  be  power  boats,  except  when 
boats  are  being  exercised  as  a  division  under  sail,  in  which  case  a 
sailing  launch  or  other  boat  may  be  used. 

G9.  Boat  drills  shall  not  be  confined  to  the  seaman  class,  but 
shall,  so  far  as  possible,  include  all  classes  of  enlisted  men. 
Special  attention  shall  be  paid  to  elementary  boat  exercises  for 
marines  and  the  engineer  force,  and  they  should  be  encouraged  to 
become  good  oarsmen. 

70.  (i)  The  landing  force  shall  frequently  be  embarked  and 
landed  in  the  manner  that  would  be  required  under  service  condi- 
tions. Mustering  and  equipping  the  force  is  not  sufficient  to  de- 
velop or  maintain  the  skill  of  the  crew,  or  to  develop  or  exercise 
in  their  proper  duties  the  special  details,  staff  officers,  etc.  Hence, 
landing  exercises  should  be  complete,  thorough,  and  deliberate. 

(2)  Similarly,  at  abandon  ship  it  is  always  preferable  actually 
to  lower  the  boats  and  embark  their  crews,  but  as  it  is  important 
that  each  man  be  kept  constantly  familiar  with  his  principal  duties 
at  this  evolution,  it  is  preferable,  in  cases  where  lowering  boats  is 
impracticable,  to  provide  articles  and  muster  abreast  the  boats 
rather  than  omit  the  exercise  entirely. 

71.  (i)  Every  loaded  or  manned  boat  in  tow  at  any  time  shall 
carry  conveniently  for  instant  use  a  hatchet  (obtained  from  the 
boat  box)  ready  to  cut  the  towline  instantly  in  case  of  man  over- 
board or  threatened  swamping  or  other  emergency. 

(2)  The  officer  or  petty  officer  in  charge  of  a  towed  boat  will  be 
responsible  for  the  proper  trim  of  the  boat  to  insure  safety. 


34 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


ORDINARY  SERVICE  UNDER  OARS. 
COMMANDS. 

72.  The  commands  given  in  Tables  I  and  II  below  are  prescribed 
to  cover  ordinary  cases  of  a  boat  manned  alongside  or  at  a  land- 
ing, and  thence  making  passage  to  a  landing  or  to  another  vessel. 


Table  I. 
(i)   Stand  by  the  oars. 

(2)  Shove  off. 

(3)  Out  oars. 

(4)  Give  way  together. 

(5)  In  bows;  or  Trail  bow. 

(6)  Oars   (followed  by  "Way 

enough"  or  "  Way 
enough,"  without  the 
command    "Oars"). 


Table  II. 
(i)   Stand  by  the  oars. 

(2)  Up  oars, 
(i)  and  (2)  Given  before  boat 

is  reported  ready. 

(3)  Shove  off. 

(4)  Let  fall 

(5)  Give  way  together. 

(6)  In  bows. 

(7)  Stand  by  to  toss;  Toss,  or 
Oars  (followed  by  "  Way 
enough"  or  "  Way 
enough,"  without  the 
command   "Oars"). 

,  73,  (i)  The  commands  in  Table  I  shall  always  be  used  with 
single-banked  boats.  With  these  boats  the  oars  will  be  in  their 
places  in  rowlocks,  blades  in  the  water,  and  oar  trailing  fore-and- 
aft,  before  the  boat  is  ready  to  receive  passengers. 

(2)  With  all  boats  having  awnings  spread.  If  the  boat  is 
double  banked,  the  oars  will  remain  in  the  boat  until  the  com- 
mand "  Out  oars."  At  the  command  "  Stand  by  the  oars,"  the 
most  convenient  thwartmen  will  cast  off  the  awning  stops  and  se- 
cure them  after  the  oars  are  out. 

(3)  With  laden  boats,  working  boats,  boats  carrying  visiting 
parties,  all  pulling  boats  at  sea  or  in  rough  weather  in  port,  and 
with  all  pulling  boats  after  sunset. 

74.  In  all  other  cases  than  those  specified  above,  the  commands 
in  Table  II  will  be  used,  in  port  or  in  smooth  water,  for  double- 
banked  boats  having  rowlocks  that  permit  of  "  letting  fall."  For 
example,  this  table  would  be  used  for  all  double-banked  running 
boats,  for  all  special  boats  carrying  commissioned,  warrant,  or 
appointed  officers,  and,  in  general,  on  all  occasions  not  excepted 
by  article  JZ- 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  35 

Table  III. 

SPECIAL   COMMANDS.  PURPOSE    FOR    WHICH    GIVEN. 

Oars ( I )   To    stop    pulling    for    any    purpose, 

keeping  the  oars  out.     (2)   To  salute. 

Trail ( i )   To  salute.   (2)   To  pass  obstructions. 

For  the  latter,  oars  of  either  side  may 
be  trailed  independently. 

Hold  water To  check  headway  or  sternboard.     The 

oars  of  either  side  may  hold  water  in- 
dependently. Requires  care  if  boat  has 
much  headway. 

Stern  all To  acquire  sternboard.     Should  not  be 

given  when  boat  has  much  headway. 
When  boat  has  headway,  should  be 
preceded  by   "  Hold  water." 

Back  starboard  (or  port). To  turn.  Should  "Hold  water"  before 
backing,  if  boat  has  much  headway. 

Back  starboard,  give  way  To  turn  quickly  when  boat  has  little  or  no 
port  (or  vice  versa).  headway. 

Stand  by  to  toss  ;  Toss ...( I )  To  salute.  (2)  In  going  alongside, 
when  it  is  not  desirable  to  boat  the 
oars.  The  habitual  command  to  be 
used  when  coming  alongside  with 
double-banked  boats  on  official  or  dress 
occasions. 

Boat  the  oars To  get  the  oars  in  the  boat. 

Point  the  oars To  shove  off  a  grounded  or  beached  boat. 

Note. — Thwarts  and  oars  are  numbered  from  forward.  Double- 
banked  thwarts  are  designated  by  No.  i,  starboard,  No.  i,  port; 

No.  2,  starboard,  No.  2,  port,  etc.    The  thwarts  next  to  the  bow 

and  stroke  are  also  properly  designated  as  second  bow  and  second 

stroke. 

EXPLANATION    IN    DETAIL. 

Ordinary  ship's  service  which  permits  use  of  commands  given  in 

Table  I. 

76.  Suppose  a  cutter  manned  at  the  gangway,  bowmen  standing 
in  fore-sheets  holding  on  with  boat  hook  to  grab  ropes  or  jack- 
stay,  oars  boated.  The  coxswain  has  orders  to  shove  off  and  go 
in  for  a  working  party.  The  coxswain  commands  and  the  crew 
executes  the  details  as  follows: 

(i)  Stand  by  the  oars. — Every  man  except  the  bowman  seizes 
his  oar  by  its  handle  and  sees  the  blade  clear  of  other  oars.  The 
oars  should  be  shoved  forward  over  the  gunwale  far  enough  to 


36  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

bring  the  handle  in  the  proper  position,  but  should  be  kept  fore- 
and-aft.  If  awnings  are  spread  the  most  convenient  thwartmen 
cast  off  the  stops.  ^ 

(2)  Shove  off. — Bowmen  shove  bow  smoothly  away  from  ship's 
side  with  boat  hooks,  at  the  same  time  shoving  her  a  little  ahead, 
if  possible ;  the  coxswain  sheers  her  off  with  tiller  and  hauls  ahead 
on  stanchions  of  the  gangway  or  on  the  grab  rope,  assisted  as  nec- 
essary by  the  inboard  stroke  oar,  who  takes  his  seat  as  soon  as 
possible  and  prepares  to  get  his  oar  out  with  rest  of  crew.  Fen- 
ders are  rigged  in  by  men  abreast  them.  Bowmen  place  boat 
hooks  fore-and-aft  midships,  seat  themselves,  and  get  their  oars 
ready. 

(3)  Out  oars. — Given  when  the  boat  is  clear  of  the  ship's  side. 
Thwartmen  throw  blades  of  oars  horizontally  outward,  allowing 
the  leathers  to  fall  in  rowlocks,  place  both  hands  on  handle,  and 
quickly  trim  blades  flat  and  directly  abeam.  This  is  the  position 
of  "  Oars."  Bowmen  throw  their  oars  out  at  the  same  time  as 
rest  of  crew,  if  they  are  ready;  otherwise  they  swing  their  oars 
out  together,  touching  their  blades  forward  to  insure  making  .the 
movements  in  unison,  and  bring  them  to  the  position  of  **  Oars  " 
or  take  up  the  stroke  with  the  remainder  of  the  crew  as  the  case 
may  be. 

(4)  Give  way  together. — All  the  oarsmen  take  the  full  stroke, 
keeping  accurate  stroke  with  the  starboard  stroke  oar.  Feather 
blades  habitually.  Bowmen  get  their  oars  out  together  and  take 
up  the  stroke.  (They  may  have  gotten  them  out  before  the  com- 
mand "  Give  way  together,"  in  which  case  they  give  way  with  the 
other  members  of  the  crew.)  The  crew  will  continue  to  pull  a 
strong,  steady  stroke,  always  using  their  backs,  and  maintain 
silence. 

(5)  In  hows. — Given  as  landing  is  approached,  and  while  the 
blades  are  in  the  water.  Bowmen  complete  that  stroke,  toss  oars 
simultaneously  to  an  angle  of  45°,  and  boat  them  together,  seize 
boat  hooks,  stand  erect  in  bow,  facing  forward,  holding  boat  hooks 
vertical  in  front  of  them  until  needed. 

(6)  Oars. — Given  when  the  coxswain  estimates  that  the  boat's 
headway  will  carry  her  to  the  landing,  and  while  the  blades  are 
in'  the  water.  Finish  that  stroke  and  assume  the  position  "  Oars." 
When  in  this  position,  if  landing  or  gangway  is  clear  of  other 
boats,  command  "  Way  enough."  The  crew  toss  their  oars  simul- 
taneously to  an  angle  of  45°  and  lay  them  in  place  in  the  boat, 
with  as  little  noise  as  possible,  rigging  the  blades  entirely  inside 
the  gunwale.  The  stroke  oarsman  next  to  the  landing  or  gangway 
takes  up  a  boat  hook,  the  men  nearest  the  fenders  place  them  over 
on  inboard  sidie,  bowmen  and  stroke  oarsman  check  headway,  keep 
boat  clear,  haul  alongside,  etc.,  as  necessary. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  37 

(7)  Or,  if  preferable,  and  the  skill  of  the  crew  will  enable  them 
to  perform  the  movement  together,  the  command  "  Oars  "  may  be 
omitted,  and  instead,  command  "  Way  enough,"  given  when  the 
boat's  headway  will  carry  her  to  the  landing,  and  while  the  blades 
are  in  the  water  at  the  beginning  of  a  stroke.  Finish  that  stroke, 
and  as  the  oars  leave  the  water  the  men  toss  them  simultaneously 
to  an  angle  of  45°,  and  boat  them  quickly  and  quietly,  rigging  the 
blades  entirely  inside  of  the  gunwale.  The  stroke  oarsman  next 
to  the  gangway  or  landing  takes  up  his  boat  hook;  men  nearest 
the  fenders  place  them  over  on  inboard  side ;  bowmen  and  stroke 
oarsman  check  headway,  keep  boat  clear,  haul  alongside,  etc.,  as 
necessary. 

Note. — With  a  single-banked  boat,  the  oars  would  be  trailed 
when  the  above  instructions  require  those  of  a  double-banked  boat 
to  be  tossed  and  boated.  The  oarsmen  simply  let  go  the  handles, 
allowing  the  oars  to  trail  in  a  fore-and-aft  direction.  The  oars  in 
this  case  are  not  boated  until  the  command  "  Boat  the  oars,"  when 
the  oars  are  lifted  into  the  boat  with  the  blades  aft. 

Dress  or  Special  Service,  which  requires  use  of  commands  given 
in  Table  II. 

77.  If  a  cutter  is  called  away  as  a  running  boat,  or  on  special 
duty  to  carry  officers  to  another  ship^  in  daylight,  in  good  weather, 
in  port,  the  oars  will  be  brought  to  the  position  of  "  Up  oars  "  be- 
fore the  boat  is  reported  ready;  the  bowmen  stand  in  fore-sheets 
holding  on  to  the  grabrope  or  jackstay,  the  inboard  stroke  oar  in 
stern-sheets  holds  on  with  boat  hook.  The  oars  are  brought  to 
the  position  of  **  Up  oars  "  by  the  commands : 

(a)  Stand  by  the  oars. — The  same  as  under  Table  I;  the  blades 
will  be  kept  clear  of  the  bowmen's  boat  hooks. 

{b)  Up  oars. — The  oars,  except  the  two  bow  and  the  inboard 
stroke  oars,  are  tossed  quickly  to  a  vertical  position,  blades  trim- 
med in  a  fore-and-aft  plane  and  in  line  with  that  of  the  stroke  oar, 
handles  of  oars  resting  on  bottom  boards,  outboard  hand  grasp- 
ing loom  of  oar  at  height  of  chin,  wrist  of  inboard  arm  resting  on 
inboard  thigh,  and  steadying  oar. 

78.  (i)  The  boat  officer  or  coxswain  then  reports  to  the  officer 
of  the  deck  that  his  boat  is  alongside,  ready  for  duty.  'When  the 
officer  of  the  deck  has  given  necessary  orders  to  the  boat,  the  boat 
officer  or  coxswain  commands : 

(2)  Shove  off. — This  command  is  executed  as  described  in  arti- 
cle y6,  (2).  As  soon  as  possible,  the  inboard  stroke  oar  lays  aside 
his  boat  hook  and  gets  up  his  oar  without  further  command.  If 
time  permits,  the  bowmen  get  up  their  oars  and  await  the  com- 


38  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

mand  "Let  fall."  If  however,  the  command  "Let  fall"  is  given 
before  their  oars  are  up,  they  point  their  oars  forward  over  the 
gunwale,  "kiss"  the  blades,  swing  them  out,  and  take  up  the 
stroke,  or  come  to  "  Oars,"  as  the  case  may  be. 

(3)  Let  fall. — Given  when  the  boat  is  clear  of  the  ship's  side. 
It  may  be  necessary  to  let  fall  the  forward  oars  before  there  is 
room  for  the  after  oars  to  clear  the  ship's  side.  This  would  be 
done  by  the  command,  i,  2,  and  3,  "  Let  fall,"  or  2  and  3,  "  Let 
fall."  Other  oars  remain  vertical  until  the  command  "  Let  fall.'' 
At  this  command  all  the  oarsmen  raise  their  oars  vertically  and 
drop  the  blades  outboard  into  the  rowlocks  smartly  and  together, 
slipping  the  inboard  hand  to  the  handle  of  the  oar,  and  come  to 
position  "  Oars  "  with  both  hands  on  the  handle.  Under  no  cir- 
cumstances should  the  blades  be  allowed  to  touch  the  water  in 
letting  fall. 

(4)  Give  way  together, — As  described  in  article  76,  (4). 

(5)  In  hows. — As  described  in  article  76,  (5). 

(6)  Stand  by  to  toss.  Toss. — The  cautionary  command  is  given 
as  a  warning  to  the  crew.  The  command  "  Toss  "  is  given  as  the 
blades  enter  the  water,  and  when  the  boat  has  sufficient  headway 
just  to  reach  the  gangway  or  landing.  The  oarsmen  complete  that 
stroke  and  then  toss  the  oars  quickly  to  a  vertical  position  by 
pressing  smartly  on  the  handle  with  inboard  hand,  raising  the  oar 
with  the  outboard  hand  under  the  loom.  Lower  handle  to  bot- 
tom boards  and  assume  position  described  at  "Up  oars."  (See 
art.  77,  b.)  The  inboard  stroke  oar  lays  his  oar  in  the  boat  quickly 
after  he  has  it  at  the  vertical  position,  seizes  boat  hook,  and  assists 
to  check  headway  and  haul  stern  of  boat  into  the  gangway. 

79.  (i)  The  crew  remain  at  the  "Toss"  until  officers  leave  the 
boat.  They  are  then  in  position  to  "  let  fall,"  when  boat  is  or- 
dered to  lie  off  the  quarter  or  to  haul  out  to  the  boom. 

(2)  If  it  is  desirable  to  lay  the  oars  in  the  boat,  it  will  be  done 
by  the  command  "  Boat  the  oars,"  at  which  each  man  lays  his  oar 
quickly  and  quietly  in  the  boat,  blades  forward. 

(3)  In  rough  weather  or  at  night  (when  it  is  not  desired  to 
remain  alongside  with  the  oars  at  "  Toss  ")  the  commands,  "Oars," 
followed  by  "  Way  enough "  or  the  command  "  Way  enough " 
given  alone,  may  be  used  as  described  in  article  76,  (6)  and  (7). 

EXPLANATIONS    OF    SPECIAL    COMMANDS    GIVEN    IN    TABLE    III. 

80.  (i)  Oars. — Given  when  blades  are  in  the  water.  Finish  that 
stroke  and  bring  oars  quickly  to  position  of  "  Oars."    (Art.  76,  3.) 

(2)  Trail. — Given  when  blades  are  in  the  water.  Finish  that 
stroke,  release  the  handle  of  the  oar,  allowing  it  to  draw  fore-and- 
aft,  and  trail  alongside.     If  no  trailing  lines  are  fitted,  retain  the 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  39 

handle  of  the  oar  in  the  hand.  With  a  cutter  having  sunken  row- 
locks, lift  the  handle  of  the  oar  quickly  when  blade  is  in  the  water 
at  middle  of  stroke,  throw  oar  out  of  rowlock,  and  retain  handle 
in  hand. 

is)  Hold  water. — Given  when  blades  are  in  the  water.  Cease 
pulling,  drop  the  oars  in  the  water,  and  hold  them  perpendicular 
to  the  keel  line,  blades  vertical.  With  considerable  way  on,  espe- 
cially in  a  laden  boat,  care  in  holding  water  is  required  to  prevent 
carrying  away  the  rowlock  or  gunwale  or  the  oar  itself.  Under 
these  conditions  drop  the  oars  in  the  water  with  the  upper  edges 
of  the  blades  inclined  forward  and  gradually  bring  the  blades 
vertical  as  way  is  lost. 

(4)  Stern  all. — Given  from  positions  of  "  Oars "  or  "  Hold 
water."  The  oars  are  backed,  keeping  stroke  and  feathering  as 
when  pulling  ahead. 

(5)  Back  starboard  (or  port). — Designated  oars  are  backed  as 
at  "  Stern  all."  Generally  when  boats  have  way  on,  oars  should 
not  be  backed  until  the  headway  is  checked  by  holding  water  or 
laying  on  oars. 

(6)  Back  starboard  give  way  port  (or  vice  versa). — Given  from 
the  position  of  "  Oars  "  or  "  Hold  water."  Proceed  as  described 
in  article  76  (4),  and  article  80  (5). 

(7)  Toss. —  (This  command  should  be  generally  preceded  by 
cautionary  command  "  Stand  by  to  toss.") — Given  when  blades  are 
in  the  water  or  at  the  position  of  "  Oars."  Complete  the  stroke, 
press  smartly  on  the  handle,  and,  with  the  other  hand  under  loom 
near  leather,  bring  oar  quickly  to  vertical  position,  blades  trim- 
med fore-and-aft  and  in  Hne ;  hands  as  at  the  completion  of  "  Up 
oars." 

(8)  Boat  the  oars. — Given  from  the  position  "Toss"  or  "Trail " 
(with  boats  using  swivel  rowlocks).  Place  the  oars,  quietly  and 
quickly,  fore-and-aft  in  the  boat.  This  command  may  be  given 
from  any  position,  but  it  is  preferable,  when  time  and  room  per- 
mit, to  command  "Oars,  Toss  (or  Trail),  Boat  the  oars." 

(9)  Point  the  oars. — To  shove  off  a  boat  that  has  grounded, 
stand  facing  aft,  point  the  blades  of  the  oars  forward  and  down- 
ward to  the  beach  at  an  angle  of  about  30°,  ready  to  shove  off  at 
the  command.  H  waves  lift  the  stern  of  the  boat,  the  united 
effort  to  shove  off  should  be  made  just  as  her  stern  lifts. 

81.  When  for  any  reason  it  may  be  desirable,  the  preparatory 

command    "  Stand   by   to   "    may   precede   the    commands 

"  Toss,"  "  Trail,"  "  Hold  water,"  "  Stern  all,"  or  in  fact  any  com- 
mand of  execution  given  in  a  boat.  In  order  to  secure  precision 
and  uniformity  of  movement,  and  in  order  to  avoid  taking  the 
crew  by  surprise,  cautionary  orders  should  usually  precede  com- 
mands of  execution,  the  crew  thus  being  always  prepared  promptly 


40  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

to  e::c;cute  the  commands  when  given;  they  should  only  be  used 
when  necessary,  since  a  multiplicity  of  cautionary  or  preparatory 
orders  detracts  from  the  sharp,  smart  work  that  boats  and  their 
crews  should  exhibit. 

Note. — The  preparatory  cornmand  for  "  Oars  "  is  "  Stand  by  to 
lay  on  the  oars." 

HANDLING  BOATS  IN  A  SURF. 

82.  (i)  The  most  dangerous  duty  which  a  ship's  boat  is  called 
upon  to  perform  is  landing  through  a  surf.  This  requires  greater 
skill  than  any  other  work  in  an  open  boat,  and  lack  of  skill  or  in- 
attention on  the  part  of  the  coxswain  is  so  likely  to  result  in  a  loss 
of  Hfe  that  a  novice  should  never  attempt  to  steer  a  boat  through 
heavy  surf  to  a  beach.  The  skill  necessary  to  make  a  successful 
landing  through  surf  can  be  obtained  only  by  practical  experience 
gained  first  as  an  oarsman  and  later  as  a  coxswain. 

(2)  If  it  is  absolutely  necessary  for  an  inexperienced  crew  to 
land  through  a  surf,  the  safest  method  should  be  adopted,  which 
is  to  back  in,  keeping  bow  to  sea,  and  every  time  a  sea  approaches 
pull  to  meet  it  with  a  good  headway,  then  back  in  as  fast  as  possi- 
ble after  it  passes. 

(3)  If  this  is  impracticable,  a  fairly  safe  method  is  by  towing  a 
heavy  drag  over  the  stern. 

(4)  The  great  danger  in  landing  through  a  surf  is  that  of 
"broaching  to."  The  breaker  lifts  the  stern,  forces  it  to  one  side 
until  the  boat  gets  broadside  on  and  capsizes.  Sorjietimes,  though 
rarely,  a  heavy  sea  gets  under  the  boat,  buries  her  bow,  and  turns 
her  end  over  end. 

(5)  It  should  always  be  remembered  that  surf,  when  viewed 
from  seaward,  is  exceedingly  deceptive  and  is  always  much  worse 
than  it  appears.  On  an  open  seacoast  any  surf  visible  from  a 
small  boat  to  seaward  would  probably  be  dangerous. 

MANAGEMENT  OF  OPEN  ROWING  BOATS  IN  A   SURF. 

83.  The  following  rules  are  published  by  the  Royal  National 
Lifeboat  Institution 

1.  Rowing  to  seaward. —  (i)As  a  general  rule,  speed  must  be 
given  to  a  boat  rowing  against  a  heavy  surf.  Indeed,  under  some 
circumstances,  her  safety  will  depend  upon  the  utmost  possible 
speed  being  attained  on  meeting  a  sea.  For  if  the  sea  be  really 
heavy,  and  the  wind  blowing  a  hard,  on-shore  gale,  an  approaching 
heavy  sea  may  carry  the  boat  away  on  its  front  and  turn  it  broad- 
side on  or  up-end  it.     A  boat's  only  chance  in  such  a  case  is  to 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  41 

obtain  such  a  way  as  shall  enable  her  to  pass,  end  on,  through  the 
crest  of  the  sea  and  leave  it  as  soon  as  possible  behind  her.  If 
there  be  a  rather  heavy  surf,  but  no  wind,  or  if  the  wind  is  off 
shore  and  opposed  to  the  surf,  as  is  often  the  case,  a  boat  might 
be  propelled  so  rapidly  through  it  that  her  bow  would  fall  more 
suddenly  and  heavily  after  topping  the  sea  than  if  her  way  had 
been  checked. 

(2)  It  may  also  happen  that,  by  careful  management,  a  boat 
may  be  made  to  avoid  the  sea,  so  that  each  wave  may  break  ahead 
of  her,  which  may  be  the  only  chance  of  safety  in  a  small  boat ; 
but  if  the  shore  be  flat  and  the  broken  water  extend  to  a  great 
distance  from  it,  this  will  often  be  impossible. 

(3)  The  following  general  rules  for  rowing  to  seaward  may 
therefore  be  relied  on : 

'  (a)  If  sufficient  command  can  be  kept  over  a  boat  by  the  skill 
of  those  on  board  her,  avoid  the  sea  if  possible,  so  as  not  to  meet 
it  at  the  moment  of  its  breaking  or  curling  over. 

(b)  Against  a  head  gale  and  a  heavy  surf,  get  all  possible  speed 
on  a  boat  on  the  approach  of  every  sea  which  can  not  be  avoided. 

(c)  If  more  speed  can  be  given  to  a  boat  than  is  sufficient  to 
prevent  her  from  being  carried  back  by  a  surf,  her  way  may  be 
checked  on  its  approach,  which  will  give  her  an  easier  passage 
over  it. 

II.  Running  before  a  broken  sea,  or  surf,  to  the  shore  {Hat 
beach). —  (i)  The  one  great  danger,  when  running  before  a  broken 
sea.  is  that  of  "  broaching  to."  To  that  peculiar  effect  of  the  sea, 
so  frequently  destructive  of  human  life,  the  utmost  attention  must 
be  directed.  The  cause  of  a  boat's  broaching  to,  when  rujining 
before  a  broken  sea  or  surf,  is  that  her  own  motion  being  in  the 
same  direction  as  that  of  the  sea,  she  opposes  no  resistance  to  it, 
but  is  carried  before  it.  Thus,  if  a  boat  be  running  bow  on  to  the 
shore,  and  her  stern  to  the  sea,  the  first  eft'ect  of  a  surf  or  roller, 
on  its  overtaking  her,  is  to  throw  up  the  stern,  and,  as  a  conse- 
quence, to  depress  the  bow ;  if  she  then  have  sufficient  inertia 
(which  will  be  proportional  to  weight)  to  allow  the  sea  to  pass 
her,  she  will  in  succession  pass  through  the  descending,  the  hori- 
zontal, and  the  ascending  positions,  as  the  crest  of  the  wave  passes 
successively  her  stern,  her  midships,  and  her  bow,  in  the  reverse 
order  in  which  the  same  positions  occur  in  a  boat  propelled  to 
seaward  against  a  surf.  This  may  be  defined  as  the  same  mode  of 
running  before  a  broken  sea. 

(2)  But  it  a  boat,  on  being  overtaken  by  a  heavy  surf,  has  not 
sufficient  inertia  to  allow  it  to  pass  her,  the  first  of  the  three  posi- 
tions alone  occurs — her  stern  is  raised  high  in  the  air,  and  the 
wave  carries  the  boat  before  it,  on  its  front  or  unsafe  side,  the 


42  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

bow  deeply  immersed  in  the  hollow  of  the  sea,  where  the  water, 
being  stationary,  or  comparatively  so,  offers  a  resistance;  while 
the  crest  of  the  sea,  having  the  actual  motion  which  causes  it  to 
break,  forces  onward  the  rear  end  of  the  boat.  A  boat  in  this 
position  will  sometimes,  aided  by  careful  oar  steerage,  run  a  con- 
siderable distance  until  the  wave  has  broken  and  expended  itself. 
But  it  will  often  happen  that,  if  the  bow  be  low,  it  will  be  driven 
under  water,  when,  the  buoyancy  being  lost  forward,  while  the 
sea  presses  on  the  stern,  the  boat  will  be  thrown  end  over  end.  Or 
if  the  bow  be  high,  or  protected  by  a  bow  air  chamber,  so  that  it 
does  not  become  submerged,  the  resistance  forward  acting  on  one 
bow  will  slightly  turn  the  boat's  head,  and  the  force  of  the  surf 
being  transferred  to  the  opposite  quarter,  she  will  in  a  moment, 
be  turned  broadside  to  the  sea,  and  be  thrown  by  it  on  her  beam 
ends,  or  altogether  capsized.  It  is  in  this  manner  that  most  boats 
are  upset  in  a  surf,  especially  on  flat  coasts. 

(3)  Hence  it  follows  that  the  management  of  a  boat  when  land- 
ing through  a  heavy  surf,  must  stop  her  progress  shoreward  at 
the  moment  of  her  being  overtaken  by  a  heavy  sea,  and  enable  it  to 
pass  her.    There  are  different  ways  of  effecting  this  object: 

First.  By  turning  a  boat's  head  to  the  sea  before  entering  the 
broken  water,  and  then  backing  in,  stern  foremost,  pulling  a  few 
strokes  ahead  to  meet  each  heavy  sea,  and  then  again  backing 
astern.  If  a  sea  be  really  heavy  and  a  boat  small,  this  plan  will  be 
generally  safest. 

Second.  If  rowing  to  shore  with  the  stern  to  seaward,  by  back- 
ing all  the  oars  on  the  approach  of  a  heavy  sea,  and  rowing  ahead 
again  as  soon  as  it  has  passed  to  the  bow  of  the  boat,  thus  rowing 
in  on  the  back  of  the  wave;  or,  as  is  practical  in  some  lifeboats, 
placing  the  after  oarsmen  with  their  faces  forward,  and  making 
them  row  back  at  each  sea  on  its  approach. 

Third.  If  rowed  in  bow  foremost,  by  towing  astern  a  pig  of 
ballast  or  large  stone,  or  a  large  basket,  or  a  canvas  bag,  termed 
a  "  drogue,"  or  drag,  made  for  the  purpose,  the  object  of  each 
being  to  hold  the  boat's  stern  back  and  prevent  her  being  turned 
broadside  to  the  sea  or  broaching  to. 

(4)  A  boat's  sail  bent  to  a  yard,  loosed  and  towed  astern,  the 
yard  being  attached  to  a  line  capable  of  being  veered,  hauled,  or 
let  go,  will  act  in  some  measure  as  a  drag,  and  will  tend  much  to 
break  the  force  of  the  sea  immediately  astern  of  the  boat. 

(5)  Heavy  weights  should  be  kept  out  of  the  extreme  ends  of  a 
boat,  but  when  rowing  before  a  heavy  sea,  the  best  trim  is  deepest 
by  the  stern,  which  prevents  the  stern  being  readily  beaten  off  by 
the  sea. 

(6)  When  running  before  a  sea,  a  boat  should  be  steered  by  an 
oar  over  the  stern  or  on  one  quarter. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  43 

(7)  The  following  general  rules  may,  therefore,  be  depended  on 
when  running  before,  or  attempting  to  land  through  a  heavy  surf 
or  broken  water : 

(a)  As  far  as  possible  avoid  each  sea  by  placing  the  boat  where 
the  sea  will  break  ahead  of  her. 

(b)  If  the  sea  be  very  heavy,  or  if  the  boat  be  small,  and 
especially  if  she  have  a  square  stern,  bring  her  bow  around  to  sea- 
ward and  back  her  in,  rowing  ahead  against  each  heavy  surf, 
sufficiently  to  allow  it  to  pass  the  boat. 

(c)  If  it  be  considered  safe  to  proceed  to  the  shore  bow  fore- 
most, back  the  oars  against  each  sea  on  its  approach,  so  as  to  stop 
the  boat's  way  through  the  water  as  far  as  possible,  and  if  there 
is  a  drag,  or  any  other  appliance  in  the  boat  which  may  be  used 
as  one,  tow  it  astern  to  aid  in  keeping  the  boat  stern-on  to  the  sea, 
which  is  the  chief  object  in  view. 

(d)  Bring  the  principal  weight  in  the  boat  toward  the  end  that 
is  to  seaward,  but  not  to  the  extreme  end. 

(e)  If  a  boat  worked  by  both  sails  and  oars  be  running  under 
sail  for  the  land,  through  a  heavy  sea,  her  crew  should,  unless  the 
beach  be  quite  steep,  take  down  her  masts  and  sails  before  entering 
the  broken  water,  and  take  her  to  land  under  oars  alone,  as  above 
described.  If  she  have  sails  only,  her  sails  should  be  much  reduced, 
a  half-lowered  foresail  or  other  small  headsail  being  sufficient. 

III.  Beaching,  or  landing  through  a  surf. —  (i)  The  running  be- 
fore a  surf  or  broken  sea,  and  the  beaching,  or  landing  of  a  boat, 
are  two  distinct  operations ;  the  management  of  boats,  as  above 
recommended,  has  exclusive  reference  to  running  before  a  surf 
where  the  shore  is  so  flat  that  the  broken  water  extends  to  some 
distance  from  the  beach.  On  a  very  steep  beach,  the  first  heavy 
fall  of  broken  water  will  be  on  the  beach  itself,  while  on  some  very 
flat  shores,  there  will  be  broken  water  extending  four  or  five  miles 
from  the  land.  The  outermost  line  of  broken  water,  on  a  flat 
shore,  where  the  waves  break  in  three  or  four  fathoms  of  water, 
is  the  heaviest,,  and  therefore  the  most  dangerous ;  and  when  it 
has  been  passed  through  in  safety,  the  danger  lessens  as  the  water 
shoals,  until  on  nearing  the  land,  its  force  is  spent  and  its  power 
is  harmless.  As  the  character  of  the  sea  is  quite  different  on 
steep  and  flat  shores,  so  is  the  customary  management  of  boats, 
on  landing,  different  in  the  two  situations. 

(2)  On  the  Hat  shore,  whether  a  boat  be  run  or  backed  in,  she  is 
kept  straight  before,  or  end-on  to  the  sea  until  she  is  fairly 
aground,  when  each  surf  takes  her  further  in  as  it  overtakes  her, 
aided  by  the  crew,  who  will  then  generally  jump  out  to  lighten  her, 
and  drag  her  in  by  her  sides.  As  above  stated,  sail  will,  in  this 
case,  have  been  previously  taken  in,  if  set,  and  the  boat  will  have 
been  rowed  or  backed  in  by  the  oars  alone. 


44  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

(3)  On  the  steep  beach,  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  the  general 
practice,  in  a  boat  of  any  size,  to  sail  right  on  to  the  beach,  and  in 
the  act  of  landing,  whether  under  oars  or  sail,  to  turn  the  boat's 
bow  half  around,  toward  the  direction  in  which  the  surf  is  run- 
ning, so  that  she  may  be  thrown  on  her  broadside  up  the  beach, 
where  abundance  of  help  is  usually  at  hand  to  haul  her  as  quickly 
as  possible  out  of  the  reach  of  the  sea.  In  such  situations,  we 
believe  it  is  nowhere  the  practice  to  back  a  boat  in  stern  foremost 
under  oars,  but  to  row  in  under  full  speed,  as  above  described. 

RUNNING  A  LINE. 

84.  (i)  Coil  the  greater  part  of  the  line  in  the  stern  sheets,  but 
take  end  enough  in  the  bow  to  make  fast  when  you  reach  the  land- 
ing. Pull  away  and  let  the  ship  pay  out  more  line  until  you  are 
sure  of  having  enough  in  the  boat  to  reach,  then  pay  out  from  the 
boat.  Always  have  plenty  of  good  seizing  stuff  for  making  all 
secure,  and  if  you  are  to  stand  by  the  line,  have  an  ax  ready  for 
cutting  in  case  you  are  ordered  to  do  so. 

(2)  If  laying  out  with  the  tide,  take  less  line  in  the  boat  than 
otherwise.  If  against  the  side,  it  will  save  work  to  take  all  the 
line  in  the  boat,  pull  up  and  make  fast,  then  bring  the  end  back  to 
the  ship.  With  a  long  line  to  be  laid  out  in  a  strong  current,  it 
will  usually  be  necessary  to  have  several  boats — one  to  run  away 
with  the  end,  the  other  to  underrun  the  line  at  intervals,  floating 
it  and  pulling  upstream  with  the  bight. 

(3)  If  the  line  is  to  be  secured  to  a  post,  put  a  bowline  in  the 
end  before  starting  and  throw  this  over  the  post.  Bend  on  a  heav- 
ing line  and  let  the  bow  oarsman  throw  this,  if  hands  are  standing 
by  to  receive  it,  or  jump  ashore  with  it  himself  if  necessary. 

TOWING. 

85.  (i)  In  ordinary  cases  of  towing — an  unladen  boat  in  a 
smooth  sea— the  towing  boat  passes  clear  of  the  oars  of  the  tow 
(oars  of  tow  should  preferably  be  tossed  to  facilitate  this),  plac- 
ing herself  in  line  ahead,  receives  painter  from  the  tow,  secures  it 
to  ringbolt  in  sternpost,  and  starts  ahead  immediately  she  has  hold 
of  the  painter. 

(2)  The  bowman  in  the  tow  must  not  give  the  towing  boat  his 
painter  until  she  is  about  ahead.  He  will  then  take  in  the  slack  of 
the  towline,  keeping  a  strain  on  it,  and  gradually  pay  it  out,  thus 
getting  way  on  the  tow  gradually.  This  latter  precaution  is  par- 
ticularly necessary  if  the  tow  is  at  all  heavy. 

(3)  Though  it  is  frequently  impracticable,  it  is  always  pref- 
ferable  for  fhe  towing  boat  to  give  the  tow  a  painter  (instead  of 
vice  versa),  which  the  tow  should  tend  and  keep  ready  for  letting 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  45 

go  in  an  instant.  If  this  is  not  done  and  the  tow  gives  the  towing 
vessel  her  bow  painter,  which  is  shackled  in  the  bow,  a  hatchet 
from  the  boat  box  or  sharp  knife  should  be  kept  at  hand  in  the 
towed  boat  for  cutting  the  towline  in  an  emergency.     (See  art. 

(4)  If  the  tow  is  heavily  laden  or  the  sea  rough  the  above 
method  brings  too  much  strain  on  the  stem  and  sternposts  of  the 
boats.  Hence,  in  such  a  case,  the  painter  should  be  toggled  to  a 
stretcher  between  the  two  afterthwarts  of  the  towing  boat  and  to 
the  forward  thwart  of  the  tow.  To  steer  a  boat  that  is  towing  in 
this  manner,  bear  the  towline  over  on*the  quarter  toward  which  it 
is  desired  to  turn,  to  leave  the  stern  more  free  to  answer  the 
rudder. 

(5)  Towmg  of  ships'  boats  is  now  usually  done  by  the  power 
boats,  which  are  frequently  fitted  with  a  span,  the  ends  of  which 
are  secured  to  either  quarter.,  This  facilitates  steering  and  is  in 
all  respects  preferable  to  securing  the  towline  to  the  shackle  in  the 
sternpost. 

(6)  When  being  towed  astern  of  a  large  vessel,  use  a  short  . 
scope,  so  as  to  remain  close  under  the  counter,  with  the  bow 
partly  out  of  water.  In  casting  off,  when  there  are  other  boats  tow^ 
ing  astern,  be  careful  before  letting  go  either  to  drop  clear  of  them 
all  with  your  towline,  or  be  handy  with  your  oars  to  avoid  getting 
athwart  the  hawse  of  some  of  them. 

(7)  Except  in  the  case  of  unladen  boats  in  smooth  water,  a 
number  of  boats  should  never  be  towed  tandem  by  their  painters, 
for  in  a  long  tow  this  brings  a  considerable  strain  on  stem  and 
stern  timbers  of  the  foremost  boats.  To  avoid  this  strain,  the 
towing  vessel  should  pay  out  sufficient  line  to  reach  the  bow  of 
the  last  boat,  the  other  boats  being  secured  to  it  by  slip  lines  at 
bow  and  stern. 

(8)  If  towing  alongside,  have  the  towline  from  as  far  forward 
on  the  towing  vessel  as  possible ;  either  toggle  it  to  the  forward 
thwart  (steadying  it  over  the  stem  with  a  bight  of  the  painter), 
or  pass  it  through  the  forward  rowlock  on  the  side  nearest  the 
towing  vessel.    Pay  particular  attention  to  the  steering. 

CARRYING  STORES. 

86.  (i)  When  carrying  provisions,  be  careful  with  the  oars,  as 
they  are  easily  injured  by  letting  stores  fall  on  them.  Keep  all 
casks  "  bung  up,"  and  leave  a  space,  or  "  well,"  under  the  after- 
thwart  for  bailing  the  boat  out. 

(2)  Have  tarpaulins  for  covering  bread  or  anything  that  will 
be  irrjured  by  salt  water  or  rain. 

(3)  While  loading,  make  a  large  allowance  for  the  roughness 
of  the  water  you  may  have  to  encounter. 


46  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

(4)  Do  not  overload  a  boat,  particularly  with  men,  as  it  may 
result  in  loss  of  life.  When  carrying  treasure,  always  attach  a 
buoy,  with  a  drift  of  line  at  least  equal  to  the  greatest  depth  of 
water  on  the  route  to  be  taken. 

BOARDING  A  WRECK. 

87.  (i)  Whenever  practicable,  a  vessel,  whether  stranded  or 
afloat,  should  be  boarded  from  to  leeward,  as  the  principal  danger 
is  that  the  boat  may  collide  against  the  vessel  or  be  swamped  by 
the  rebound  of  the  sea,  and-the  greater  violence  of  the  sea  on  the 
weather  side  of  the  vessel  renders  .such  accidents  more  liable  to 
occur  on  that  side. 

(2)  //  a  stranded  vessel  is  broadside  to  the  sea,  the  chief  danger 
in  boarding  to  leeward  is  the  possible  falling  of  the  masts,  or  that 
the  boat  may  be  stove  by  the  wreckage  alongside.  Under  such 
circumstances  it  may  be  necessary  to  take  a  wrecked  crew  into  a 
lifeboat  from  the  bow  or  stern  of  the  wreck.    In  boarding  a  wreck 

,  that  is  stranded  on  a  flat  shore,  lifeboats  usually  anchor  to  wind- 
ward and  veer  down  from  a  safe  distance  until  near  enough  to 
throw  a  line  on  board. 

(3)  In  rescuing  people  from  a  drifting  wreck,  approach  from 
leeward,  taking  care  to  avoid  wreckage  floating  alongside.  If 
there  is  much  wind  it  is  best  to  lay  well  ofi^,  throw  a  strong  line 
aboard,  have  the  people  secure  the  line  around  their  bodies,  one  at 
a  time,  and  jump  overboard,  for  if  the  boat  gets  alongside  of  a 
wreck  which  is  rapidly  drifting  to  leeward,  there  is  danger  of 
swamping,  and  much  difficulty  in  getting  her  clear  of  the  side. 

(4)  Should  it  be  necessary  to  go  alongside,  it  is  preferable  to 
run  the  bow  or  stern  to  the  gangway  or  sea  ladder,  keeping  her 
headed  at  right  angles  to  the  ship's  keel,  with  oars  out  ready  for 
pulling  or  backing  away. 

(5)  An  exception  to  the  usual  rule  of  boarding  a  drifting  vessel 
to  leeward  occurs  in  the  case  of  a  vessel  of  very  low  freeboard, 
such  as  small  schooners,  etc.  Board  such  craft  on  the  weather 
quarter  to  avoid  being  stove  in  by  her  main  boom,  chains,  etc. 

NOTES  ON  HANDLING  BOATS  UNDER  OARS. 

88.  (i)  In  going  into  a  crowded  or  difficult  landing,  pull  easily 
and  keep  the  boat  under  control  with  the  oars  as  long  as  possible, 
la/ing  on  oars  if  necessary,  and  boating  oars  only  at  the  last 
moment. 

V2)  In  going  through  a  narrow  entrance,  get  good,  way  on  the 
hoat   then  trail  or  toss  the  oars. 


TijE  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  47 

(3)  Remember  that  a  loaded  boat  holds  her  way  much  longer 
that  a  light  one. 

(4)  In  pulling  across  a  current,  try  to  g£t  a  range  on  two  objects 
in  Ime  and  steer  by  these  to  avoid  being  set  down  by  the  current. 

(5)  Having  a  long  pull  against  the  tide,  run  inshore,  where  the 
tide  is  slacker  than  in  midstream,  and  where  there  is  sometimes  an 
eddy.  , 

(6)  There  should  always  be  a  lantern,  filled  and  trimmed,  in 
the  boat,  and  boats  should  never  leave  the  ship  for  a  trip  of  any 
great  length  without  a  compass.  Weather  is  liable  to  thicken  at 
any  time,  and  a  boat  without  a  compass  would  have  difficulty  in 
reaching  a  landing  or  returning  to  the  ship.  For  this  reason,  boat 
officers  and  coxswains  of  running  boats  should  at  all  times  know 
the  compass  course  between  the  ship  and  landing;  and  if  they  are 
away  from  the  ship  and  it  begins  to  thicken,  they  should  at  once 
observe  the  compass  course  before  the  ship  is  shut  in. 

(7)  In  power  boats,  owing  to  deviation  of  the  compass,  coxs- 
wains must  understand  that  the  only  way  to  obtain  a  correct  com- 
pass course  is  to  put  the  boat  compass  in  its  regular  place,  head 
the  boat  on  the  correct  course,  then  read  the  compass  course.  If 
this  is  not  done,  considerable  errors  are  liable  to  occur. 

(8)  At  sea  no  boat  should  ever  leave  the  ship  without  a  com- 
pass, water,  and  provisions,  and,  excepting  lifeboats,  all  boats 
sent  away  from  a  ship  at  sea  will  carry  rifles  and  ammunition. 

(9)  Never  go  alongside  a  vessel  which  has  sternboard  or  which 
is  backing  her  engines. 

'  ( 10)  In  coming  alongside  in  a  seaway  or  when  a  strong  tide  is 
running,  warn  the  bowman  to  look  out  for  the  boat  line  which  will 
be  hove  from  the  ship. 

(11)  If  caught  in  a  gale  in  an  open  boat,  rig  a  sea  anchor  by 
lashing  the  spars  and  sails  together,  sails  loosed.  Fit  a  span  to 
this  and  ride  by  the  painter.  If  there  is  oil  in  the  boat,  secure  a 
bag  of  it  to  the  sea  anchor. 

BOATS  UNDER  SAIL. 

89.  (i)  The  principles  of  boat  sailing  are  the  same  for  all  rigs. 
The  use  of  the  lee  oars  is  dangerous  when  under  sail ;  a  slight  gust 
of  wind  lowers  the  gunwale  so  as  to  prevent  the  oars  being  lifted 
from  the  water,  thus  "  catching  a  crab  "  and  the  headway  of  the 
boat  will  cause  the  oars  to  fiy  violently  fore-and-aft. 

(2)  The  boat  officer  or  coxswain  shall  never  permit  anyone  to 
climb  the  mast  of  a  boat.  If  halliards,  brails,  etc.,  are  unrove, 
unstep  the  mast. 


48  The  Deck  and  Boat  Bo©k. 

(3)  Coming  alongside  under  sail  requires  care,  judgment,  and 
experience.  In  the  first  place  it  should  not  be  attempted  if  a  boat, 
or  other  obstruction  which  the  masts  could  touch,  overhangs  the 
gangway,  nor  in  rough  weather  when  the  rolling  motion  of  the 
boat  would  cause  the  masts  to  strike  the  gangway  platform.  In 
such  cases  masts  should  be  unstepped  and  the  boat  brought  along- 
side under  oars.  .  1 

(4)  If  the  ship  is  riding  to  a  windward  tide,  approach  the  gang- 
way from  abaft  the  beam,  tend  all  gear  and  shorten  sail  when 
boat  has  sufficient  way  to  reach  gangway.  The  bow  and  stroke 
oarsmen  tend  boat  hooks,  the  other  men"  performing  their  duties 
in  shortening  sail. 

(5)  If  the  ship  is  riding  to  the  wind,  approach  the  gangway 
from  about  abeam,  tend  all  gear,  bow  and  stroke  oarsmen  stand 
by  with  boat  hooks ;  when  there  is  sufficient  way  to  make  the  gang- 
way, command :  "  In  jib  and  foresail."  The  jib  tack  and  sheet  are 
let  go,  jib  smothered  in  to  foremast;  lower  the  foresail  or  brail  it 
up,  at  the  same  time  put  the  tiller  hard  down,  haul  main  boom 
amidships  or  a  bit  on  the  weather  quarter.  This  throws  the 
boat's  head  into  the  wind,  and  hauling  main  boom  to  windward 
deadens  her  headway,  when  desirable.  When  alongside  com- 
mand :   "  In  mainsail,"  stow  sails  and  unstep,  if  desirable. 

(6)  The  above  is  the  surest  and  safest  method,  but  with  skillful 
handling  all  sails  may  be  taken  in  together,  the  tiller  put  hard 
down,  and  boat  rounded  up  to  gangway.  This  requires  more  skill 
and  judgment  and  should  not  ordinarily  be  attempted. 

(7)  If  there  is  any  current,  make  allowance  for  it  by  heading- 
for  a  point  further  forward  or  aft,  as  the  case  may  be. 

SLIDING  GUNTER  RIG. 

90.  (i)  Following  are  the  commands  which  apply  to  the  slid- 
ing gunter  rig,  and  the  drill  shall  be  adapted  and  applied  to  other 
rigs  as  well  as  may  be  practicable. 

COMMANDS.  DUTIES. 

(2)   Being  under  oars,  to  make  sail.  • 

(a)  Way  enough Oars  are  boated  as  above  described. 

(b)  Stand  by  to  step All  hands  cast  off  spar  covers. 

Starboard  thwartmen  launch  mainmast 
forward  until  heel  of  mast  is  even  with 
step ;  raise  masthead. 

Similarly,  port  thwartmen  launch  fore- 
mast to  position  and  raise  masthead. 

All  the  crew  remain  seated  whenever 
their  duties  will  permit. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  49 

commands.  duties. 

(c)  Step  the  masts Stroke  oars  guide  heel  of  main  into  step. 

Bow  oars  guide  heel  of  fore  into  step. 

Starboard  thwartmen  stand  on  bottom 
boards  and  raise  mainmast. 

Port  thwartmen  stand  on  bottom  boards 
and  raise  foremast. 

Bow  and  stroke  oarsmen  get  masts  on 
proper  slue  and,  when  nearly  vertical, 
guide  them  into  step. 

Bow  and  stroke  oarsmen  and  second  bow 
and  second  stroke  cast  off  shrouds  and 
set  them  up.  If  jib  boom  is  used,  it  is 
stepped  by  bowmen  after  mast  is  step- 
ped. In  this  case  the  second  bowmen 
set  up  the  fore  shrouds. 

(d)  Loose  sail Stroke  oarsmen  cast  off  sheet  from  main* 

and    take    place   in    stern    sheets    with 

mainsheet  in  hand. 
Second  stroke  attends  main  brails.     The 

other  second  stroke  mans  maintopmast 

halliards. 
Starboard    stroke    reports    when    all    is 

ready  aft. 
Second    bowman    casts   adrift    foresheet 

passes   it   aft,   and    attends    forebrails. 

The  other  second  bowman  mans  fore- 
topmast  halliards. 
One  bowman   casts   adrift  jib  halliards. 

hauls  head  of  jib  down  to  the  deck  and 

mans  jib  halliards.   The  other  bowman 

sets  up  jib  tack  and  passes  sheets  aft 

on  each  side. 
Starboard   bowman   reports   when  all  is 

ready  forward. 

(e)  With  starboard    (or 

port)  sheet.  Make  sail. Topmasts  are  hoisted  chock  up,  brai-ls 
eased  down  and  well  overhauled,  and 
jib  hoisted. 

Thwartmen  convenient  to  sheets,  haul 
them  aft  on  designated  side  and  attend 
them. 

Bowman  keep  bright  lookout  ahead; 
keep  coxswain  fully  informed  of  the 
proximity  of  obstructions  or  approach- 
ing vessel. 


50  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

commands.  duties. 

(3)  To  tack. 

(a)  Ready  about Given  as  a  warning  for  the  crew  to  pre- 

pare for  the  evolution.  The  coxswain 
gives  the  boat  a  good  full,  waits  for  a 
smooth  time,  then  eases  down  the  til- 
ler. At  the  same  time  the  man  tending 
mainsheet  hauls  main  boom  amidships 
slowly.  (Do  not  haul  it  across  midship 
Hne,  for  it  then  acts  as  a  back  sail.) 

(b)  Ease  off  the  jib  sheet. Given  when  jib  begins  to  shiver. 

(c)  Let  go  fore  sheet..  .Given  when  foresail  ceases  to  draw.     If 

boat   seems   inclined   to    stop   head   to 
wind,  haul  jib  sheet  to  windward;  this  . 
will  be  taken  aback  and  pay  her  head 
around.     If    boat    gathers    sternboard, 
shift  the  tiller. 

(d)  Shift      over      main- 

sheet When  wind  is  ahead,  shift  over  the  main- 
sheet  and  stand  by  to  haul  it  aft  when 
well  around  on  the  new  tack. 

(e)  Haul  aft  fore  and  jib  As    soon    as   the   bow   of   the   boat   has 

sheets passed  the  wind,  haul  aft  fore  and  jib 

sheets,  leaving  the  mainsheet  slack  until 
boat  is  well  around,  then  trim  by  the 
wind. 

If  the  boat  falls  off  too  far  from  the 
wind,  and  there  is  little  steerage  way, 
haul  aft  mainsheet  and  keep  jib  sheet 
flying  until  she  is  brought  up  by  the 
fore  and  mainsail  and  the  tiller. 

When  nearly  high  enough,  haul  aft  the 
jib  sheet  and  trim  her  by  the  wind. 

(4)  To  wear. 

(a)  Stand  by  to  wear. .  .Given  as  a  warning  for  the  crew  to  pre- 

pare for  the  evolution.  The  coxswain 
puts  the  tiller  up  when  ready. 

(b)  Ease  off  mainsheet.  .Given  as  her  head  pays  off,  in  order  to 

get  the  maximum  effect  of  the  mainsail 
in  increasing  her  headway.  Keep  fast 
fore  and  jib  sheets  until  wind  is  abeam, 
as  they  help  pay  her  head  off. 

(c)  Ease  off  fore  and  jib 

sheets Given   when  wind   is  a  little  abaft  the 

beam.  Slack  the  sheets  off  gradually 
to  give  headway. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  51 

commands.  duties'. 

(d)  Up  mainsail Given  when  wind  comes  nearly  aft.  Brail 

up  mainsail,  leaving  topmast  halliards 
fast. 

(e)  Shift  over  sheets.  ..  Given  when  wind  is  aft.     Stand  by  to 

haul  all  sheets  aft  on  other  side. 

(/)   Down   mainsail Given    when    wind    is    slightly    on    new 

weather  quarter.  Set  mainsail  and  haul 
it  flat  aft ;  leave  other  sheets  flying,  or 
smothered  into  mast,  so  she  will  come 
up  rapidly. 

(g)  Haul    aft    fore    and 

jib  sheets Given  as.  she  comes  by  the  wind  on  new 

tack.     Haul  both  sheets  flat  aft. 

Note. — li  wearing  in  a  light  to  gentle  breeze,  it  is  unnecessary 
to  brail  up  the  mainsail  but  in  a  moderate  breeze,  or  anything 
stronger,  it  should  always  be  done  on  account  of  danger  from 
gybing  under  those  circumstances. 

With  a  sloop  rig,  put  tiller  up  and  ease  off  sheets.  When  wind 
is  nearly  aft,  trim  in  main  boom  to  avoid  danger  from  gybing 
violently.  In  anything  stronger  than  a  gentle  breeze,  sloop-rigged 
boats  should  always  be  tacked  to  avoid  this  danger.  H  absolutely 
necessary  to  gybe  a  sloop  in  a  fresh  breeze,  the  peak  shduld  be 
dropped  in  addition  to  hauling  in  main  boom. 

(5)  To  brail  up. 

(a)  Stand  by  to  brail  up.  Designated   thwartmen    man   the   brails, 

men  tending  sheets  stand  by  to  slack 
them  off. 
Bowmen  stand  by  to  lower  away  jib. 

(b)  Brail  up The  clews  of  foresail  and  mainsail  are 

hauled*  up,  keeping  fast  the  topmast 
halliards. 
The  jib  halliards  are  slacked  off  and 
head  of  jib  hauled  down  in  the  fore 
sheets,  keeping  jib  entirely  inside  the 
rail. 
Note. — To  make  sail  from  this  position,  see  Article  90  (2)  (e). 

(6)  To  hea-iri!  to. 

(a)  Stand  by  to  heave  to.  Given  as  a  warning  for  the  crew  to  pre- 
I5>arc  for  the  evolution. 
Coxswain  brings  boat  by  the  win^  and 
keeiis  tiller  a-Iee. 


52  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

commands.  duties. 

(b)  Haul  main  boom 
amidships.  Haul  aft 
weather    jib  -  sheet. 

Up  foresail These    commands    are    given    simultan- 
eously, and  are  obeyed  by  the  men/ at 
the  various  stations. 
(b)   Haul     main     boom 
amidships.  Haul  aft 
weather  jib-  sheet. 

Up  foresail In  heavy  weather  the  foresail  is  brailed 

.  (continued.)  up,  keeping  fast  fore-topmast  halliards. 

In  slight  breezes  the  fore  sheet  may  be 

simply  slacked  off. 
If  bow  falls  off,  slack  away  jib  sheet. 
The  boat  in  this  condition  should  lie  dead 
in  the  water,  wind  about  abeam. 

(7)  T^o  get  under  way 

from  "  Heave  to." 
Make  sail Haul  aft  fore  and  jib  sheets,  ease  the  til- 
ler, and  ease  off  the  main  boom. 

(8)  To  reef  sail. 

(a)  Stand  by  to  reef.  . .  .Given  as  a  warning  for  the  crew  to  pre- 
pare for  the  evolution.     Tend  all  hal- 
liards.   Pass  reef  points  through  eyelet 
holes,  if  not  already  rove  off. 
Coxswain  brings  boat  by  the  wind. 

(fc)  Slack  down  the  hal- 
liards   Coxswain  luffs  slightly,  but  not  enough 

to  cause  boat  to  lose  headway. 
Topmast   and   jib   halliards   are   slacked 
down  about  18  inches.  , 

(f )  Reef    sail Secure    reef    earings    to    tack    of    sails. 

Pass  reef  points  around  foot  of  sail. 
Earing  in  leech  should  be  tightly  bound 
around  foot  of  sail,  not  around  the 
boom.  The  bowmen  report  "  all  ready 
forward."    When  ready  command  : 

(d)  Hoist  away Men  at  halliards  hoist  sails,  and  cox- 
swain lays  the  boat  on  desired  course. 
Always  keep  boat  under  control,  if 
possible,  while  reefing.  Reef  whenever 
boat  begins  to  take  in  water  over  lee 
rail.  Never  be  afraid  or  reefing  too 
soon. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  53 

commands.  duties. 

(9)   To  dowse  sail. 

(a)  Stand  by  to  shorten 

sail Given  as  a  warning  for  cn.>w  to  stand  by 

their  stations.  Tend  topi.Jast  halliards, 
man  brails,  bowmen  stand  by  jib  tack 
and  get  it  ready  for  slipping  quickly. 

(b)  Shorten    sail Lower  topmasts,  brail  up  fore  and  main 

sails;   ease   off  jib   tack,   keeping  hal- 
Hards  fast;  smother  jib  into  foremast. 
Men  sit  on  their  thwarts  awaiting  next 
command. 

(c)  Furl    sails Bowman    and    second    bowman,    stroke 

and  second  stroke  bundle  all  gear  into 
sails ;  roll  them  up  neatly  around  mast, 
making  smooth  skin ;  pass  sheets 
around  sails,  binding  them  to  masts. 

(d)  Prepare  to  unstep.  ..Cast  off  shrouds;  bow  and  stroke  oars- 

men take  a  shroud  in  each  hand,  and, 
by  repeated  crossing  from  one  side  to 
another,  f rap  each  sail  securely  in  to  its 
mast ;  bind  the  shrouds  together  near 
foot  of  mast  and  tuck  in  all  ends.  Bow 
and  stroke  oarsmen  report  when  all  is 
ready  for  unstepping. 

(e)  Stand  by;  unstep.  ..Make  a  slight  pause  between  these  com- 

mands. 

The  bow  and  stroke  oarsmen  seize  their 
respective  masts  and  lift  them  verti- 
cally (inclining  mast  in  direction  it  is 
to  be  lowered)  until  heel  is  clear  of 
hole  in  thwart,  then  lower  them,  fore- 
mast on  port  side,  mainmast  on  star- 
board side. 

Men  amidships  stand  on  bottom  boards 
and  help  receive  and  stow  masts.  After 
masts  are  unstepped  launch  them 
bodily  to  stowing  positions.  Men 
quickly  take  seats  on  thwarts. 

Care  shall  be  observed  to  keep  masts 
from  going  by  the  board  or  going 
down  with  a  run,  but  even  in  this  case 
it  should  be  nossible  for  men  in  the 
waist  to  receive  them  without  injury 
to  themselves. 


54  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

commands.  duties. 

(e)  Stand  by ;  unstep. ...  A  well-drilled  crew  should  easily  be  able 
{continued.)  to  go  from  oars  to  sails,  or  vice  versa, 

in  one  minute. 
Except  with  a  considerably  reduced  crew, 
or  in  a  heavy  seaway,  masts  shall  never 
be  stepped  or  unstepped  singly.  It  is 
not  seamanlike  and  encourages  laxity 
at  drill. 

(lo)  It  will  be  observed  that  a  distinction  is  made  between 
"  Shorten  sail "  and  "  Brail  up."  Shorten  sail  always  requires 
topmasts  to  be  lowered,  while  "Brail  up  "  requires  that  they  be 
kept  fast.  A  similar  distinction  should  be  made  between  "  In 
mainsail''  and  "Up  mainsail"  (or  "Foresail");  "In  mainsail" 
requires  topmasts  to  be  lowered;  "Up  mainsail"  requires  top- 
masts to  be  kept  fast  and  the  sail  trailed  up.  "  Shorten  sail "  and 
"  Brail  up "  apply  to  both  masts,  working  simultaneously.  "  In 
mainsail"  (or  "In  foresail")  are  the  commands  used  to  take  in 
either  sail  singly. 

(ii)  In  general  it  will  be  noted  that  the  stroke  oarsmen  handle 
the  main,  assisted  by  the  second  stroke.  The  bow  oarsmen  handle 
the  fore  (assisted  by  second  bowmen),  until  jib  is  cast  adrift; 
they  then  devote  their  attention  to  the  jib,  leaving  the  work  around 
foremast  to  the  second  bowmen.  Stroke  oarsmen  handle  main 
sheets ;  second  stroke  handles  the  main  brails  and  halliards  and 
attends  foresheets.  In  general,  the  men  on  thwarts  nearest  the 
cleats  attend  the  sheets,  regardless  of  the  sail  to  which  it  belongs. 
The  starboard  bow  oarsman  is  in  general  charge  forward  and  the 
starboard  stroke  in  general  charge  of  the  main,  and  these  men 
will  make  necessary  reports  to  the  officer  or  petty  officer  in  charge 
of  the  boat. 

STANDING  LUG  RIG. 

91.  (i)  The  lug  rig  does  not  usually  carry  a  jib.  With  that 
exception  the  following  modifications  of  the  foregoing  drill  for 
the  sliding  gunter  will  adapt  that  drill  to  the  lug  rig. 

(2)  Stepping  masts. — In  stepping,  the  proper  slue  will  be  with 
the  halliard  sheaves  fore  and  aft,  the  standing  part  of  the  halliards 
being  abaft  tho  mast. 

(3)  Loosing  sail. — The  command  is  "  Stand  by  to  make  sail." 
Starboard  thwartmen  light  the  mainsail  aft  and  hook  on  the  yard; 
second  starboard  stroke  secures  jaws  of  main  boom  in  place ;  sec- 
ond port  stroke  stands  by  to  hoist  away  on  the  halliards ;  port 
thwartmen  clear  away  the  foresail  and  hook  on  the  yard;  bow- 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  55 

men  stand  by  to  lash  tack  of  foresail  to  eyebolt  in  the  foremast 
and  to  hoist  away  on  the  halliards. 

(4)  Making  sail. — Substitute  "  yards  "  for  "  topmasts  "  in  the 
.commands. 

(5)  Tacking. — The  Navy  rig  being  the  standing  lug,  it  is  not 
necessary  to  dip  the  lug  in  going  about.  However,  in  making  a 
long  board  on  one  tack  it  may  be  worth  while  to  dip  the  lugs  to 
leeward,  as  the  sails  will  stand  a  little  better.  This  can  usually  be 
done  without  touching  the  halliards,  a  man  grasping  the  luff  of  the 
sail  and  the  forward  end  of  the  yard  and  bearing  down  on  them 
while  the  sheet  is  slacked. 

(6)  Wearing. — The  main  boom  should  be  topped  up  when  the 
wind  is  nearly  aft,  except  in  very  light  airs,  and  eased  down  again 
on  the  new  lee  quarter.  In  a  strong  breeze  the  mainsail  should 
be  lowered. 

Brailing  up. — Lug  sails  have  no  brails. 

Heaving  to. — Heaving  to  is  not  practicable  unless  there  is  a  jib. 
In  this  case  the  commands  are  the  same  as  with  the  sliding  gunter, 
except  that  instead  of  "  Up  foresail "  the  command  is  "  Down 
foresail,"  whereat  the  foresail  is  lowered.  Upon  filling  away 
again  hoist  the  foresail. 

Reefing. — Substitute  "  yards  "  for  "  topmasts  "  in  the  commands. 

Dowsing  sail. — At  the  command  "  Shorten  sail "  lower  the  sails 
and  cast  off  foretack  and  jaws  of  main  boom.  At  "Furl  sail" 
starboard  thwartmen  unhook  and  furl  mainsail,  using  the  sheets  as 
gaskets;  port  thwartmen  unhook  and  furl  foresail.  » 

Unstepping  masts. — At  the  preparatory  order,  cast  off  shrouds. 
At  the  final  order,  lift  the  masts  out  clear  of  the  mast  holes  in  the 
thwarts  and  place  them  as  directed  for  the  sliding  gunter.  Put 
the  foresail  and  mainsail  along  their  respective  masts  and  lash 
them  with  the  shrouds. 

NOTES  ON  HANDLING  BOATS  UNDER  SAIL. 

Note. — The  following  general  notes  on  handling  boats  under  sail  were  taken 
from  the  Petty  Officer's  Drill  Book,  1902,  in  which  they  were  reproduced  by- 
permission  from  Knight's  Modern  Seamanship: 

92.  Trim. —  (i)  To  do  her  best  under  sail,  a  boat  must  be 
trimmed  in  accordance  with  her  build  and  rig. 

(2)  If  she  carries  considerable  headsail,  she  will  need  to  be 
deeper  forward  than  would  otherwise  be  desirable.  If  she  has 
little  or  no  headsail,  she  would  trim  by  the  stern.  The  build  and 
rig  are  fixed  upon  with  reference  to  each  other,  due  consideration 
being  given  to  the  purpose  for  which  the  boat  is  designed.  Once 
fixed,  the  characteristics  are  practically  permanent.  The  trim  of 
both  boat  and  sails,  on  the  other  hand,  can  be  varied  within  rather 


56  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

wide  limits;  but  they,  too,  must  be  considered  with  reference  to 
each  other.  Most  boats  when  on  the  wind  sail  best  when  carrying 
a  little  weather  tiller ;  that  is  to  say,  when  they  have  a  slight  ten- 
dency to  come  into  the  wind.  Too  much  weather  tiller  may  be 
corrected  by  shifting  weights  aft;  too  much  lee  tiller  by  shifting 
them  forward. 

(3)  The  weights  should  be  kept  out  of  the  ends  of  the  boat, 
without  being  unduly  crowded  together  amidships.  It  is  especially 
important  to  keep  heavy  weights  out  of  the  bow.  The  only  bal- 
last, as  such  that  should  be  carried,  is  water  in  breakers.  Under 
no  circumstances  should  "  sinking  "  ballast  be  allowed ;  ballast,  in 
other  words,  which  is  heavier  than  water.  The  lower  the  weights 
can  be  stowed,  the  better;  but  care  should  be  taken  to  keep  the 
**  well "  clear  for  bailing.  Ballast  and  cargo  must  be  secured 
against  the  possibility  of  shifting.  The  crew  should  be  kept  well 
down,  and  nobody  be  allowed  to  stand  on  the  thwarts  or  to  sit  on 
the  gunwale.  If  the  men  are  sitting  to  windward  in  a  fresh  breeze, 
they  should  move  amidships  when  passing  under  the  lee  of  a  ves- 
sel or  other  object,  where  the  wind  may  fail  or  even  shift  in  an 
eddy.  The  mast  should  be  properly  stayed  up  and  down  or  with 
a  slight  rake  aft,  and  the  halliards  taut  up. 

93.  (i)  On  the  wind,  as  has  been  said,  a  boat  should  carry  a 
little  weather  tiller.  The  sails  should  be  kept  rap  full,  sheets  not 
too  flat,  but  everything  drawing  and  the  boat  alive.  It  is  a  com- 
mon mistake  to  get  the  sheets  so  flat  that  the  boat,  while  pointing 
high,  actually  makes  a  course  to  leeward  of  that  which  she  would 
make  if  kept  away  a  httle  with  sheets  eased  accordingly ;  and  it  is, 
of  course,  clear  that  if  kept  away,  her  speed  will  be  greater  than 
when  jammed  up  into  the  wind  in  the  hope  of  stealing  a  fraction 
of  a  point.  A  boat  of  good  draft  with  a  deep  keel  or  centerboard 
and  yachts  designed  for  racing,  with  fin  keels  hanging  10  feet  be- 
low their  normal  draft,  will  lie  amazingly  close  to  the  wind  with 
little  or  no  leeway.  Ships'  boats,  however  are  not  constructed  on 
yachting  lines  and  can  not  be  held  up  in  the  same  way. 
'^  (2)  Sheets  may  be  hauled  flatter  in  smooth  water  than  in  rough, 
and  the  sheets  of  standing  lugs,  gaff  and  boom  sails,  sHding  gun- 
ters,  and  the  like  may  be  hauled  flatter  than  those  of  dipping  lugs. 
The  sails  being  properly  set,  the  leech  cloths  of  the  sails  are  kept 
just  trembling,  with  enough  weather  tiller  to  let  the  steersman 
""  feel "  that  she  wants  to  come  into  the  wind.  As  the  wind  will 
vary  more  or  less  (in  apparent  if  not  real  direction),  it  is  neces- 
sary to  be  watchful  and  to  bring  her  up  or  keep  her  away,  from 
time  to  time,  in  order  that  she  may  be  always  at  her  best.  The 
sails  should  be  kept  fuller  in  rough  than  in  smooth  water,  and  it 
is  more  important  that  the  boat  should  be  kept  going  so  as  to  be 
always  under  command  of  the  rudder.     If  a  heavy  breaking  sea  is 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  57 

seen  bearing  down  upon  her,  she  should  be  luffed  up  to  meet  it, 
and  kept  away  again  as  soon  as  it  has  passed.  If  she  loses  way, 
she  becomes  helpless  at  once.  It  is  dangerous  to  be  caught  by  a 
heavy  sea  on  the  beam ;  and  if  the  course  to  be  made  in  rough 
water  would  bring  the  boat  into  the  trough  of  the  sea,  the  best 
plan  is  to  run  off  for  a  time  with  the  sea  on  the  quarter,  then  bring^ 
her  up  with  it  on  the  bow,  and  so  make  good  the  course  desired 
without  actually  steering  it  at  any  time. 

94.  (i)  It  is  a  universal  rule  in  boat  sailing  that  the  sheets 
should  never  be  belayed  in  any  weather. 

(2)  For  a  moderate  squall  the  boat  should  be  luffed  sufficiently 
to  shake,  without  spiUing  the  sails,  thus  keeping  headway  enough 
to  retain  control,  but  with  the  sheets  (as  always)  in  hand.  If  it 
comes  stronger,  she  must  be  luffed  more  decidedly  and  the  sheet 
slacked  more  or  less.  The  sheet  may,  of  course,  be  let  go,  and  in 
a  sudden  emergency  this  must  be  done  at  once,  in  addition  to  put- 
ting down  the  tiller  and,  if  necessary,  reducing  sail ;  but  the 
longer  she  can  be  kept  under  control  the  better,  and  to  let  go  the 
sheet  is  to  give  up  control. 

(3)  The  situation  is  quite  different  in  running  free.  Here  the 
sail  can  not  be  spilled  by  a  touch  of  the  tiller,  and  the  only  prudent 
thing  is  to  slack  the  sheet  while  luffing.  The  force  of  the  wind 
would  be  much  reduced  by  running  off,  but  the  trouble  with  this 
is  that  if  it  comes  too  strong  there  is  no  resource  but  to  lower  the 
sail,  and  the  chances  are  that  it  will  bind  against  the  shrouds  and 
refuse  to  come  down.  Moreover,  there  is  always  danger  that  the 
wind  will  shift  in  a  squall,  and  the  mainsail  may  gybe  with 
dangerous  force. 


95.  (i)  When  a  boat  begins  to  take  water  it  is  time  to  reef; 
she  should  never,  even  in  smooth  water,  be  allowed  to  heel  too 
much.  A  boat  that  is  decked  over  may  run  her  lee  rail  awash  ;  but 
when  an  open  boat  is  approching  this  point  it  must  be  remembered 
that  a  fresher  puff  may  bear  the  gunwale  lower  without  warning, 
and  that  the  moment  it  dips  the  boat  will  almost  certainly  fill  and 
capsize  The  details  of  reefing  will  depend  upon  the  rig,  but  a 
few  general  rules  may  be  laid  down.  The  men  should  be  sta- 
tioned before  beginning,  and  should  all  be  required  to  remain 
seated.  One  hand  lowers  the  halliards  as  much  as  may  be  neces- 
sary, another  hauls  down  on  the  leech  and  shifts  the  tack.  The 
sheet  is  hauled  in  a  little  to  let  the  men  detailed  for  the  reef 
points  get  hold  of  and  gather  in  the  foot.  The  sheet  is  then 
slacked  and  shifted,  the  reef  points  passed,  the  halliards  manned, 
the  sail  hoisted,  and  the  sheet  trimmed.  It  is  important  to  keep 
the  boat  under  command  while  reefing,  and  for  this  she  must  have 


58  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

way  enough  to  obey  her  rudder.  If  she  can  be  luffed  a  little  and 
still  be  kept  going  through  the  water  sufficiently  to  obey  the  rudder 
then  it  is  unquestionably  wise  to  luff,  but  not  sufficiently  to  risk 
losing  control. 

(2)  If  the  boat  has  more  than  one  sail,  it  is  a  safe  plan  to  reef 
them  one  at  a  time,  when  the  sea  is  dangerously  heavy.  If  there 
is  sufficient  crew  in  the  boat,  and  the  sea  is  moderate,  the  seaman- 
like method  is,  however,  to  reef  all  sails  simultaneously,  as  is  the 
habitual  practice  on  drill. 

RUNNING  BEFORE  THE  WIND. 

96.  (i)  This  is  the  most  dangerous  point  of  sailing  in  a  fresh 
breeze,  because  of  the  chance  of  gybing.  The  danger  increases  if 
the  boat  yaws,  as  she  will  have  a  tendency  to  do  if  trimmed  at  all 
by  the  head ;  from  which  follows  the  rule :  in  running  keep  the 
weights  fairly  well  aft,  though  never  at  the  extreme  after  end. 
Very  careful  steering  is  required,  and  if  the  sea  is  really  heavy, 
the  chances  are  that  the  boom  will  gybe  in  spite  of  all  the  care 
that  can  be  taken,  unless  lashed  to  the  rail  or  to  a  shroud  by  a 
""  lazy  guy." 

(2)  Squalls  are  not  so  dangerous  before  the  wind  as  when  close 
hauled,  unless 'they  are  accompanied  by  a  shift  of  wind.  If  they 
call  for  any  reduction  of  sail,  it  may  be  made  by  dropping  the 
peak  of  a  mainsail  (if  a  gaff  sail),  or,  more  satisfactorily,  by 
reefing. 

(3)  In  running  before  the  wind  the  foresail  is  sometimes  set 
on  the  side  opposite  the  mainsail,  a  temporary  boom  being  rigged 
by  using  a  boat  hook  or  an  oar.  A  boat  sailing  in  this  way  is  going 
""  wing  and  wing." 

(4)  If  the  sea  is  rough,  it  is  well  to  avoid  running  with  the 
wind  dead  aft.  To  make  good  a  course  directly  to  leeward,  the 
wind  may  be  brought  first  on  one  quarter  and  then  on  the  other, 
the  mainsail  being  clewed  up,  or  the  peak  dropped,  each  time  the 
course  is  changed,  if  the  breeze  is  strong  enough  to  make  gybing 
dangerous. 

(5)  A  serious  danger  in  running  before  a  heavy  sea  is  that  of 
*'  broaching  to."  The  boat  will  yaw  considerably,  the  rudder  will 
be  often  out  of  water  when  it  is  most  needed  to  meet  her,  and  the 
sails  will  be  becalmed  in  the  trough  of  the  sea.  The  situation 
here  is  much  like  that  of  a  boat  running  in  a  surf ;  and,  as  in  that 
case,  the  yawmg  will  be  reduced  by  keeping  the  weights  aft  and 
by  steering  with  an  oar.  The  jib  should  always  be  set,  with  the 
sheet  hauled  aft.  It  helps  to  meet  and  pay  her  off  if  she  "  flies  to  " 
against  the  rudder.    A  drag  towed  over  the  stern  is  also  helpful. 

(6)  Another  danger  in  running  is  that  the  boom  may  dip  in  the 
water  as  she  rolls,  and  thus  capsize  the  boat. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  59 


97.  (i)  In  tacking,  the  same  principles  apply  to  a  boat  as  to  a 
ship.  After-sail  tends  to  bring  her  head  to  wind,  head-sail  to 
keep  her  off;  but  all  sails,  so  long  as  they  draw,  give  her  headway 
and  so  add  to  the  steering  power  of  the  rudder. 

(2)  It  is  clear  that  a  short,  full  boat  will  turn  to  windward 
better  than  a  long,  narrow  one,  and  will  require  a  much  shorter 
distance  for  coming  around.  Thus  a  short  boat  is  preferable  to  a 
long  one  for  working  up  a  narrow  channel. 

.  (3)  Under  ideal  conditions,  a  boat  closehauled,  but  with  good 
way  on,  shoots  up  into  the  wind  as  the  tiller  is  eased  down,  makes 
a  good  reach  to  windward,  and  fills  away  on  the  new  tack  without 
for  a  moment  losing  headway.  The  main  boom  is  hauled  amid- 
ships, and,  as  the  jib  and  foresail  lift,  their  sheets  are  let  go.  The 
boat  comes  head  to  wind,  and  as  she  pays  off  on  the  new  tack  the 
sheets  are  hauled  aft  ctnd  she  is  steadied  ou  her  course.  Under, 
less  favorable  conditions,  tacking  is  not  so  si.nple.  If  there  is  a 
sea  on  the  bow,  advantage  must  be  taken  of  a  smooth  time  to  ease 
the  tiller  down ;  the  main  boom  must  be  hauled  amidships  grad- 
ually, and  the  foresail  kept  full  as  long  as  it  will  draw.  If  the 
boat  loses  headway,  the  jib-sheet  is  held  out  on  the  old  lee  bow 
(not  too  far)  to  pay  her  head  around,  and  care  must  be  taken  not 
to  make  a  "  back  sail  "  of  the  mainsail.  As  she  gathers  sternboard 
the  tiller  is  shifted,  and,  if  necessary,  an  oar  is  gotten  out  to  help 
her  around.  Carrying  the  weights  forward  is  favorable  for  tack- 
ing, but  when  a  boat  has  stern-board  she  may  be  helped  around 
by  putting  a  few  of  the  crew  on  the  (new)  lee  quarter,  where,  by 
increasing  the  immersion  of  the  full  lines  of  the  counter,  they  add 
to  the  resistance  and  cause  the  bow  to  fall  off. 

(4)  If  she  gets  "  in  irons,"  either  an  oar  must  be  used  or  the  jib 
and  foresail  sheets  must  be  hauled  over  on  the  old  tack,  flat  aback, 
to  give  her  sternboard.  This  last  is  a  dangerous  maneuver  in  a 
strong  breeze  and  rough  sea.  The  use  of  an  oar  at  any  time  with  a 
boat  under  sail  is  to  be  discouraged  as  being  lubberly. 

WEARING. 

98.  (i)  In  wearing,  the  tiller  is  put  up  and  the  mainsheet 
slacked  away  roundly.  The  boat  goes  off  before  the  wind,  the 
mainsail  is  either  gybed  or  taken  in  and  shifted  over  (preferably 
the  latter),  and  the  boat  is  hauled  up  on  the  new  tack,  losing 
more  or  less  ground  to  leeward,  according  to  circumstances.  The 
details  of  the  maneuver  may  vary  considerably  according  to  the 
conditions  of  wind  and  sea  and  the  peculiarities  of  the  boat  as  to 
rig  and  trim.     In  a  light  breeze,  the  mainsheet  is  slacked  away 


6o  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

roundly  until  the  wind  is  aft,  then  hauled  in  smartly  for  gybing 
and  eased  away  steadily  on  the  new  lee  quarter.  In  a  fresh 
breeze,  where  gybmg  would  be  dangerous,  the  mainsail  is  taken  in 
just  before  the  wind  comes  aft,  and  set  again  in  time  to  bring  her 
to  the  wind  on  the  new  tack. 

(2)  The  fore  and  jib  sheets  are  shifted  when  nearly  before  the 
wind.  As  she  comes  to  on  the  new  tack,  they  are  left  flowing  until 
hauled  aft  to  meet  her  by  the  wind. 


99.  (i)  A  boom  sail  is  **  gybed  "  when  it  is  allowed  to  swing 
from  one  side  to  the  other,  the  wind  being  aft  or  nearly  so,  and 
the  sail  full,  first  on  one  side  and  then  on  the  other.  This  may 
be  done  intentionally,  as  in  wearing  or  in  changing  course,  or  it 
may  come  unexpectedly  from  a  shift  of  wind  or  from  the  yaw- 
ing of  the  boat.  As  It  necessarily  involves  a  violent  swing  of  the 
sail,  it  puts  a  heavy  strain  upon  the  spars  and  fittings  and  causes 
the  boat  to  lurch  more  or  less  deeply  to  leeward.  Moreover,  the 
violent  sweep  of  the  boom  across  the  stern  endangers  everybody 
in  its  path. 

(2)  In  a  light  breeze,  these  dangers  are  perhaps  not  serious 
enough  to  justify  the  rule  that  a  mainsail  should  never  be  gybed, 
but  in  a  fresh  breeze  it  should  not  be  thought  of ;  and  the  fact 
that  it  is  often  done  by  experienced  boatmen  does  not  make  it 
any  more  seamanlike. 

(3)  When  a  necessary  change  of  course  in  a  fresh  breeze  will 
bring  a  shift  of  wind  from  one  quarter  to  the  other,  the  sail 
should  be  lowered  or  clewed  up  for  a  moment  before  putting  up 
the  tiller,  and  then  set  again  on  the  other  quarter.  If  this  can  not 
be  done  and  it  is  still  necessary  to  gybe,  the  peak  should  be 
aropped,  the  boone  hauled  in  slowly  and  eased  away  on  the  new 
rack. 

POWER  BOATS. 

SPECIAL  DUTIES  OF  COXSWAINS. 

100.  (i)  The  coxswain  of  a  power  boat  is  responsible  for  the 
whole  boat  and  for  the  discipline  and  obedience  to  regulations  of 
all  men  in  the  boat.' 

(2)  While  the  engineer  and  fireman,  so'  far  as  relate  to  their 
technical  duties,  remam  responsible  to  the  senior  engineer  officer 
for  the  proper  performance  of  these  duties,  they  are  nevertheless, 
in  general  matters,  entirely  under  the  orders  of  the  coxswain. 

(3)  The  engineer  of  the  boat,  in  technijcal  matters,  has  general 
charge  6f  the  boiler  and  engine  or  motor,  and  is  responsible  that 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  ( 

the  fireman  efficiently  performs  his  duties,  as  he  is  simply  the 
assistant  of  the  engineer. 

(4)  If  anything  is  required  about  the  engines,  such  as  coal, 
gasoline,  oil,  or  water,  or  if  any  repairs  are  required  which  neces- 
sitate temporarily  disabling  the  boat,  the  engineer  will  report  it 
to  the  coxswain,  who  will  report  to  the  officer  of  the  deck. 

(5)  In  overhauling  the  boat  while  in  the  cradles  the  same  rule 
prevails ;  while  the  engineer  will  attend  to  the  technical  details  of 
the  work  on  the  machinery,  any  outside  assistance  necessary,  not 
technical  in  nature,  should  be  obtained  by  the  coxswain,  if  neces- 
sary, by  applying  to  the  officer  of  the  deck. 

(6)  Orders  relating  to  getting  up  steam  are  given  to  the  cox- 
swain of  the  boat,  who  will  inform  the  engineer.  The  coxswain  Its 
responsible  that  all  reasonable  efforts  have  been  made  to  have 
steam  up  at  the  moment  ordered. 

(7)  The  coxswain  of  a  power  boat  should,  as  soon  as  possible 
after  being  assigned  to  that  duty,  make  a  st)ecial  study  of  his  boat 
with  a  view  to  getting  perfectly  familiar  with  her.  He  should 
learn  by  practice  the  turning  circle,  the  effect  of  the  screw  under 
different  conditions.  Also  the  amount  of  fuel,  water,  and  oil 
usually  carried,  the  maximum  speed  of  the  boat,  the  operating 
radius,  and  the  amount  of  extra  fuel,  water,  and  oil  required  to 
cover  a  given  distance  at  the  ordinary  speed. 

(8)  The  general  instructions  for  coxswains  of  boats  apply  with 
equal  force  to  the  coxswain  of  a  power  boat,  but  he  is  particularly 
warned,  owing  to  the  greater  power  of  his  boat,  and  the  greater 
injury  in  case  of  a  collision,  to  carefully  study  the  "  Rules  of  the 
Road." 

(9)  In  running  in  a  fog,  the  coxswain  should  remember  that 
owing  to  the  presence  of  the  machinery  in  the  boat,  more  especially 
in  a  steamer,  the  compass  will  be  affected.  Therefore,  to  get  a 
correct  compass  course,  it  must  not  be  taken  from  a  chart,  but 
should  be  observed  by  reading  the  compass  when  it  is  in  its  place 
for  steering  by  it,  and  with  the  boat  headed  in  the  desired  direc- 
tion. This  gives  the  proper  reading  of  the  compass  when  the  boat 
is  headed  on  the  desired  course.  Therefore,  on  his  very  first  trip 
in  and  out  from  a  landing  the  coxswain  should  always  use  his 
compass,  observe  and,  if  necessary,  record  the  compass  courses,  so 
that  he  could  make  the  trip  either  way  in  a  fog. 

(10)  Knowledge  of  the  effect  of  the  screw  on  the  steering  is 
most  essential  to  a  coxswain.  Generally  speaking,  the  right- 
handed  screw  when  going  ahead  tends  to  throw  the  stern  to  star- 
board;.  when  backing,  to  port.  In  other  words,  the  stern  is 
dragged  around  in  the  direction  the  propeller  is  turning,  and  this 


62  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

effect  is  noted  whether  the  boat  itself  has  begun  to  answer  the 
motion  of  the  propeller  or  not.  In  attempting  to  turn  a  power 
boat,  the  rudder  should  be  shifted  when  the  propeller  is  shifted 
instead  of  waiting  for  the  boat  to  lose  its  headway,  for  the  rud- 
der has  the  same  general  effect  on  the  steering  of  the  boat  when 
the  propeller  is  backing,  whether  the  boat  itself  is  moving  astern 
or  has  not  yet  lost  its  headway  and  is  still  forging  ahead.  This 
rule  is  not  strictly  applicable  to  all  boats,  but  it  is  a  good  general 

NOTES    ON    POWER    BOATS. 

101.  (i)  In  making  a  landing,  it  is  a  common  mistake  to  keep 
tfo  much  headway  on  and  to  rely  on  backing  the  engines  full  speed 
to  stop  the  boat.  This  is  poor  seamanship,  as  the  engines  may  fail 
to  back  promptly,  causing  a  collision  or  smash  up,  and  if  they  do 
back  hard,  it  throws  unnecessary  strain  on  them.  Therefore, 
make  landings  with  slo»w  speed. 

(2)  In  landmg  alongside  a  ship's  gangway  in  a  strong  current, 
do  not  let  the  tide  catch  your  boat  on  the  outboard  bow,  as  this 
might  sweep  her  underneath  the  gangway.  The  boat  line  from 
forward  should  in  all  cases  be  used,  the  boat  being  kept  off  a  little 
from  the  side  until  it  is  fast,  and  then  sheered  in  by  the  rudder. 
A  boat  may  lie  alongside  safely  in  a  strong  current  with  a  line 
from  the  inner  bow,  and  the  rudder  slightly  over  for  sheering  out. 

(3)  In  towing,  the  stern  of  the  towing  boat  should  be  kept  well 
down  by  shifting  weights  aft  if  necessary.  This  keeps  the  propeller 
well  immersed,  and  gives  it  a  good  hold  on  the  water. 

(4)  When  running  in  a  seaway,  speed  should  be  reduced  some- 
what not  only  to  avoid  shipping  seas  but  to  reduce  the  strain  on 
the  machinery  due  to  the  racing  of  the  screw.  In  running  into  a 
sea,  it  is  possible  by  careful  nursing  to  make  fair  speed,  watching 
the  seas  and  slowing  or  even  stopping  for  a  moment  as  heavy  ones 
are  seen  bearing  down  upon  the  boat.  If  the  man  who  is  running 
the  engine  has  sufficient  experience  to  regulate  the  speed  in  this 
way,  it  is  convenient  to  leave  this  to  him,  if  he  can  see  ahead.  If 
running  more  or  less  across  the  sea,  it  is  well  to  head  up 
momentarily  for  a  heavy  wave. 

102.  (i)  The  water  used  in  a  boiler  should  always  be  obtained 
from  the  ship,  as  this  is  always  distilled.  Fresh  water  from  shore 
often  contains  corrosive  ingredients  or  lime  salts,  and  should 
never  be  used  when  it  can  be  avoided.  Salt  water  should  never  be 
used,  and  the  water  in  the  feed  tank  should  be  frequently  tasted 
and  never  allowed  to  grow  brackish  through  leaky  connections. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

(2)  When  a  steamer  is  about  to  be  lowered,  the  fires  should  be 
started  promptly  and  steam  got  ready  to  try  the  engine  by  the  time 
the  boat  is  in  the  water.  As  soon  as  the  steamer  is  in  the  water,  if 
not  before,  the  feed  pump  or  pumps  must  be  worked  by  steam, 
and  the  engines  turned  back  and  forth,  and  the  whistle,  safety 
valve,  bell,  and  steering  gear  tried.  Failures  to  work  must  be 
immedately  remedied. 

is)  When  a  steamer  is  alongside  a  gangway,  never  permit  any 
firing.  Attention  to  the  fires  before  coming  alongside  will  prevent 
the  necessity  of  doing  this,  and  the  dirt  and  the  inconvenience  of 
having  thick,  black  smoke  over  the  ship  is  avoided.  For  the  same 
reason  the  use  of  the  steam  jet  is  to  be  avoided  when  alongside. 

(4)  Steamer  crews  are  generally  incHned  to  carry  too  little 
water  in  the  boiler ;  a  third  to  half  a  glass  should  be  the  rule. 

(5)  In  water-tube  boilers  the  fires  may  be  forced,  or  suddenly 
hauled,  or  put  out  with  a  bucket  of  water,  without  danger  of 
seriously  injuring  the  boiler,  but  this  should  only  be  done  when 
there  is  more  or  less  of  an  emergency. 

ARMED-BOAT  EXPEDITIONS. 

103.  (i)  There  shall  be  no  separate  organizations  or  routine 
drills  for  "  distant  service "  or  '*  cutting-out "  expeditions  of 
armed  detachments  in  boats.  The  landing-force  organization  shall 
be  utilized  in  all  cases  where  an  armed  force  is  needed.  Certain 
section  of  a  ship's  landing  force — infantry  or  artillery,  or  both — 
with  the  arms,  provisions,  boat  equipment,  etc.,  that  may  be  re- 
quired by  the  special  circumstances  of  the  service,  shall  be  desig- 
nated for  the  work  in  any  case. 

(2)  One  or  more  squads  of  a  section  may  be  retained  on  board 
ship  if  their  presence  is  not  necessary  for  the  service  for  which  the 
boat  is  being  equipped. 

(3)  The  necessary  number  of  men  shall  be  selected  from  the 
regular  special  details  of  the  landing  force — pioneers,  messmen, 
signalmen,  ambulance  and  ammunition  parties — to  accompany  the 
expedition.  These  men  may  be  distributed  in  the  boats  with  the 
main  body,  or  they  may  be  assigned  to  separate  boats',  as  occasion 
requires. 

(4)  It  would  be  quite  impossible  to  anticipate  and  provide  for 
every  emergency  of  service  in  boats.  Each  case  must  necessarily 
be  handled  as  a  separate  problem,  and  the  regulations  for  the 
organization,  equipment,  and  instruction  of  the  landing  force  and 
Its  various  units,  if  carefully  observed,  can  be  made  to  supply  the 
force — officers,  men,  and  staff — that  may  be  required  in  any  case. 


64  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

104.  (i)  When  great  haste  is  necessary,  the  combatant  part  of 
the  expedition,  or  a  portion  of  it,  shall  be  embarked  at  once,  with 
arms  and  ammunition,  emergency  rations  for  two  days,  stowed 
in  haversacks,  canteens  and  regular  boat  breakers  filled,  the  boat 
box  and  the  boat  equipment  enumerated  in  Articles  25,  28.  Re- 
serve ammunition,  extra  provisions,  and  special  equipment  shall  - 
follow  in  separate  boats.  The  "  firing  line,"  so  to  speak,  shall 
never  be  delayed,  in  an  emergency,  until  extra  provisions,  water 
breakers,  and  other  articles  are  hoisted  from  holes  and  store- 
rooms. The  fighting  force  must  not  be  hampered,  and  the  material 
and  supplies  for  its  maintenance  shall  be  supplied  and  forwarded 
without  undue  haste  or  confusion,  but  with  all  care  and  with 
every  attention  to  detail. 

(2)  Communications  between  the  expedition  and  the  ship,  by 
signal  or  otherwise,  shall  be  provided  for,  in  order  that  reserves 
of  men  and  material  may  be  supplied  and  forwarded,  if  necessary. 

105.  (i)  It  IS  evident  that  armed  boats  have  so  many  possible 
uses  that  their  complete  enumeration  would  be  difficult,  and  to 
provide  efficiency  for  all  such  cases  by  routine  drills  would  be  im- 
practicable. 

(2)  The  final  test  in  fitting  out  an  expedition  in  any  particular 
case  would  be :  "  Are  the  boats  and  the  crews  properly  equipped 
and  prepared  for  the  service  to  be  performed?" 

10().  (i)  The  method  of  landing  an  armed  force  is  fully  de- 
scribed in  the  Landing  Force  and  Small-Arm  Instructions,  United 
States  Navy. 

ABANDON  SHIP. 

107.  On  signal  for  abandon  ship  the  ship's  company  proceeds 
with  the  least  possible  delay,  to  stations  and  duties  outhned  in  the 
**  Ship  and  Gun  Drills  "  and  given  in  detail  in  the  ship's  Abandon 
Ship  Bill. 

108.  Equipment. — Every  boat  used  for  abandoning  ship  should 
have  the  following  equipment : 

(i)  The  complete  boat  equipment,  including  boat  compass,  tar- 
paulin, and  medical  box.  Arm  curtains  will  not  be  carried  unless 
required  by  special  circumstances. 

(2)  Provisions  and  water,  as  prescribed  in  article  2i7  (i)  and 
(2),  or  as  much  more  as  the  boat  will  carry  safely.  When  actually 
abandoning  ship,  if  time  permits  and  if  landing  is  probable,  a 
small  quantity  of  salt,  pepper,  coffee,  and  sugar  may  be  provided 
for  use  on  shore,  but  this  will  not  be  required  at  ordinary  drill. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  65 

(3)  At  least  two  rifles  and  a  supply  of  ammunition. 

(4)  Mess  gear  and  iron  kettle. 

(5)  If  possible,  a  sextant,  Nautical  Almanac,  Bowditch's  tables, 
chart,  paper,  and  pencil.  At  least  one  boat,  preferably  that  of  the 
senior  officer,  must  be  so  equipped. 

109.  At  least  two  officers  should  go  in  every  boat,  if  practicable, 
and  carry  service  belt,  revolver,  ammunition,  and  binoculars  if 
supplied. 

110.  Steamers. — Spars  and  sails  are  no  longer  provided  for 
steamers,  and  therefore  occasions  will  be  more  rare  in  which  it 
would  be  advisable  to  hoist  out  the  boilers.  If  abandoning  ship  at 
sea,  or  in  very  rough  weather,  it  would  be  well  to  relieve  the  boat 
of  that  weight  and  encumbrance  if  there  should  be  time ;  in 
smooth  water,  near  the  land,  the  engine  could  be  used  to  advantage, 
though  the  motor  boats  can  probably  do  all  the  towing  needed. 
If  the  boiler  is  to  remain  in  the  boat,  fuel  and  water  must  be 
provided. 

111.  Secure. — When  "Secure"  is  sounded,  boat  crews  will 
secure  their  boats,  and  return  supplies ;  and  divisions  will  fall  in 
at  quarters  for  muster.     Boat  officers  shall  report  "  Secure." 

112.  Notes. — (i)  The  boat  officer  should  see  that  all  men  sta- 
tioned in  his  boat  at  this  evolution  are  present  and  that  they  under- 
stand their  duties.  If  a  man  is  unavoidably  absent,  he  should  be 
notified,  after  the  drill,  of  his  station  and  duties. 

(2)  Boats  (except  dinghies)  should  have  not  less  than  12  inches 
freeboard  when  fully  manned  and  equipped.  Ten  inches  is  a  fair 
freeboard  for  the  dinghy  class. 

(3)  Junior  boats,  which  will  usually  not  be  able  to  obtain  sex- 
tants, Nautical  Almanacs,  etc.,  will  keep  near  senior  boats  which 
are  so  equipped,  after  they  abandon  ship. 

(4)  The  particular  station  of  each  man  in  a  boat  at  abandon 
ship  will  be  determined  by  the  boat  officer,  and  the  men  will  be 
carefully  drilled  to  take  their  stations  quickly,  quietly,  and  with- 
out crowding  or  confusion.  The  position  of  each  article  of  equip- 
ment must  also  be  carefully  specified,  and  men  stationed  to  stow 
articles  must  be  thoroughly  instructed  with  regard  to  the  stowage ; 
otherwise  there  will  always  be  confusion  of  the  personnel  and 
slovenly  stowage  of  the  equipment. 


CHAPTER  V. 
DETAIL  NOTES  ON  BOAT  DUTY. 

DUTIES  OF  A  BOAT  OFFICER. 

Note. — Owing  to  the  fact  that  many  boats  do  not  have  a  boat  officer,  the 
general  instructions  for  handling  boats  were  written  to  cover  the  cases  where 
a  coxswain  has  charge.  Boat  officers  will  also  be  governed  by  these  instructions, 
in  so  far  as  they  are  applicable.  The  instructions  under  articles  113-115  apply 
to  coxswains  in  the  absence  of  boat  officers. 

113.  (i)  When  ordered  to  take  charge  of  a  boat,  the  boat  officer 
shall  report  promptly  to  the  officer  of  the  deck,  dressed  in  the 
uniform  of  the  day  and  with  appropriate  side  arms. 

(2)  Sees  boat  lowered  and  manned,  or  manned  at  the  boom 
•and  dropped  down  to  the  gangway.  If  boat  was  lowered  for  this 
duty,  he  sees  boat  falls  hauled  taut. 

(3)  Sees  all  required  equipment  is  in  boat,  and  that  boat  gear  is 
in  good  order. 

(4)  Sees  crew  in  place  and  in  proper  uniform,  oars  up-and- 
down,  blades  trimmed  fore-and-aft,  coxswain  at  his  station. 

(5)  Reports  to  officer  of  the  deck  that  boat  is  alongside, 
manned,  and  ready  for  duty.  Receives  orders  and  makes  sure  that 
he  understands  them  perfectly  before  leaving  ship. 

114.  (i)  The  boat  officer  shall  at  all  times  require  that  the 
crew  preserve'  silence  and  pull  a  strong,  regular  stroke,  that  all 
rules  concerning  the  handling  and  management  of  boats,  whether 
under  sails  or  oars,  are  carried  out,  that  all  boat  salutes  are 
promptly  made  or  returned,  and  that  prescribed  rules  for  boat 
etiquette  are  strictly  observed. 

(2)  In  going  alongside  a  man-of-war,  use  the  port  side,  unless 
the  boat  officer  is  a  commissioned  officer,  and  except  where  there 
are  commissioned  officers  or  their  guests  in  the  boat  or  when  only 
the  starboard  ladder  is  shipped.  In  all  cases,  however,  the  lee 
gangway  should  be  used  in  heavy  weather.  Salute  the  colors,  if 
hoisted,  on  stepping  over  the  gangway  and  report  to  the  officer  of 
the  deck. 

(3)  In  ordinary  weather,  as  a  general  rule,  as  soon  as  the  boat 
officer  steps  out  of  his  boat  at  the  gangway,  he  should  order  the 
coxswain  to  shove  off  and  lie  off  the  quarter.  If,  however,  he 
simply  has  a  brief  report  to  make  or  message  to  deliver  to  the 
officer  of  the  deck,  he  may  leave  his  boat  at  the  gangway  (pro- 

66 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  67 

vided  other  boats  are  not  approaching),  make  his  report^  ask  per- 
mission to  shove  off,  and  leave  immediately. 

(4)  If  there  is  a  strong  tideway,  or  if  he  expects  to  be  detained 
on  board  for  some  time,  he  should  ask  permission  for  his  boat  to 
haul  out  to  the  boom ;  and  if  the  delay  is  likely  to  be  long  enough 
to  make  it  worth  while,  he  should  ask  permission  for  his  crew  to 
come  on  board — a  privilege  that  is  usually  much  appreciated  by 
the  men,  who  thus  have  an  opportunity  to  see  old  shipmates,  take 
a  smoke,  etc. 

(5)  In  this  connection,  the  attention  of  young  officers  is  invited 
to  the  importance  of  treating  their  men  with  all  due  and  proper 
consideration.  If  boat  officers  thoughtlesslv  leave  their  boat  crews 
lying  off  the  quarter  in  a  tideway,  or  in  excessively  hot  or  cold 
weather,  and  otherwise  subject  them  to  unnecessary  exposure  or 
discomfort,  it  can  not  but  react  against  the  interests  of  discipline 
and  efficiency. 

(6)  When  ready  to  leave  a  visited  ship,  the  boat  officer  should 
request  the  officer  of  the  deck  to  have  his  boat  manned,  or  called 
alongside,  but  he  should  in  no  case  give  the  orders  himself,  unless 
specially  invited  to  do  so — as  is  sometimes  done  when  the  officer 
of  the  deck  is  much  occupied. 

(7)  When  the  boat  officer  must  absent  himself  from  his  boat, 
as,  for  example,  to  call  upon  a  consul,  or  do  other  duty  on  shore, 
he  should  give  his  coxswain  positive  orders  concerning  the  duties 
to  be  performed  during  his  absence. 

(8)  On  his  return  to  his  ship,  the  boat  officer  shall  report  the 
completion  of  his  duty  to  the  officer  of  the  deck.  If  the  boat  is  no 
longer  required,  he  will  see  that  it  shoves  off  and  pulls  out  to  the 
boom ;  or  if  it  is  to  be  hoisted,  he  will  see  the  necessary  prepara- 
tions made  and  report  when  the  boat  is  ready,  unless  the  officer 
of  the  deck  excuses  him  from  this  duty. 

(9)  A  boat  officer  has  general  charge  of  the  boat,  but  when 
carrying  commissioned  officers,  the  senior  line  officer  has  authority 
to  give  directions,  and  if  need  be  to  take  command ;  since  by  Navy 
Regulations  the  senior  line  officer  in  a  boat  is  responsible  for  its 
management  and  safety  under  all  circumstances. 

(10)  When  ordered  on  boat  duty  the  boat  officer  should  re- 
member the  men's  meal  hours,  and,  if  there  is  a  likelihood  of  the 
boat  not  returning  in  time,  he  should- ask  the  officer  of  the  deck  to 
have  their  meals  saved.  "" 

(11)  Boarding  duty. — A  frequent  duty  of  a  boat  officer  is  board- 
ing. Every  ship  keeps  a  boarding  book,  which  should  always  be 
carried  on  boarding  duty.  In  this  book  is  entered  the  following 
routine  information :  Name  of  vessel,  nationality,  name  of  captain 
(if  man-of-war.  also  obtain  rank   of  captain  or  senior  officer  of 


68  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

grGJp  of  ships)  ;  where  f rom ;  kind  of  passage;  special  incidents 
of  voyage ;  men-of-war  sighted ;  probable  date  of  departure,  and 
where  bound ;  besides  this,  any  other  information  which  might  be 
of  value  or  interest.  Frequently  information  as  to  date  of  com- 
mission of  the  senior  officer,  length  of  service  on  station,  etc.,  is 
of  value  in  determining  the  proper  interchange  of  courtesies ;  in 
such  cases  this  information  should  be  obtained.  The  boarding 
book  may  be  taken  on  board  a  merchant  steamer  and  filled  out, 
but  when  boarding  a  foreign  man-of-war  the  boarding  book 
should  be  left  in  the  boat  out  of  sight,  and  the  information  entered 
after  leaving  the  ship.  Ordinary  boarding  calls  on  foreign  men- 
of-war  are  usually  of  a  purely  courteous  nature ;  therefore,  unless 
the  boat  officer  has  a  special  message  for  the  captain  of  the  vessel, 
he  should  inform  the  officer  of  the  deck  that  he  was  sent  to  present 
the  compliments  of  his  commanding  officer  and  to  offer  his 
services.  The  officer  of  the  deck  of  the  boarded  vessel  will  then 
be  guided  by  his  own  instructions  as  to  whether  the ,  boarding 
officer  shall  see  the  captain  or  not.  If  he  states  that  the  captain 
requests  to  be  excused,  the  boat  officer  obtains  the  information 
which  is  desired,  and  requests  permission  to  leave  the  ship. 

(12)  If  doing  guard  duty,  or  if  sent  on  board  the  senior  ship,  a 
notebook  is  to  be  carried  to  record  verbal  orders  which  the  boat 
officer  may  receive.  This  notebook  shall  be  carried  on  board  the 
senior  ship  and  the  orders  recorded  immediately  they  are  received. 

115.  In  delivering  a  message,  always  first  present  the  compli- 
ments of  the  officer  from  whom  the  message  comes,  then  deliver 
the  message. 

DUTIES  OF  COXSWAIN. 

116.  (i)  The  coxswain  of  a  boat  should  be  perfectly  familiar 
with  everything  relating  to  the  care  and  handling  of  his  boat  and 
be  competent  to  instruct  his  crew  in  all  details  of  general  service 
or  drill. 

(2)  He  is  responsible  to  the  officer  in  charge  of  the  boat  for  its 
cleanliness  and  readiness  for  service,  and  he  should  constantly 
keep  himself  informed  as  to  the  condition  and  completeness  of  the 
boat  equipments,  reporting  all  deficiencies  to  the  boat  officer. 

is]  He  is  responsible  for  the  appearance  and  behavior  of  his 
boat  crew  and  that  they  always  pull  properly  and  conduct  them- 
selves in  a  seamanlike  manner. 

(4)  Coxswains  and  boat  crews  should  remember  that  they  rep- 
resent their  ship,  and  the^  should  therefore  be  taught  to  take  a 
pride  in  their  own  appearance  and  in  that  of  their  boats.  The 
efficiency  and  smartness  of  a  ship's  boats  and  boat  crews  generally 
reflect  most  clearly  the  tone  of  the  ship.    . 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  69 

(5)  The  coxswain  is  to  be  careful  that  his  boat  crew  is  always 
properly  dressed,  paying  particular  attention  to  the  following 
points : 

(a)  Hats  and  caps  properly  worn  with  ship's  name  square  to 
the  front,  and  no  hair  showing  on  the  forehead  below  the  hat  or 
cap. 

(b)  That  the  brims  of  white  hats  are  never  turned  down  unless 
necessary  to  shield  the  eyes  from  prolonged  exposure  to  the  sun. 

'(c)  That  grommets  are  always  worn  in  blue  caps,  except  in 
windy  weather,  when  he  will  direct  that  all  grommets  be  removed. 

(d)  That  trousers  are  never  turned  up,  except  in  bad  weather. 

(e)  That  the  men  of  the  boat  crew  are  dressed  alike  as  regards 
oilskins,  but  oilskins  are  not  to  be  worn  unless  it  is  actually  rain- 
ing. 

(/)  That  all  members  of  the  crew  are  in  uniform  in  regard  to 
foot-gear;  that  is,  either  that  they  all  wear  shoes  or  all  go  bare- 
footed. 

(g)  That  in  cold  weather  the  men  have  their  overcoats  at 
hand. 

(6)  Owing  to  the  constant  use  of  power  boats  in  port,  and  their 
consequent  greater  liability  to  become  soiled,  coxswains  must 
devote  particular  attention  to  the  neat  and  shipshape  appearance 
of  their  boat  and  boat  crew.  . 

(7)  The  coxswain  of  a  power  boat  is  especially  responsible 
that  the  crew  and  enlisted  passengers  sit  down  in  their  proper 
places,  that  they  do  nit  sit  on  the  gunwale,  and  that  the  men  out- 
side the  canopy  conduct  themselves  in  a  seamanlike  and  proper 
manner  in  extending  salutes. 

(8)  Coxswains  of  power  boats  shall  devote  particular  attention 
to  the  proper  handling  of  the  canopy  curtains.  When  curtains  are 
not  required,  they  will  have  them  neatly  rolled  and  stopped  up,  and 
when  in  use  they  will  be  neatly  stopped  down  to  the  washboard. 
It  is  not  shipshape  to  stop  down  one  corner  of  a  side  curtain,  but 
when  running  into  a  head  sea,  the  coxswain  may  frequently  find 
it  necessary  to  lower  the  curtain  forward,  while  it  remains  stopped 
up  along  the  sides.  Similarly  it  is  frequently  necessary  to  haul 
down  the  curtains  on  one  side  and  leave  them  furled  on  the  other. 
Under  all  circumstances,  when  the  curtains  are  in  use  they  must 
be  neatly  stopped  down,  as  nothing  is  more  slovenly  than  canopy 
curtains  hanging  loosely  and  flapping  to  the  wind. 

(9)  Coxswains  of  power  boats  must  see  that  towels  or  clothmg 
are  never  hanging  in  the  boat  when  she  is  called  away  for  service. 

(10)  Coxswains  of  power  boats  will  require  the  stern  man  to 
devote  particular  attention  to  the  appearance  of  the  stern  sheets 
of  the  boat.  Cushion  covers  shall  be  kept  neat  and  clean,  the 
lantern  filled,  trimmed,  polished,  and  the  globe  cleaned  so  that  it 


70  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

will  give  a  bright  light.  The  boat  flag,  when  not  in  use,  is  to  be 
kept  neatly  rolled  on  its  flagstaff  and  triced  up  overhead,  not  hang- 
ing loosely  from  flagstaff,  where  it  presents  a  slovenly  appearance 
and  interferes  with  passengers.  When  the  boat  is  called  awav 
for  the  use  of  commissioned  officers,  the  stern  man  will  spread 
the  boat  cloth  neatly  in  the  stern  sheets  of  the  boat,  and  see  the 
foot  cloths,  or  ladder  (if  used),  on  the  proper  side  of  the  boat. 

(ii)  When  boats  are  called  away,  coxswains  will  go  in  the  boat 
over  the  boom,  will  see  that  the  crew  is  in  the  boat  and  every- 
thing is  ready,  and  then  drop  down  to  the  gangway.  The  cox- 
swain then  reports  to  the  officer  of  the  deck,  or  the  boat  ofiicer,  that 
the  boat  is  at  the  gangway  ready  for  service,  and  in  the  absence  of 
a  boat  officer,  receives  his  orders,  which  he  must  make  sure  that  he 
clearly  understands. 

(12)  On  his  return  to  the  ship  he  will  report  that  orders  have 
been  complied  with.  He  will  also  report  anything  amiss  that  is 
visible  from  outside  the  ship,  such  as  windsails  which  require 
trimming,  ports  to  be  squared,  anything  hanging  over  the  side,  or 
clothes  being  in  improper  places.  He  will  see  his  boat  properly 
hauled  out  to  the  boom. 

(13)  The  crew  shall  not  be  allowed  to  leave  the  boats  on  shore 
without  proper  authority.  If  necessary  for  any  member  to  leave 
the  boat  temporarily,  the  coxswain  will  report  the  fact  to  the 
officer  of  the  deck  immediately  on  his  return  to  the  ship. 

(14)  The  coxswain  shall  never  permit  smoking  in  his  boat 
during  daylight,  except  when  on  detached  service,  surveying  duty, 
or  on  hunting  or  fishing  expeditions.  This  rule  forbids  smoking 
in  boats  which  are  permitted  to  go  out  for  pleasure  sailing,  except 
when  special  permission  is  obtained  before  leaving  the  ship ;  but 
this  should  be  granted  only  in  unfrequented  ports. 

(15)  When  boats  are  ordered  to  moor,  they  are  to  be  reported 
"  moored  "  by  the  coxswain  to  the  officer  of  the  deck. 

CARE  AND  CLEANING  OF  BOATS. 

117.  (i)  The  coxswain  is  responsible  that  his  boat  and  all  that 
belongs  to  it  is  kept  in  good  order.  When  anything  is  lost  or  any 
repairs  are  required,  he  is  to  report  the  fact  to  his  boat  officer.  He 
is  responsible  that  his  boat  davits  are  clean,  and  is  to  report  if  any 
gear  connected  with  them  is  not  in  good  order. 

(2)  Care  is  necessary  to  see  that  the  oars  are  properly  cop- 
pered, leathered,  and  marked,  that  they  are  of  the  correct  length, 
and  are  assigned  to  their  proper  thwarts.  Care  should  be  taken 
at  all  times  with  the  blades  of  the  oars,  as  they  are  easily  split  or 
broken  by  rough  handling  or  by  treading  on  them. 


The  Dfxk  and  Boat  Book.  71 

(3)  Great  care  should  be  observed  to  maintain  an  efficient  set 
of  oars,  having  them  neither  too  heavy  nor  too  light.  Ensigns, 
pennants,  staves,  and  trucks  demand  careful  attention ;  also  trail- 
ing lines,  rowlock  lanyards,  boat  hooks,  and  the  boat  equipment. 

(4)  Coxswains  are  always  personally  to  superintend  when  their 
boats  are  being  lowered,  hoisted,  or  moored. 

(5)  Immediately  that  a  boat  is  hoisted,  the  coxswain  is  to  see 
her  squared  by  the  falls,  dried  out.  boat  gear  neatly  stowed,  the 
outside  cleared  of. all  marks,  the  plug  out  (except  in  lifeboats  a^ 
sea),  and  secured  close  to  the  plug  hole  with  a  lanyard.  When 
the  ship  is  kt  sea,  lifeboats  will  habitually  keep  their  boat  plugs  in. 

MISCELLANEOUS  INSTRUCTIONS. 

118.  (i)  Ship*s  boats  shall  always  keep  a  sharp  lookout  for  sig- 
nals, both  from  their  own  and  from  the  senior  officer's  ship. 

(2)  Boat  ensigns  are  not  to  be  used  for  boats  to  which  they  do 
not  belong,  and  the  insignia  on  the  head  of  the  pennant  staff  and 
flagstaff  shall  be  as  prescribed  for  the  rank  of  the  officer  to  which 
it  belongs.  The  insignia  on  the  head  of  the  pennant  staff  and 
flagstaff  are  identical  and  are  as  follows : 

"  (a)   Flag  officer Gilt  lance  head. 

(b)  Captain Gilt  ball. 

(c)  Commander Gilt  star. 

(d)  Lower  rank Flat  truck. 

(3)  Boat  ensigns  are  half-masted  whenever  the  vessel  to  which 
the  boat  belongs  half-masts  her  colors.  If  absent  out  of  sight  of 
the  ship,  and  men-of-war  in  vicinity  have  colors  half-masted,  it 
is  proper  to  follow  their  movements. 

(4)  Except  when  the  ship  is  full  dressed,  the  ensign  is  never  to 
be  left  flying  in  boats  made  fast  astern  or  at  the  boom. 

(5)  A  boat  under  sail  is  never  to  fly  its  ensign  at  a  staff,  but  the 
ensign  shall  be  flown  from  the  peak,  or  head  of  the  mainsail. 

(6)  As  a  general  rule,  boats  pulling  less  than  four  oars  are  not 
to  fly  boat  ensigns. 

(7)  Boats  are  not  to  lie  alongside  a  gangway  or  landing  place, 
but  are  to  lie  off  while  waiting.  In  case  a  long  wait  is  probable, 
or  in  bad  weather,  or  on  occasions  at  night,  permission  may  be 
asked  to  make  fast  to  the  boom,  also  for  the  crew  to  come  on 
board. 

(8)  Small  gear  should  not  be  left  in  boats  which  remain  at  the 
boom  after  sunset,  as  otherwise  it  may  be  stolen  by  passing  shore 
boats. 


72  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

(9)  When  fresh  provisions  are  being  carried  in  a  boat,  they 
should  always  be  covered  with  a  tarpaulin. 

(10)  When  a  visiting  party  goes  alongside,  the  petty  officer  in 
charge  thereof  shall  go  on  board  and  obtain  permission  before 
allowing  any  of  the  visiting  party  to  leave  the  boat.  If  permission 
is  granted,  he  allows  the  party  .to  come  on  board,  each  one  saluting 
if  colors  are  hoisted,  as  he  crosses  the  gangway.  If  the  boat  is  to 
wait,  it  shoves  ofif  and  lies  off  the  quarter,  as  above  mentioned, 
unless  the  officer  of  the  deck  gives  permission  for  it  to  haul  out 
to  boom.  The  regular  crew  will  remain  in  the  boat  unless  the 
officer  of  the  deck  grants  permission  for  it  to  come  on  board. 

BOAT  KEEPERS. 

119.  (i)  Boatkeepers  are  detailed  by  the  coxswain  of  the  boat, 
usually  by  thwarts  in  rotation,  two  men  being  assigned  for  one 
d^y,  in  order  that  they  may  relieve  each  other. 

(2)  Both  boat  keepers  of  a  running  boat  clean  her  out  during 
the  morning  watch.  Boats  must  be  in  all  respects  ready  for  use 
by  8  a.  m. 

(3)  The  boat  keeper  of  the  forenoon  watch  goes  into  his  boat 
(when  at  boom)  at  8  a.  m.,  drefBed  in  the  uniform  of  the  day. 

(4)  One  of  the  boat  keepers  is  always  to  be  in  his  boat  vhen 
she  is  at  the  boom,  while  the  ship's  colors  are  hoisted,  unless  or- 
dered by  the  officer  of  the  deck  to  come  on  board  on  account  of 
bad  weather.  If  ordered  in  on  this  account,  they  will  remain  on 
deck  in  sight  of  their  boats,  and  watch  and  tend  them  from  that 
position. 

(5)  They  should  be  careful  that  the  oars  and  other  gear  in 
their  boats  are  always  neatly  placed  and  that  the  awning  is  prop- 
erly spread.  They  shall  wipe  out  their  boats  and  touch  up  the 
bright  work  as  often  as  necessary.  They  shall,  if  necessary,  haul 
their  boat  up  to  the  boom  in  order  to  clear  boats  coming  along- 
side the  gangway. 

(6)  When  not  otherwise  engaged,  boat  keepers  shall  always  sit 
up  properly  in  their  boats,  and  shall  never  lounge  or  read. 

(7)  When  boat  awnings  are  not  spread  they  are  to  stand  up 
and  salute  all  officers  who  pass  their  boats,  or-  who  come  along- 
side, or  leave  the  gangway. 

(8)  If  awnings  are  spread,  they  shall  sit  erect  and  salute. 

(9)  When  more  than  one  boat  is  at  the  boom,  boat  keepers  shall 
salute  together. 

(10)  At  morning  or  evening  colors,  boat  keepers  stand  facing 
the  ship's  colors  and  salute  as  if  on  deck.  If  boat  awnings  are 
spread,  they  will  be  furled  at  the  first  call  in  the  evening. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  73 

(11)  The  rules  regarding  salutes  extended  by  boat  keepers 
apply  to  all  men  in  boats  at  the  boom  or  riding  astern.  All  men 
in  such  boats  salute  together. 

NOTES  ON  MANAGEMENT  AND  HANDLING  OF  BOATS. 

120.  (i)  Boat  crews  are  always  to  man  their  boats  over  the 
boom,  and  all  of  the  crew  should  be  in  the  boat  in  about  one 
minute  after  the  pipe  or  call.  The  crews  of  running  boats  should 
remain  on  deck  near  lower  boom,  waiting  for  a  call.  A  boat 
should  never  require  longer  than  three  minutes  after  being  called 
away  before  reporting  ready  to  shove  off  from  the  gangway. 

(2)  Boat  crews  are  to  pull  a  smart,  steady  stroke  at  all  times. 
The  first  part  o  the  stroke  is  to  be  pulled  with  straight  back  and 
arms,  keeping  eyes  always  in  the  boat,  body  to  move  directly  to 
the  front  and  rear.     Always  use  the  back  in  pulling. 

(3)  When  laying  on  oars,  they  must  be  horizontal,  with  blades 
feathered  and  the  boat  crew  sitting  upright  with  both  hands  on 
the  handle  of  the  oar.  Lounging  on  the  oars  must  not  be  per- 
mitted. 

(4)  When  oars  are  tossed,  they  must  be  held  vertically,  with 
blades  in  fore-and-aft  plane,  handles  of  oars  on  bottom  boards, 
the  wrist  of  the  inboard  hand  resting  on  thigh,  outboard  hand 
grasping  loom  at  height  of  chin,  crew  sitting  upright. 

(5)  In  tossing  after  the  command  "Way  enough"  oars  are 
tossed  to  an  angle  of  45°  and  then  carefully  and  quietly  boated. 

(6)  The  practice  of  atting  close  across  the  bow  or  stern  of  a 
ship,  under  lower  booms  or  around  points  of  land,  is  to  be  avoided, 

(7)  No  one  except  the  coxswain  and  boat  officer  is  ever  to  be 
permitted  to  sit  abaft  the  backboard. 

(8)  When  under  sail: 

(a)  Never  hesitate  to  reef  in  good  time. 

(b)  Always  see  sails  well  set  and  trimmed  according  to  the 
direction  of  the  wind. 

(c)  See  that  sheets  are  never  belayed. 

(d)  See  that  crew  is  properly  stationed  for  making  and  short- 
ening sail,  reefing  and  tacking. 

(e)  Trim  the  boat  by  shifting  crew  or  ballast,  as  required. 

(/)  Require  crew  to  sit  on  thwarts.  In  making  sail  no  one 
will  stand  up,  except  when  absolutely  necessary,  and  even  then 
only  on  bottom  boards  of  the  boat. 

(g)  Remember  that  a  loaded  boat  carries  more  way  than  an 
empty  one. 

(h)  In  coming  alongside,  allow  plenty  of  room  for  rounding  to  ; 
the  mast  should  be  unstepped  immediately  the  sail  is  lowered.    If 


74  The  "Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

for  any  reason  the  boat  is  likely  not  to  come  alongside  satisfac- 
torily, it  is  seamanlike  to  tack  or  wear  and  try  again. 

(9)  Boats  with  full  crews  shall  always  pull  out  from  gangway 
to  boom.  They  shall  never  haul  out  by  the  grabrope  when  there 
are  more  than  three  men  besides  the  coxswain  in  the  boat. 

(\o)  Boats  on  ordinary  service  shall,  when  the  weather  is  not 
inclement,  use  sail  in  all  cases  where  it  will  not  cause  delay  in 
making  their  trip. 

(11)  Boatlines  should  be  hove  to  the  bowman  whenever  a  boat 
comes  alongside  in  a  strong  tideway,  or  when  a  heavy  sea  is  run- 
ning, in  order  to  assist  in  holding  the  boat  in  place. 

ABBREVIATED  RULES  FOR  COXSWAINS. 

121.  (I )  Always: 

(a)  See  required  equipment  in  boat. 

(b)  See  key  to  boat  box  in  boat  before  leaving  the  ship. 

(c)  See  boat  and  boat  gear  clean  and  shipshape. 

(d)  See  crew  in  uniform. 

(e)  See  that  oarsmen  use  oars  assigned  their  thwarts. 
(/)  Require  crew  to  maintain  silence  in  boat. 

(g)  Rise  and  salute  superior  officer  when  he  enters  or  leaves 
boat. 

(h)  See  that  enlisted  men  who  are  passengers  in  stern  sheets 
rise  and  salute  commissioned  officers  when  they  enter  boat. 

(0  In  getting  up,  tossing,  boating  oars,  etc.,  see  that  men  handle 
oars  smartly  with  arm  muscles,  keeping  body  as  erect  as  possible. 

(;)  Always  give  commands  in  a  clear,  sharp,  and  distinct  voice. 

(k)  Give  preparatory  commands,  when  they  are  necessary  to 
prevent  taking  the  crew  by  surprise. 

(/)  Give  commands  at  proper  period  of  stroke — that  is,  when 
the  blade  is  in  the  water  near  the  beginning  of  the  stroke. 

(m)  Require  crew  to  pull  a  strong,  regular  stroke,  using  the 
back. 

(«)  Require  crew  to  feather  their  blades. 

(o)  When  laying  on  oars,  see  that  crews  sit  upright,  withjhands 
on  oar  handles,  blades  trimmed  horizontal.  ' 

(/>)   Keep  boat  bows-on  to  a  heavy  sea. 

(q)  Watch  the  ship  for  signals. 

(r)   Obey  boat  recall  as  soon  as  made  out. 

(s)  See  fenders  over  the  side  when  coming  alongside  a  gang- 
way or  landing. 

(/)   See  sheets  tended  while  under  sail,  never  belayed. 

(w)  See  sails  well  set  and  trimmed. 

(v)  Reef  in  time. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  75 

(w)  See  that  every  duty  in  a  boat  is  done  in  a  sharp,  quick,  sea- 
manlike manner. 

(.r)  Correct  every  infraction  of  regulations  the  moment  it 
occurs. 

(3;)   In  hoisting  the  boat,  hook  the  forward  fall  first. 

(2)  Report,  immediately  on  return  to  the  ship,  any  damage  to 
boat  or  loss  of  boat  gear  or  equipment,  and  circumstances  attend- 
ing same. 

(2)  Never: 

(a)  Belay  a  sheet  while  sailing. 

(b)  Attempt  to  gybe  a  main  boom  in  a  fresh  breeze. 

(c)  Stow  away  boat  flag  when  wet;  colors  will  run. 

(d)  Unhook  forward  fall  first  in  lowering. 

(e)  Have  after  fall  hooked  when  forward  one  is  unhooked. 
(/)   Carry  heavy  weights  in  extreme  ends  of  boat. 

(g)  Go  over  a  ship's  after  gangway,  to  or  from  a  boat,  when 
colors  are  hoisted,  without  saluting. 

(h)  Allow  talking  in  a  pulling  boat  while  under  way. 

(i)  Allow  men  to  leave  boat  at  landing  without  proper  per- 
mission. 

(j)  Lie  alongside  shore  landing  longer  than  is  required  to  land. 

(k)   Pass  a  senior  boat  without  permission. 

( / )   Try  to  steer  in  a  heavy  seaway  without  a  steering  oar. 

(m)  Try  to  land  through  surf,  unless  expert  in  doing  so,  unless 
absolutely  necessary. 

(w)  Leave  boat  after  it, is  capsized,  until  rescued. 

(0)   Permit  the  crew  to  lounge  when  laying  on  oars. 

(p)   Permit  any  member  of  the  crew  to  stand  on  thwarts. 

(q)  Permit  any  member  of  crew  to  climb  a  mast.  Unstep  if 
necessary. 

(r)   Permit  towels  or  clothing  to  be  hung  up  in  a  duty  boat. 

(s)  Jamb  a  tiller  down  too  suddenly  or  too  far. 


CHAPTER  VI. 
BOAT  SALUTES  AND  BOAT  ETIQUETTE. 

122.  Salutes  shall  be  exchanged  between  boats  meeting  or 
passing  each  other,  as  indicated  in  the  table  on  the  following  page. 
The  junior  shall  always  salute  first,  and  the  senior  shall  return  the 
salute  with  the  hand. 

123.  (i)  In  boats  fitted  with  swivel  rowlocks  which  are  so 
curved  as  to  render  tossing  impracticable,  oars  shall  be  trailed  in 
all  cases,  instead  of  being  tossed.  Such  boats  shall  always  have 
the  oars  secured  by  trailing  lines, 

(2)  In  power  boats,  engines  are  to  be  stopped  in  all  cases  in 
which  pulling  boats  toss,  trail,  or  lay  on  oars. 

(3)  In  laden  boats,  towing  boats,  or  boats  under  sail,  make  the 
hand  salute  only  on  all  occasions. 

(4)  Officers  not  having  their  distinctive  flag  or  pennant  flying 
will  receive  the  hand  salute  only,  whethe'r  they  are  in  uniform  or 
civilians'  clothes. 

124.  (i)  Coxswains  in  charge  of  boats  rise  and  salute  when 
officers  enter  or  leave  their  boats ;  also  when  their  boats  are  salut- 
ing commissioned  officefS  in  other  boats  or  returning  a  salute  from 
them ;  but  when  steering  a  loaded  or  towing  boat,  or  a  boat  under 
sail,  they  shall  not  rise,  but  shall  salute  with  the  hand  only. 

(2)  Enlisted  men  who  are  passengers  in  the  stern  sheets  of  a 
boat  shall  always  rise  and  salute  when  a  commissioned  officer 
enters  or  leaves  the  boat. 

(3)  Officers  in  a  boat  shall  rise  and  salute  commanding  officers 
or  flag  officers  when  they  enter  or  leave  a  boat. 

(4)  Juniors  always  get  into  a  boat  ahead  of,  and  leave  it  after, 
their  seniors,  unless  the  senior  officer  in  the  boat  gives  orders  to 
the  contrary. 

(5)  As  a  general  rule  the  seniors  take  the  seats  farthest  aft; 
juniors  shall  leave  such  seats  for  their  seniors. 

125.  (i)  At  morning  or  evening  colors  boats  passing  near  a 
United  States  naval  vessel,  or  when  lying  off  a  foreign  man  of  war, 
shall  salute  as  follows : 

(2)^Pulling  boats  by  laying  on  oars  and  power  boats  by  stopping 
engines.  Coxswains  of  the  boats,  shall  stand  and  salute  and  mem- 
bers of  a  power  boat's  crew  outside  of  the  canopy  shall  stand  fac- 
ing toward  the  colors  and  salute  when  the  flag  reaches  truck  or 
taffrail. 
76 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


n 


Junior    salutes 
with  hand. 

....do 

Salutes    with 
hand. 

a; 

3 

1 

O 

o 

o 

C  o 
o 

;-. 

6 

i 

3 

C 

Salutes  with   hand 

Junior    salutes     with 
hand. 

Stands      and      salutes 
with  hand. 

g 

a; 

o 
u 
o 

5fi^t& 

6  2°* 
o  >.t; 

Junior    salutes    with 
hand. 

When  meeting  a  senior 
commanding  officer, 
or  immediate  com- 
manding officer,  stops 
engine,  lays  on  oars, 
and  salutes  with  hand. 

Stops  engine,  lays  on 
oars  and  salutes  with 
hand. 

Stops  engine,  lays  on 
oars,  and  salutes  with 
hand. 

Saltites    with    hand 

g«^ 

in 

o 
3 

01 

5J 

Junior      salutes      with 

hand. 
Stops    engine,    lays    on 

oars,  and  salutes  with 

hand. 

Stops    engine,    lays    on 
oars,  and  salutes  with 
hand. 

Stops  engine,  tosses  or 
trails  oars,  and  sa- 
lutes with  hand. 

Stops  engine,  tosses  or 
trails  oars,  and  sa- 
lutes with  hand. 

*"  to"*^ 
W  Jh  CO 

CO 

X, 

c 

4J 

"c 

u 

c 
C 

rti 

5  3 

Flag  or  general  officer.. 

Commanding  officer 
above  rank  of  lieuten- 
ant (with  pennant  fly- 
ing). 

Other  naval  officer  be- 
low flag  rank  and 
above  rank  of  lieu- 
tenant, and  marine 
officers  of  correspond- 
ing rank. 

Other  commissioned  offi- 

u           X 
o         c 

c 

.     .2*(u 

S      c 

-dtS.S 

1)  O  rt 

78  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

126.  (i)  When  a  power  boat  salutes  another  boat  in  passing, 
or  when  it  passes  a  ship  that  parades  a  guard  or  otherwise  salutes 
an  officer  in  the  boat,  the  members  of  the  crew  outside  the  canopy 
shall  stand  at  attention,  facing  the  boat  or  vessel. 

(2)  Similarly,  if  the  boat  is  carrying  an  officer  for  whom  a 
salute  is  being  fired,  men  outside  the  canopy  shall  stand  at  atten- 
tion, facing  the  saluting  ship.  The  engines  are  stopped  at  the  first 
gun,  and  the  boat  headed  up  parallel  to  the  saluting  ship. 

127.(i)  Boatkeepers  and  all  other  men  in  boats  that  are  not 
under  Wciy  and  not  carrying  an  officer,  i.  e.,  at  the  booms  or  at  a 
landing,  shall,  when  boat  awnings  are  not  spread,  stand  and  salute 
when  an  officer  comes  alongside,  leaves  the  side,  or  passes  near 
them,  and  shall  remain  standing  until  the  boat  passes  or  reaches 
the  ship's  side.  If  boat  awnings  are  spread,  they  shall  sit  at  atten- 
tion, article  129  (i),  and  salute  with  the  hand  without  rising. 

(2)  Men  working  on  the  ship's  side  do  not  salute,  but  continue 
their  work,  except  when  the  bugle  sounds  the  call  "  Attention." 

128.  (i)  Salutes  shall  be  extended  to  foreign  military  or  naval 
officers,  or  officers  of  our  own  Army,  Marine  Corps,  Naval  Militia, 
or  Revenue-Cutter  Service,  in  the  same  manner  as  to  United  States 
naval  officers  of  corresponding  rank.  This  rule  applies  alike  afloat 
and  ashore. 

(2)  No  junior  shall  ever  pass  a  senior  in  a  boat  going  in  the 
same  direction  without  first  obtaining  permission  to  do  so. 

129.  (i)  The  position  of  attention  in  a  boat  is  sitting  erect  on 
thwart  or  in  stern  sheets. 

(2)  At  landing  places  officers  are  saluted  by  the  crew  of  a  pull- 
ing boat  sittmg  at  attention,  and  by  the  coxswain  rising  and  salut- 
ing with  the  hand. 

.    130.  Enlisted  men  who  are  passengers  in  running  boats  whith 
contain  officers  shall  maintain  silence. 

131.  (i)  Boats  at  landings  shall  always  show  deference  and 
respect  to  boats  of  other  ships  of  our  own  or  of  a  foreign  service. 
Coxswains  shall  remember  that  landings  are  for  the  use  of  all,  that 
they  should  exercise  patience  and  forbearance  in  awaiting  their 
turn  to  go  alongside,  and  when  once  alongside  they  should  give 
way  for  other  boats  as  soon  as  possible.  In  such  cases  boats  . 
carrying  seniors  should  be  given  the  opportunity  to  land  first,  and 
officers  shall  be  saluted  and  in  every  way  treated  with  the  deference 
and  respect  due  their  rank. 

(2)  It  should  be  remembered  that  boats  at  a  landing  come  more 
intimately  into  contact  with  officers  and  men  from  other  ships  than 
at  any  other  place ;  therefore  a  strict  observance  of  all  courtesies 
by  a  boat  crew  will  reflect  credit  upon  the  ship.    If  a  doubt  exists 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  79 

about  the  rank  of  an  officer  in  a  boat,  it  is  preferable  to  salute 
rather  than  risk  neglecting  to  salute  one  who  is  entitled  to  that 
courtesy. 

132.  Except  when  there  is  a  special  countersign,  the  answering 
hail  from  a  boat  in  reply  to  a  ship's  hail  shall  be  varied  according 
to  the  senior  officer  or  official  who  may  be  in  the  boat,  as  follows : 

President  of  the  United  States United  States. 

Secretary  or  Assistant  Secretary  of  the 

Navy Navy. 

Flag  officer  in  chief  command Fleet. 

Chief  of  staff  (when  not  in  command  of 
a  ship) Staff. 

Division  commander — Division    (giving   num- 
ber of  his  division). 

Flotilla  commander Flotilla 

Commanding  officer The  name  of  the  ship  un- 
der his  command. 

Other  commissioned  officers Aye,   aye. 

Enlisted  micn  of  Navy  and  marines Hello. 

Other  officers No,  no. 

Enlisted  men  of  Navy  and  marines Hello. 

Boats  not  intending  to  go  alongside,  re- 
gardless of  rank  of  passengers Passing. 

133.  Power  boats  approaching  a  ship  when  flag  or  pennant  is 
not  displayed  in  the  bow,  or  at  night,  or  during  the  day  when  the 
curtains  are  so  drawn  that  the  rank  of  passengers  can  not  be  dis- 
tinguished, may  sound  short  blasts  with  the  whistle,  as  follows : 

President  of  the  United  States 8 

Secretary  of  the  Navy 7 

Assistant  Secretary  of  the  Navy 5 

Admiral  of  the  Navy 7 

Admiral 6 

Vice  admiral   5 

Other  flag  officer 4 

Commanding  officer,  chief  of  staff,  or  torpedo  flotilla  com- 
mander           3 

Other  commissioned  officers 2 

All  others   I 


CHAPTER  VII. 

RULES  OF  THE  ROAD   AND   BUOYAGE   SYS- 
TEM IN  UNITED   STATES  WATERS. 

RULES  OF  THE  ROAD. 

Note.— The  following  is  a  summary  of  the  "  Rules  for  Preventing  Collisions 
at  Sea  and  upon  Inland  Waters  of  the  United  States  "  which  apply  to  boats, 

LIGHTS. 

134.  The  rules  concerning  lights  shall  be  complied  with  in  all 
weathers  from  sunset  to  sunrise. 

(i)  All  power  boats  under  26  feet  in  length  shall  carry  aft  a 
white  light  to  show  all  around  the  horizon,  and  forward,  lower 
than  the  white  light  aft,  a  combined  lantern  showing  red  to  port 
and  green  to  starboard,  so  fixed  as  to  throw  the  light  from  right 
ahead  to  2  points  abaft  the  beam  on  each  side. 

(2)  All  power  boats  designed  to  be  carried  on  board  ship,  and 
26  feet  or  more  in  length,  shall  carry  (a)  a  bright  white  light  as 
near  the  stem  as  practicable  showing  10  points  on  each  side  of  the 
vessel ;  that  is,  from  ahead  to  2  points  abaft  each  beam  ;  (6)  a  white 
light  aft  to  show  all  around  the  horizon ;  (c)  a  screened  green  side 
light  on  the  starboard  side  and  a  screened  red  side  light  on  the 
port  side,  constructed  and  fixed  as  prescribed  for  steam  vessels. 

(3)  Rowing  boats,  whether  under  oars  or  sail,  shall  have  ready 
at  hand  a  lantern  showing  a  white  light,  which  shall  be  temporarily 
exhibited  in  time  to  prevent  collision. 

(4)  For  an  anchor  light  an  ordinary  hand  lantern  showing  a 
white  light  is  to  be  exhibited  when  required. 

SOUND  SIGNALS  FOR  A  FOG. 

135.  (i)  All  power  boats  designed  to  be  carried  on  board  ship 
are  provided  with  a  whistle  or  other  sound-producing  appliance 
capable  of  producing  a  blast  of  2  seconds'  or  more  duration. 

80 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  8i 

(2)  All  power  boats  designed  to  be  carried  on  board  ship,  and 
26  feet  or  more  in  length,  shall  carry  an  efficient  foghorn  and  an 
efficient  bell. 

(3)  In  fog,  mist,  falling  snow,  or  heavy  rainstorms,  whether  by 
day  or  night,  a  power  boat  shall  make  the  following  signals  at 
intervals  of  not  more  than  one  minute : 

(a)  If  under  way  and  not  towing  or  being  towed,  a  prolonged 
blast  of  two  or  more  seconds  on  the  whistle  or  foghorn. 

(b)  If  under  way  and  towing,  three  blasts  in  succession  on  the 
whistle  or  foghorn,  namely,  one  prolonged  blast  followed  by  two 
short  blasts. 

(c)  If  at  anchor,  ringing  of  the  bell  for  about  five  seconds. 

(4)  A  power  boat  is  under  way  within  the  meaning  of  these 
rules  when  she  is  not  anchored  or  made  fast  to  the  shore  or  a  ship, 
or  aground. 

SPEED  IN  FOG. 

136.  Boats  shall,  in  a  fog,  mist,  falling  snow,  or  heavy  rain- 
storms, go  at  a  moderate  speed. 

STEERING  AND  SAILING  RULES. 

137.  (i)  When  two  boats  under  sail  are  approaching  one 
another  so  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  one  of  them  shall  keep 
out  of  the  way  of  the  other,  as  follows : 

(a)  A  boat  which  is  running  free  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  a 
boat  which  is  close-hauled. 

(b)  A  boat  which  is  close-hauled  on  the  port  tack  shall  keep  out 
of  the  way  of  a  boat  which  is  close-hauled  on  the  starboard  tack. 

(c)  When  both  are  running  free,  with  the  wind  on  different 
sides,  the  boat  which  has  the  wind  on  the  port  side  shall  keep  out 
of  the  way  of  the  other. 

(d)  When  both  are  rtmning  free,  with  the  wind  on  the  same 
side,  the  boat  which  is  to  windward  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of 
the  boat  which  is  to  leeward, 

(e)  A  boat  which  has  the  wind  aft  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of 
other  boats. 

(2)  When  two  boats  under  power  or  oars  are  meeting  end  on, 
or  nearly  end  on,  so  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  each  shall  alter 
her  course  to  starboard  so  that  each  may  pass  on  the  port  side  of 
the  other. 

is)  When  two  boats  under  power  or  oars  are  crossing  so  as  to 
involve  risk  of  collision,  the  boat  which  has  the  other  on  her  own 
starboard  side  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  other. 


82  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

(4)  \yhen  a  boat  under  power  or  oars  and  a  boat  under  sail  are 
proceeding  in  such  directions  as  to  involve  risk  of  collision,  the 
boat  under  power  or  oars  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  boat 
under  sail. 

(5)  Where  by  any  of  these  rules  one  of  the  two  boats  is  to  keep 
out  of  the  way,  the  other  shall  keep  her  course  and  speed. 

(6)  Every  boat  which  is  directed  by  these  rules  to  keep  out  of 
the  way  of  another  boat  shall,  if  the  circumstances  of  the  case 
admit,  avoid  passing  ahead  of  tne  other. 

(7)  Every  boat  under  power  which  is  directed  by  these  rules  to 
keep  out  of  the  way  of  another  boat  shalt,  on  approaching  her,  if 
necessary,  slacken  her  speed  or  stop  or  reverse. 

(8)  Every  boat,  whether  under  power,  oars,  or  sail,  when  over- 
taking any  other  shall  keep  out  of  the  way  of  the  overtaken  boat. 

(9)  Any  boat  under  power  approaching  another  which  is  in 
sight  of  her  shall  indicate  what  course  she  intends  to  take  by  the 
following  signals  on  her  whistle: 

(a)  One  short  blast  to  mean  "I  am  directing  my  course  to 
starboard." 

(b)  .Two  short  blasts  to  mean  **  I  am  directing  my  course  to  port." 

(c)  Three  short  blasts  to  mean  "My  engines  are  going  at  full 
speed  astern." 

id)  The  words  "short  blast"  to  mean  a  blast  of  about  one 
second's  duration. 

( 10)  In  a  narrow  channel  every  boat  under  power  or  oars  shall; 
when  it  is  safe  and  practicable,  keep  to  that  side  of  the  fairway  or 
mid-channel  which  lies  on  the  starboard  side  of  such  boat. 

(11)  Whenever  a  boat  under  power  is  nearing  a  short  bend  or 
curve  in  a  river  or  harbor  she  should  give  a  long  blast  on  the 
steam  whistle. 

(12)  Boats  under  power  when  leaving  a  ship  to  proceed  ahead 
and  cross  to  the  other  bow  should  give  the  proper  signal  on 
whistles. 

(13)  Due  regard  shall  be  had  to  all  dangers  of  navigation  and 
collision,  and  to  any  special  circumstances  which  may  render  a 
departure  from  the  above  rules  necessary  in  order  to  avoid  imme- 
diate danger. 

BUOYS. 

UNIFORM   SYSTEM   OF  BUOYAGE  IN   UNITED   STATES   WATERS. 

138.  (i)  In  coming  from  seaward,  red  buoys  mark  the  star- 
board or  right-hand  side  of  the  channel,  and  black  buoys  the  port 
or  left  side. 

(2)  Dangers  and  obstructions  which  may  be  passed  on  either 
side  are  marked  by  buoys  with  black  and  red  horizontal  stripes 
and  may  be  left  on  either  hand. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  83 

(3)  Buoys  indicating  the  fairway  are  marked  with  black  and 
white  vertical  stripes  and  should  be  passed  close  to. 

(4)  Sunken  wrecks  are  marked  by  the  red  and  black  obstruc- 
tion buoys  described  in  paragraph  2.  In  foreign  countries  green 
buoys  are  frequently  used  to  mark  sunken  wrecks. 

(5)  Quarantine  buoys  are  yellow. 

(6)  As  white  buoys  have  no  special  significance  they  are  fre- 
quently used  for  special  purposes  not  connected  with  navigation. 

(7)  The  starboard  and  port  buoys  are  numbered  from  the  sea- 
ward end  of  the  channel,  the  black  bearing  the  odd  and  the  red 
the  even  numbers. 

(8)  Perches  with  balls,  cages,  etc.,  will,  when  placed  on  buoys, 
be  at  turning  points,  the  color  and  number  indicating  on  which 
side  they  shall  be  passed. 


PLATE  I 


President's  Flag 


► 


Senior  Officer  Present 


^ 


Consular  Flag 


Secretary  of  the  Navy 

Assistant  Secretary, 

colors  reversed 


Pi 


Torpedo  Flotilla 
Commander 


Commission  Pennant 


W 


Admiral 


P= 


Submarine  Flotilla 
Commander 


m 


Naval  Militia 
Distinguishing 


P 


Vice  Admiral 


P- 


Torpedo  Division 
Commander 

Surcharged 
Division  Number 


^ 


Naval  Militia 
Commodore 


Rear  Admiral 
Senior,  Blue 
Junior,  Red 


P- 


Submarine  Division 
Commander 

Surcharged 
Division  Number 


Naval  Militia 
Commission  Pennant 


PLATE   II 


A  .  — 

B .  . 

C—  .  _  . 

D  __  .  . 

F  . 

G 

1 — M^ 

H  .  .  .  . 

P 

K 

\^ 

pa 

M 

Hi 

N 

O 

m 

P 

J 

Q 

?■ 

^  s  .  .  . 

^   U  .  .  — 

^  V 

tew 

|n=l 

"w 

X .  _ 

Y 

^. 

CALL 
FLAGS 

PLATE  III 


C 


M  — 


O 


SHIP  CALL 
PENNANTS 


PLATE  IV 


I'      Cornet. 


I    Numerals. 


Numerals. 
Ardois— Upper  light  pulsated. 

Very— Rocket  j  ^  j-  Rocket. 

None  in  other  codes. 


Repeaters. 


1st  Repeater. 


2d  Repeater. 


3d  Repeater. 


Indicators. 

Flashed  tn  Ardois.    Preceded  by  call  prefix  in  Sound,  and  Flash, 
and  by  rocket  in  Very. 


O 

Squadron, 


Division. 


U 

Torpedo  Flotilla. 


Submarine  Flotilla* 


PLATE  V 


Alphabetical  Code  Flags  and  Pennants 
{Same  as  International  Code ) 


ABLE 


r- 


EASY 


ITEM 


BOY 


r- 


p 


FOX 


JIG 


P- 


P 


CAST 


r 


GEORGE  KING 


P   P 


DOG  HAVE  LOVE 


PLATE  VI 


MIKE 


RUSH 


(2) 


P 

WATCH 


(7) 


(3) 


NAN 


SAIL 


X-RAY 


(8) 


P 

OBOE 


P 

TARE 


(4) 


(9) 


YOKE 


P 

PUP 


VNJT 


(5) 


ZED 


(0) 


(1) 


QUACK 


(6) 


VICE 


The  last  ten  let- 
ters have  second- 
ary meanings  as 
numerals  in  Flag 
Code,  Ardois  and 
Very. 


PLATE  VII 


Day. 


Ardois.         Flash.  Sound.  Very. 


Repeat 
Display. 


Answering. _ 


Interval. 


Code  Interval. 


Answering  and 
Divisional. 


{-} 


K 


N 


0 


Negative 
or  No! 


Ml        Preparatory. 


Annulling. 


P 

IJI         Interrogatory. 


P 

II        Affirmative 
Jl  cr  Vest 


m^               • 

Signal  of  Execution, 

Rocket. 

• 

^m     • 

Repeat, 

Before 
a  signal. 

PLATE  VIII 


Day. 


Ardois        Flash        Sound 


Very 


No  Banger  Signal. 


Danger. 

Repeated. 


Danger  and 

Designating. 

Navy  Register  Use, 


Designating. 


I. 

Dispatch. 
Break  down. 
Man  overboard. 


Toots 

for 

ten 

seconds. 


Guide. 


Convoy. 


+  + 


Guard. 


Position 
I  Division  Guide. 


Full  Speed. 

p     Meal. 

"Flag  Officer  Leaving. 


General  Recall, 


Submarine  Warning 


I  Boat  Recall  with 
numeral  above. 


IS 

"  Flag. 


► 


Battle  EMcxency. 


+ 


Red  Cross. 


Quarantine 


Church 


CHAPTER  VIII. 
THE  NAVY  SIGNAL  SYSTEM. 

METHODS. 

139.  The  United  States  Navy  Signal  System  comprises  the  Navy 
Flag  Code,  the  Semaphore  Code,  and  the  Dot  and  Dash  Code. 
The  last  named  consisted  of  the  alphabet  and  numerals  of  the 
International  Morse  Code,  with  certain  additional  conventional 
signals  and  secondary  meanings. 

140.  In  communicating  between  vessels,  or  between  the  shore 
stations  and  vessels  of  the  United  States  Navy,  the  following 
methods  of  signaling  are  employed  : 

Flag  signals  (day).    United  States  Navy  Flag  Code. 
Wigwag  signals  (day  and  night).    Dot  and  Dash  Code. 
Occulting  light  (day  and  night).    Dot  and  Dash  Code. 
Sound  Signals  (day  and  night).    Dot  and  Dash  Code. 
Ardois  system  (night).    Dot  and  Dash  Code,  except  numerals. 
Two-arm  semaphore  (day  and  night).    Semaphore  Code. 
Very  system  (night).    Flag  Code  by  Dot  and  Dash  characters. 

141.  Flag  signals  are  made  by  hoists  of  flags,  transmitting  the 
Navy  Flag  Code.  The  Navy  Flag  Code  may  also  be  transmitted 
by  all  other  methods  of  signaling. 

142.  In  the  plates,  the  signs  of  dots  (.)  and  dashes  ( — )  oppo- 
site the  various  flags  and  calls  illustrate  the  manner  in  which  they 
are  represented  in  the  Dot  and  Dash  Code.  The  flags  and  calls 
are  represented  in  the  semaphore  system  by  displays  as  shown. 

COMMUNICATION  WITH   THE  UNITED  STATES  ARMY. 

143.  The  International  Morse  Code  has  been  adopted  by  joint 
agreement  between  the  United  States  Navy  and  the  United  States 
Army  for  intercommunication  by  visual  and  sound  signals;  an 
exception  is  made  that  in  using  the  Ardois  system,  numerals  shall 
be  spelled  out  and  punctuation  marks  eliminated. 

144.  The  use  of  the  International  Morse  Code,  however,  shall 
not  be  understood  as  prohibiting  the  employment  between  the 
Army  and  Navy  of  such  other  systems  of  signaling  as  may  be 
useful  under  special  conditions,  such  as  the  International  Code, 

4  8s 


86  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

the  two-arm  semaphore  system,  pyrotechnics  of  any  description 
including  rockets,  the  Very  pistol,  or  any  other  method  of  com- 
munication not  adapted  to  the  Dot  and  Dash  Code,  but  which  at 
times  may  become  serviceable  and  which  may  be  temporarily 
agreed  to  by  the  senior  ofiicers  present  of  the  two  services. 

CALLS. 

Note, — Ships*  calls  are  not  to  be  confounded  with  their  Interna- 
tional "  signal  letters." 

145.  In  order  to  furnish  calls  for  all  ships,  using  the  letters  of 
the  alphabet  for  the  purpose,  combinations  of  two  different  letters 
are  necessary,  thus — :AB,  PO,  LX,  etc.  The  first  letter  in  each 
case  represents  one  of  the  groups  in  which,  for  convenience,  differ- 
ent ships  are  arranged  ;  the  second  letter  represents  the  ship  of  the 
group. 

146.  In  order  to  avoid  confusion  in  making  calls  by  the  flag  code, 
two  systems  of  flags  and  pennants  are  used — one  for  the  group 
and  the  other  for  the  ship.  The  first  system  (Plate  II)  is  des- 
ignated as  "call  flags;'*  they  are  all  rectangular  flags,  as  distin- 
guished from  pennants,  and  will  be  recognized,  letter  for  letter,  as 
modifications  of  the  alphabet  flags.  The  second  system  (Plate  III) 
is  designated  as  **  ship  call  pennants  *'  because  of  their  shape,  and 
will  be  recognized  as  based  upon  the  Dot  and  Dash  Code,  red 
representing  a  dot,  and  yellow  a  dash,  and  blue  the  preceding 
color  whether  red  or  yellow. 

147.  The  two-letter  call  of  each  ship,  therefore,  in  the  flag  code 
is  composed  of  a  **  call  flag,"  which  is  always  the  first  letter  of  the 
ship  call,  and  a  "  call  pennant,"  which  is  always  the  second  letter 
of  the  ship  call.  "  Call  pennants  "  are  used  only  as  the  second 
letter  of  a  ship  call.  "  Call  flags,"  as  explained  later,  are  also  used 
in  conjunction  with  special  flags  as  the  call  letters  of  squadrons, 
divisions,  etc. 

148.  In  order  to  furnish  calls  by  flag  code  for  squadrons,  divi- 
sions, etc.,  there  are  provided  in  addition  to  the  call  flags  and  call 
pennants  the  following  special  (indicator)  flags:  (i)  squadron 
(indicator)  flag;  (2)  division  (indicator)  pennant;  (3)  torpedo 
flotilla   (indicator)   flag;    (4)   submarine  flotilla   (indicator)   flag. 

149.  The  torpedo  flotilla  and  the  submarine  flotilla  are  called 
or  addressed  by  their  special  flags,  and  they  have  corresponding 
sp'^-'ial  calls  (or  indicators)  in  the  other  systems. 

150.  The  squadrons,  divisions,  torpedo  divisions,  and  sub- 
marine divisions  have  each  a  call  letter.  This  letter  is  indicated, 
in  making  flag  calls,  by  the  use  of  the  "  call  flag  "  of  that  letter 
hoisted  below  the  squadron,  division,   torpedo   flotilla,   and   sub- 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  87 

marine  flotilla  (indicator)  flags,  respectively.  In  calls  other  than 
by  flag  code  the  letter  is  used  in  conjunction  with  the  squadron, 
division,  torpedo  flotilla,  and  submarine  flotilla  "  indicators." 

151.  All  calls  except  the  general  call  are  always  flashed  by 
Ardois ;  are  always  preceded  by  the  call  prefix  ....  —  in  sound 
and  flash ;  are  always  preceded  by  a  rocket  in  Very's.  This  serves 
to  distinguish  the  calls  from  the  ordinary  use  of  letters. 

152.  If  necessary  to  compel  attention  any  call  may  be  made  by 
any  two  or  more  systems  simultaneously. 

Note. — For  calls  of  boats  or  ship  flotillas,  see  Arts.  55-58. 
153. 

GENERAL   CALL    (cORNET). 

Flag :  All  flag  signals  call  the  whole  force  present  unless  displayed 
with  a  group,  squadron,  division,  flotilla,  or  ship  call. 

Ardois  : ■ — ,  steady  display. 

Sound: ,  including  whistle,  bell,  etc. 

Flash : ,  including  blinker,  shutter  searchlight,  etc. 

Very :  Rocket,  followed  by  a  green  star. 

Semaphore :  By  day,  cornet  at  half-yardarm  and  "  cornet "  with 
hand  flag  or  machine. 
By  night,  "  cornet "  with  machine. 

Wigwag :    By  day,  cornet  at  half-yardarm  and by 

hand  flag. 

By  night —  with  torch,  searchlight  beam, 

etc. 

GROUP    CALLS. 

154.  Of  the  26  letters  of  the  alphabet,  E  and  T  are  eliminated  to 
avoid  confusion  in  Ardois  and  in  sound  signals  of  changing  the 
course  in  thick  weather ;  I  is  eliminated,  reserved  for  flashing  red- 
red  by  Ardois  for  man  overboard.  Total  of  letters  eliminated,  3 ; 
remaining  available,  23.  One  of  these  letters,  with  its  correspond- 
ing flag  or  other  code  call,  is  assigned  to  each  of  the  23  groups. 
For  convenience  in  calling  out  the  signal,  the  groups  are  de- 
nominated the  first,  second,  and  so  on,  to  the  twenty-third,  cor- 
responding, respectively,  to  the  call  flags  A,  B,  and  so  nn,  to  Z. 

155.  All  vessels  of  one  group  may  be  called  or  addressed  by  the 
flag  or  other  code  call  of  that  group. 

156.  Example-  To  call  all  ships  of  first  group  (A). 
Flag  :  Call  flag,  "  A." 

Ardois :    .  —  flashed. 

Sound :    .  .  .  .  —     .  —  including  whistle,  bell,  etc. 

Flash :   .  .  .  .  —     .  —  including  blinker,  shutter  searchlight,  etc. 


88  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

Very:    Rocket  .  — 

Semaphore :  By  day,  call   flag  "  A "  at  half-yardarm   and  "  A " 
with  hand  flag  or  machine. 
By  night,  "  A  "  with  machine. 

Wigwag:    By  day,  call  flag  "A"  at  halfyardarm  and  .  with 

hand  flag. 
By  night,  .  —  with  torch,  searchlight  beam,  etc. 
And  so  on  through  2^  groups. 

Note. — To  call  two  or  more  groups  at  one  time,  each  group 
must  be  called  separately,  except  that  by  flag  signal,  semiphore,  or 
wigwag  two  or  more  call  flags  are  hoisted  simultaneously. 

SHIP  CALLS. 

157.  The  call  of  each  ship  is  a  combination  of  two  different 
letters.  In  the  flag  code  the  first  letter  is  made  by  the  "  call  flag" 
of  the  group  to  which  the  ship  has  been  assigned ;  the  secor  d,  by 
the  *'  call  pennant  "  of  the  ship ;  the  flag  being  always  hoisted  over 
the  pennant.  By  other  codes  described  in  this  book  the  call  letters 
are  made  in  the  prescribed  sequence.  There  are  22  ship  calls  in 
each  of  the  23  groups,  the  letter  which  designates  the  group  being 
always  omitted  from  the  ship  calls  under  each  group. 

158.  Example :  To  call  ship  G  of  third  group  (C)  : 
Flag  :   Call  flag  "  C  "  over  "  G  "  pennant. 

Ardois :   —  .  —  . .  flashed  (flash  the  group  call  several 

times  first,  then  the  ship  call  several  times;  then  pause  before 
beginning  again,  if  that  is  necessary,  in  order  that  *' C  "  "G" 
shall  not  be  misunderstood  to  be  "  G  "  "  C  "). 

Sound:     ....  —    —  .  —  . .    including    whistle,    bell, 

etc. 

Flash  :    ....  —    —  .  —  . .  including  blinker,  shutter 

searchlight,  etc. 

Very :    Rocket  —  .  —  .     (-1-) . 

Semaphore:  By  day,  call  flag  "C"  over  "  G "  pennant,  at  half- 
yardarm,  and  "  C "   and   "  G "  with  hand   flag  or 
machine. 
By  night,  "  C  "  and  "  G  "  with  the  machine. 
Wigwag:  By  day,  call  flag  "C"  over  **  G  "  pennant  at  half-yard- 

and  —  .  —  . .  with  hand  flag. 

By  night,  —  .  —  .     —  -^-.   .   with  torch,  searchlight 
beam,  etc. 

159.  In  calling  or  addressing  several  ships  of  one  group  by  flag, 
the  group  flag  shall  not  be  repeated  over  each  pennant.  By  the 
other  systems,  however,  the  group  call  shall  be  repeated. 

160.  When  a  ship  calls  a  ship  or  ships  of  the  same  group  as 
herself,  by  flag,  the  group  flag  need  not  be  hoisted  over  the  call 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  89 

pennant  of  the  ship  addressed.  By  all  other  systems,  however,  the 
group  call  must  always  be  made,  as  otherwise  the  ship  rail  would 
be  mistaken  for  the  group  call. 

161.  To  provide  for  more  than  22  vessels  in  a  group,  the  ship 
calls  are  doubled. 

162.  Example  •  To  call  YY  ship  of  twenty-third  group  (Z)  : 
Flag :    Call  flag  "  Z  "  over  "  Y  "  "  Y  "  pennants. 

Ardois : .  .    —  . —  . flashed ;  (flash  the 

group  call  several  times  first ;  then  the  ship  call  several  times 
twice;  then  pause  before  beginning  again,  if  that  is  necessary). 
Sound :    ....  — -.     —  . —  . includ- 
ing whistle,  bell,  etc. 

Flash :....  — ..    - —  . —  . including 

blinker,  shutter  searchlight,  etc. 

Very :    Rocket .  .     (-1-)     —  . (-1-)    —  . 

Semaphore :  By  day,  call  flag  "  Z  "  over  "Y "  "  Y "  pennants  at 
half  yardarm,  and  **  Z  "  and  "  Y  "  "  Y  "  with  hand 
flag  or  machine. 
By  night,  "  Z  "  and  "  Y  "  "  Y  "  with  the  machine. 
Wigwag :  By  day,  call  flag  "  Z  "  and  "  Y  "  "  Y  "  pennants  at  half 

yardarm,  and .  .  and  —  . —  .  —  _ 

with  hand  flag. 

By  night, .  .  and  —  . —  • with 

torch,  searchlight  beam,  etc. 

SQUADRON  CALLS. 

163.  The  squadrons  are  independent  of  the  groups  and  may, 
when  necessary,  comprise  ships  of  different  groups ;  it  is  apt  to  be 
more  convenient,  however,  if  the  ships  are  of  the  same  group,  so 
as  to  have  the  same  first  call  letter.  Each  squadron  has  assigned 
to  it  a  call  letter,  there  being  available  calls  for  23  squadrons. 
They  are  numbered  consecutively  as  far  as  needed  through  all 
types  of  ships  except  torpedo  craft  and  submarines,  and  are  de- 
nominated the  first,  second,  and  so  on  to  the  twenty-third,  cor- 
responding, respectively,  to  the  call  flags  A,  B,  and  so  on  to  Z, 
omitting  E,  I,  and  T.  In  the  flag  code  the  calls  are  made  by  hoist- 
ing the  squadron  (indicator)  flag  over  the  call  flag  representing 
the  call  letter  of  the  squadron.     In  dot  and  dash  codes  the  letter 

of  the  squadron  is  preceded  by  a  squadron  indicator, , 

which  is  the  same  as  the  general  call,  but  distinguished  from  it  by 
being  flashed  by  Ardois,  and  preceded  by  the  call-prefix  in  sound, 
and  flash,  and  preceded  by  a  rocket  in  Very's. 


90  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

164.  The  squadron  iijdicator  alone  calls  all  squadron  flagships. 
Alone  over  a  signal,  it  indicates  that  the  signal  is  addressed  to  all 

squadron  commanders. 

DIVISION   CALLS. 
[Other  than  Torpedo  or  Submarine  Divisions.] 

165.  The  divisions  are  independent  of  the  groups,  and  may, 
when  necessary,  comprise  ships  of  different  groups ;  it  is  apt  to  be 
more  convenient,  however,  if  the  ships  are  of  the  same  group,  so 
as  to  have  the  same  first  call  letter.  Each  division  has  assigned  to 
it  a  call  letter,  there  being  available  calls  for  23  divisions ;  they  are 
numbered  consecutively,  as  far  as  needed,  through  all  types  of 
ships  except  torpedo  craft  and  submarines,  and  are  denominated 
the  first,  second,  and  so  on,  to  the  ^twenty-third,  corresponding 
respectively  to  the  call  flags  A,  B,  and  so  on,  to  Z,  omitting  the 
letters  E,  I,  and  T.  In  the  flag  code  the  calls  are  made  by  hoisting 
the  division  (indicator)  pennant  over  the  call  flag  representing 
the  call  letter  of  the  division.    In  dot  and  dash  codes  the  letter  of 

the  division  is  preceded  by  a  division  indicator,  .. ,  which  is 

the  same  as  "  Signals,"  but  distinguished  from  it  by  being  flashed 
by  Ardois  and  preceded  by  the  call-prefix  in  sound  and  flash,  and 
preceded  by  a  rocket  in  Very's. 

166.  Example :   To  call  Third  Division  (C)  : 
Flag :   Division  pennant  over  call  flag  "  C." 
Ardois:    .  . —  .  —  .  flashed. 

Sound :    .  .  .  .  —    .  . —  .  —  .  including  whistle,  bell, 

etc. 

Flash :    ....  —    .  . —  .  —  .  including  blinker,  shut 

ter  searchlight,  etc. 

Very':    Rocket  .  . (——)  —  •  —  •  • 

Semaphore:  By  day,  division  pennant  over  call  flag  "C"  at  half 
yardarm,  and  "  Signals  "  and  "  C  "  with  hand  flag  or 
machine.  '  . 

By  night,  "  Signals  "  and  "  C  "  with  the  machine. 
Wigwag:    By  day,  division  pennant  over  call  flag  "C"  at  half 

yardarm  and  .  . —  .  —  .,  with  hand  flag. 

By  night,  .  . —  .  —  .,  with  torch,  searchlight 

beam,  etc. 

167.  The  division  indicator  alone  calls  all  division  flagships. 
Alone  over  a  signal,  it  indicates  that  the  signal  is  addressed  to  all 
division  commanders. 

TORPEDO    FLOTILLA    CALL. 

168.  The  torpedo  flotilla  (indicator)  flag  is  also  the  flag  call  for 
that  flotilla  exclusive  of  any  submarine  flotilla  or  division  that  may 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  gi 

be  attached  to  it.     For  calling  by  dot  and  dash  codes  there  is  a 

special   torpedo   flotilla   call, .,   which   is   the   same   as 

"  Letters,"  but  distinguished  from  it  by  being  flashed  by  Ardois, 
and  preceded  by  the  call  prefix  in  sound  and  flash,  and  preceded  by 
rocket  in  Very's. 

169.  Example :  To  call  the  torpedo  flotilla: 
Flag  :    Torpedo  flotilla  flag. 

Ardois: .  flashed. 

Sound :   .... .  including  bell,  whistle,  etc. 

Flash :    ....  — . —  .  including  blinker,  shutter  search- 
light, etc. 

Very  :    Rocket . 

Semaphore:    By  day,   torpedo  flotilla  flag  at  half  yardarm  and 
**  Letters  "  with  hand  flag  or  machine. 
By  night,  "  Letters  "  with  the  machine. 
Wigwag:     By    day,    torpedo    flotilla    flag    at    half    yardarm    and 

.  with  hand  flag. 

By  night, .  with  torch,  searchlight  beam,  etc. 

SUBMARINE  FLOTILLA  CAI  L. 

170.  The  submarine  flotilla  (indicator)  flag  is  also  the  flag  call 
for  that  flotilla.  For  calling  by  dot  and  dash  codes  there  is  a 
special  submarine  flotilla  call,  .  —  .  —  which  is  the  same  as  "  In- 
terval," but  distinguished  from  it  by  being  flashed  by  Ardois,  and 
preceded  by  the  call-prefix  in  sound  and  flash,  and  preceded  by  a 
rocket  in  Very's.  The  method  is  the  same  as  for  the  torpedo 
flotilla.  The  "  Interval  "  is  produced  by  semaphore  by  causing  the 
hand  flags  or  arms  to  show  intermittently  just  clear  of  the  body 
or  the  machine. 

TORPEDO   AND    SUBMARINE   DIVISION    CALLS. 

171.  Each  torpedo  and  submarine  division  has  a  call  letter,  first 
division  having  A,  second  division  B,  etc.,  there  being  calls  for  2'^ 
divisions  of  each  flotilla,  E,  I,  and  T  being  omitted.  In  the  flag 
code  the  division  calls  are  made  by  hoisting  the  torpedo  flotilla 
flag  or  submarine  flotilla  flag,  as  the  case  may  be,  over  the  call  flag 
representing  the  call  letter  of  the  division.  In  Qther  codes,  the 
torpedo  flotilla  and  submarine  flotilla  calls  become,  respectively, 
the  torpedo  division  and  submarine  division  indicator,  and,  fol- 
lowed by  the  flag  calls,  A.  B,  C,  etc.,  make  the  torpedo  or  sub- 
marine division  calls. 

172.  In  calling  two  or  more  divisions  or  squadrons  or  torpedo 
divisions  or  submarine  divisions  by  flag,  the  indicator  flag  shall 
not  be  repeated  over  each  call  flag.  By  other  systems,  however, 
the  indicator  shall  l>e  repeated. 


92  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

FLAGS  AND  PENNANTS  OF  NAVY  FLAG  CODE. 

173.  The  flags  and  pennants  used  in  transmitting  the  United 
States  Navy  Flag  Code  are  as  follows: 

Alphabet  flags. 

Negative  flag  (alphabet  flag  "K"). 

Preparatory  flag  (alphabet  flag  "L"). 

Annulling  flag  (alphabet  flag  *'N")- 

Interrogatory  flag   (alphabet  flag  "  O  "). 

Affirmative  flag  (alphabet  flag  "P"). 

Numeral  flag. 

Repeaters. 

Danger  and  designating  flag. 

Answering  and  divisional  point  pennant. 

Cornet* 

Call  flags. 

Ship  call  pennants. 

Indicators. 

174.  The  alphabet  flags  are  the  same  as  those  of  the  Interna- 
tional Code.  The  letters  "  E  "  and  "  T  "  are  not  used  singly  be- 
cause their  displays  by  the  Ardois  system  are  night  speed  indica- 
tors, and  by  the  whistle  they  indicate  a  change  of  course.  The 
letter  "  I "  is  used  singly  only  as  the  dispatch  and  breakdown  flag. 

175.  To  prevent  confusion  and  mistakes  due  to  the  similarity  in 
the  sounds  of  difl"erent  letters  when  calling  out  flags  or  recording 
signals,  the  words  given  in  the  following  table  shall  be  used  as  the 
names  of  the  letters  on  board  of  all  vessels  and  at  all  times : 

A Able.  N Nan. 

B Boy.  O Oboe. 

C Cast.  P Pup. 

D Dog.  Q Quack. 

E Easy.  R Rush. 

F Fox.  S Sail. 

G George.  T i Tare. 

H: Have.  U Unit. 

I Item.  V V^ice. 

J Jig.  W Watch. 

K King.  X .  . . : X  ray. 

L Love.  Y Yoke. 

M Mike.  Z Zed. 

176.  The  negative  flag  (alphabet  flag  "K")  when  hoisted  in 
answer  to  a  signal  means  "  Not  granted  "  or  "  No."  The  call  of 
the  ship  to  which  it  is  addressed  as  an  answer  shall  be  displayed 


The  Deck  and. Boat  Book.  93 

over   it   in   order   to   avoid   any  chance   of   a  misunderstanding. 
Hoisted  over  a  signal  it  puts  the  message  in  a  negative  sense. 

177.  The  preparatory  flag  (alphabet  flag  "L")  hoisted  over  a 
signal  means  "  Prepare  to  execute  the  signal  now  shown  as  soon  as 
the  signal  of  execution  is  made." 

178.  The  signal  of  execution  is  the  starting  from  its  point  of 
hoist  of  the  same  signal  (without  the  preparatory  flag)  or  of 
some  other  signal  relating  to  the  same  movement  or  maneuver. 
Thus,  if  the  signal  were  made  to  prepare  to  moor  ship,  the  signal 
of  execution  might  be  the  hauling  down  later  of  a  signal  to 
"  anchor  in  succession  in  inverted  order." 

179.  The  preparatory  flag  is  hoisted,  as  a  single  display,  pre- 
paratory to  certain  routine  ceremonies,  as  explained  under  "  (Zolors 
signal."  It  shall  also  be  used  as  a  morning  routine  time  signal,  as 
explained  under  "  Time  signal." 

180.  The  annulling  flag  (alphabet  flag  "N")  annuls  all  signals 
at  that  moment  displayed  on  the  same  mast.  In  this  case  only  it 
is  to  be  answered  by  hauling  down  all  answering  pennants  which 
may  have  been  hoisted  in  reply  to  the  signal  or  signals.  In  case 
ships  have  the  signal  or  signals  hoisted  they  shall  also  display  the 
annulling  flag  and  haul  all  down  with  their  hauling  down  on  the 
flagship.  Hoisted  alone,  it  annuls  the  last  signal  made  or  the  last 
hoist. 

181.  Any  signal  previously  made  may  be  annulled  by  hoisting 
the  signal  again  with  the  annulling  flag  either  over  it  or  hoisted  at 
the  same  time.    See  Art.  260. 

182.  The  interrogatory  flag  (alphabet  flag  "O")  when  hoisted 
over  a  signal  changes  its  meaning  to  the  interrogatory  form.  For 
example,  the  signal  "  Can  maintain  present  speed  "  with  the  inter- 
rogatory over  it  means  "  Can  you  maintain  present  speed  ?  "  or  the 
signal  "  Anchor  "  with  the  interrogatory  over  it  means  "  May  I,  or 
shall  I,  anchor  ?  " 

183.  The  single  display  of  the  interrogatory  in  answer  to  a  signal 
means  that  the  signal  can  not  be  read  or  is  not  understood. 

184.  The  interrogatory  hoisted  alone  by  a  flagship  means  "  You 
are  repeating  the  signal  wrong,"  or  "What  movement  are  you 
making  ?  "  according  to  the  circumstances  which  will  be  evident. 

185.  The  affirmative  flag  (alphabet  flag  "  P")  when  hoisted  in 
answer  to  a  signal,  means  assent,  consent,  permission  granted,  or 
'*  Yes."  The  call  of  the  ship  to  which  it  is  addressed  as  an  answer 
shall  be  displayed  over  it  in  order  to  avoid  any  chance  of  a  misun- 
derstanding. 

186.  Hoisted  over  a  signal,  it  means  that  the  specific  work  or 
service  called  for  by  that  signal  has  been  completed  or  the  duty  has 


94  The  Deck  *\nd  Boat  Book. 

been    performed.      For   example,   the    signal    "Moor"    with    the 
affirmative  over  it  means  "  I  have  moored." 

187.  It  is  hoisted  alone  when  getting  under  way  with  other  ves- 
sels in  formation ;  when  ready  to  steam  ahead  after  "  Man  over- 
board "  or  other  contingency  involving  stopping;  in  mooring  ship ; 
and  in  other  cases  to  indicate  that  some  duty  called  for  by  a 
previous  signal  has  been  completed. 

188.  The  numeral  flag  hoisted  over  certain  alphabet  flags  indi- 
cates that  those  flags  are  to  be  interpreted  as  numerals.  The  flags 
whose  meanings  are  thus  changed  are  as  follows : 

Q  I  V   6 

R 2  W    7 

S  3  X    8 

T  4  y 9 

U  5  Z    o 

189.  The  repeaters  serve  to  reproduce,  in  numeral  and  vocabu- 
lary signals  only,  the  alphabet  flags  hoisted  above  them.  The  first 
repeater  reproduces  the  first  alphabet  flag,  the  second  repeater  the 
second,  and  the  third  repeater  the  third. 

190.  Other  specific  uses  of  repeaters  are  described  in  instruc- 
tions for  sending  and  receiving  flag  signals. 

191.  The  danger  and  designating  and  Navy  Register  use  flag 
hoisted  alone  indicates  danger  ahead.  A  compass  signal  under  it 
indicates  the  bearing  of  the  danger  from  the  ship  making  the 
signal. 

192.  Used  as  a  designating  flag  it  designates  a  particular  ship, 
place,  person,  or  thing,  when  hoisted  over  or  at  the  same  time  and, 
if  possible,  on  the  same  mast  as  the  signal  representing  the  object 
referred  to.  For  a  ship,  the  signal  will  be  her  call  or  her  Inter- 
national Signal  letters ;  for  a  place  or  thing,  the  signal  in  the 
vocabulary;  for  an  officer  on  the  active  list,  his  signal  number  in 
the  Navy  Register  ;  for  an  officer  on  the  retired  list,  or  an  enlisted 
man  or  other  person,  the  signals  spelling  out  his  name.  In  making 
an  officer's  number  the  January  Navy  Register  of  each  year  shall 
be  used  on  and  after  July  i  of  that  )^ear  and  until  and  including 
June  30,  of  the  following  year. 

193.  The  answering  pennant  is  to  be  hoisted  where  it  can  be 
best  seen — at  the  truck,  gaff,  or  yardarm — in  answering,  and  kept 
there  until  the  signal  is  hauled  down.  At  sea,  if  displayed  at  the 
yaraarm  it  shall  be  at  the  side  not  occupied  by  the  speed  cone 
unless  that  leads  to  concealment  by  smoke.  In  port  it  shall  be 
displayed  at  the  starboard  yardarm. 

194.  In  order  that  there  shall  be  no  uncertainty  as  to  the  signal 
that  is  answered  by  a  ship,  the  latter  shall  display  the  answering 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  95 

pennant  under  the  call  of  the  ship  making  the  signal ;  except  that 
in  answering  a  signal  from  the  senior  flagship  the  latter's  call  shall 
not  be  displayed. 

195.  The  answering  uennant  is  used  as  a  divisional  point  to 
represent  the  divisions  of  mixed  quantities  referred  to  by  a  signal 
made  at  the  same  time  or  just  previously. 

196.  The  cornet  hoisted  at  the  fore,  or  at  the  highest  gaff  or 
signal  yard  if  the  foremast  head  can  not  be  used  for  its  display,  is 
a  peremptory  order  for  all  officers  and  others  absent  from  the  ship 
to  repair  on  board  at  once.    A  gun  fired  denotes  urgency. 

197.  The  cornet  hoisted  half  yardarm  high  is  a  call  for  the 
whole  force  to  receive  a  semaphore  or  wigwag  message. 

SPECIAL   FLAGS   AND   PENNANTS- 

198.  The  Union  Jack  hoisted  at  the  fore  is  a  signal  for  a  pilot. 
Hoisted  at  a  yardarm  it  indicates  that  a  general  cnur^-martial  or 
court  of  inquiry  is  in  session  on  board.  In  port  a  gun  shall  be 
lired  when  it  is  hoisted  upon  the  meeting  of  the  court. 

199.  The  powder  flag  (a/phabet  flag  '*  B  ")  shall  be  displayed  at 
the  fore  on  all  vessels  v/hile  taking  on  board  or  discharging  explo- 
sives or  loaded  projectiles,  or  fuel  oil  or  gasoline  in  large  quanti- 
ties, and  in  the  bows  of  all  boats  and  lighters  transporting  the 
same.  It  is  also  to  be  displayed  by  a  ship  engaged  in  target  practice 
with  either  guns  or  torpedoes  while  the  firing  is  in  actual  progress. 
It  shall  be  hauled  down  halfway  when  off  the  firing  line  if  the 
practice  is  to  continue,  and  hauled  down  at  "  Cease  firing "  or 
"  Secure."  It  may  also  be  used  when  standardizing  propellers,  to 
indicate  when  the  ship  is  on  the  course  and  observations  are  in 
progress. 

200.  The  dispatch  and  breakdown  flag  (alphabet  i^ag  "I") 
shall  be  worn  at  the  main  in  all  dispatch  vessels  to  indicate  the 
nature  of  their  service.  No  vessel  shall  hoist  the  dispatch  flag 
without  proper  authority,  nor  display  it  as  such  until  actually 
under  way  and  out  of  formation ;  but  when  it  is  hoisted  she  shall 
not  be  interfered  with  by  an.officer  junior  to  the  one  by  whom  she 
is  sent  on  such  service,  except  when  the  public  interests  impera- 
tively demand  such  action,  of  the  necessity  for  which  the  senior 
officer  present  must  be  the  responsible  judge.  A  vessel  engaged  in 
carrying  dispatches  or  orders  through  a  fleet  should  hoist  helow 
the  dispatch  flag  the  call  of  the  ship  to  which  she  is  not  bound ;  or 
she  may  display  in  inverse  order  the  calls  of  all  the  ships  to  be 
communicated  with,  that  of  the  ship  to  be  next  communicated  with 
being  the  last  one  in  the  hoist,  and  as  soon  as  any  ship  has  beeA 
conmiunicated  with  her  call  shall  be  detached  from  the  hoist* 


(fi  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

201.  In  formation  underway  this  flag  shall  be  kept  rounded  up 
"  in  stops "  at  the^  fore  ready  to  break  in  case  of  accident  to 
machinery  or  steering  gear.  When  a  guide  flag  is  displayed  at  the 
foremast  head  the  breakdown  flag  shall  be  hoisted  "  in  stops " 
below  the  guide  flag  ready  to  break  below  it.  In  case  of  accident 
which  is  likely  to  necessitate  slowing  down  or  leaving  the  forma- 
tion, it  shall  be  instantly  broken  as  an  emergency  signal,  and 
implies  "  breakdown "  or  "  not  under  control,"  and  other  ships 
must  keep  clear  until  the  ship  displaying  the  breakdown  flag  shall 
have  gotten  well  clear  of  the  formation.  The  breakdown  flag  does 
not  relieve  a  ship  from  responsibility  in  cases  of  collision,  even 
though  she  may  have  sheered  out  of  formation.  It  shall  be  kept 
flying  during  daylight  until  repairs  are  completed  and  the  ship  is 
headed  for  the  formation  to  resume  her  position,  or  until  she  is 
beyond  signal  distance. 

202.  In  case  of  man  overboard,  a  ship  in  formation  shall  break 
this  flag  and  at  once  lower  it  part  way  (but  not  below  the  level  of 
the  smokestacks)  as  a  signal  for  "  man  overboard." 

203.  The  guard  and  guide  flag  when  used  at  anchor  is  a  guard 
flag,  and  indicates  that  the  ship  upon  which  it  is  hoisted  is  charged 
with  the  guard  duty  of  the  division,  squadron,  or  force  then  at 
anchor  within  signal  distance.  It  shall  be  hoisted  at  the  fore  be- 
tween sunrise  and  sunset.  From  sunset  until  sunrise  a  red  light 
shall  be  displayed  at  the  fore  truck,  except  under  such  conditions 
as  may  cause  it  to  be  confused  with  navigation  lights.  The  guard 
flag  shall  not  be  hoisted,  nor  red  light  shown,  by  a  flagship  or 
vessel  of  the  senior  officer  present  to  indicate  that  she  has  the 
guard  duty.  A  ship  may  be  directed  to  take  the  guard  duty  by 
hoisting  the  guard  flag  under  the  ship's  call ;  this  is  answered  by 
hoisting  the  guard  flag.  A  ship  is  relieved  from  guard  duty  by 
hoisting  the  guard  flag  over  the  ship's  call;  this  is  answered  by 
hauling  down  the  guard  flag.  To  call  a  guard  boat  alongside,  the 
flagship  may  hoist  the  guard  flag  under  the  ship's  call  or  under  the 
call  of  the  division  to  which  the  ship  belongs ;  or  at  night  may  dis- 
play a  red  light  after  the  call,  as  above.  This  is  answered  by 
dipping  the  guard  flag  or  pulsating  the  red  light.  Boats  on 
guard  duty  shall  display  a  small  guard  flag  from  a  staff  in  their 
bows  during  daylight. 

204.  When  a  ship  is  under  way  and  in  formation  the  display  of 
this  flag  at  the  fore  denotes  that  she  is  the  guide  in  the  for- 
mation. The  guide  flag  at  the  dip  (lowered  part  way)  indicates 
that  the  guide  ship  is  temporarily  out  of  position.  The  divi- 
sion guide  pennant  (position  pennant)  shall  be  displayed  un- 
der the  same  rules  for  rear  divisions  or  squadrons.  A  ship 
may  be  directed  to  take  the  guide  by  hoisting  the  guide  flag  under 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  '97 

the  ship's  call,  or  to  cease  being  the  guide  by  hoisting  it  over  the 
ship's  call.  This  is  answered  by  hoisting  or  hauling  down  the 
guide  flag  or  pennant  as  called  for. 

205.  The  convoy  and  position  and  division  guide  pennant  shall 
be  worn  at  the  fore  of  all  ships  on  escort  duty  to  indicate  the 
nature  of  their  service.  No  vessel  shall  hoist  the  convoy  pennant 
without  proper  authority;  but  when  it  is  hoisted  she  shall  not  be 
interfered  with  by  an  officer  junior  to  the  one  by  whom  she  was 
sent  on  such  service,  except  when  the  public  interests  imperatively 
demand  such  action,  of  the  necessity  for  which  the  senior  officer 
present  must  be  the  responsible  judge. 

206.  It  is  also  a  division  (or  squadron)  guide  pennant,  and  in 
compound  formations  is  worn  by  the  guides  of  divisions  (or 
squadrons)  other  than  the  fleet  guide. 

207.  A  ship  in  formation  not  on  escort  duty  hoists  this  pennant 
to  indicate  that  she  has  attained  an  assigned  position ;  but  it  shall 
not  be  used  in  tactical  evolutions  except  as  prescribed  under  fleet 
tactics.  When  a  ship  in  formation  has  been  in  position  and  loses 
it,  she  shall  hoist  the  position  pennant  at  half-mast  as  an  indica- 
tion of  the  fact,  and  keep  it  so  until  she  regains  her  position,  when 
she  shall  run  it  all  the  way  up  and  immediately  haul  it  down. 
Under  battle  conditions  it  shall  not  be  used  for  this  purpose. 

208.  The  position  pennant  displayed  under  a  call  by  the  senior 
officer,  means  to  the  ship  signaled :  "  You  are  out  of  position,"  or 
"  You  are  out  of  order." 

209.  The  full  speed  and  meal  and  flag  officer  leaving  pennant  is 
kept  hoisted  as  a  single  display  at  the  port  yardarm  during  the 
period  when  the  crew  is  at  meals  on  board  vessels  at  anchor, 
whether  or  not  the  colors  are  hoisted.  This  pennant  shall  be 
shown  for  this  purpose  without  reference  to  the  flagship.  Under 
way  in  formation  it  shall  be  used  as  a  full-speed  pennant  on  the 
same  side  as  the  speed  cone.  When  a  flag  officer  is  about  to  leave 
his  flagship  officially  during  the  day,  this  pennant  shall  be  dis.- 
played  directly  under  his  flag  and  hauled  down  when  he  shoves  off. 

210.  The  general-  and  boat-recall  flag  is  a  peremptory  order  for 
all  boats  absent  from  that  ship  on  detached  duty,  or  otherwise,  to 
return  with  all  speed  to  their  ship.  A  numeral  displayed  below  the 
general  recall  is  an  order  that  all  boats  except  the  one  indicated 
shall  return  to  the  ship.  The  general-recall  flag  under  a  numeral 
indicates  the  recall  of  the  ship's  boat  having  that  numeral  as  a  call 
number.  Commanding  officers  of  all  ships  shall  assign  numbers 
to  all  boats  for  this  and  for  boat  exercise  purposes.  A  recall  shall 
be  kept  hoisted  until  the  boat  is  made  out  as  returning  in  obedience 
to  the  signal.  If  necessary,  but  only  in  case  of  emergency,  the 
ship's  call  letter  may  be  sounded  on  the  steam  whistle  or  a  gun 


98*  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

fired  to  attract  the  attention  of  the  boat.  When  a  boat  recall  is 
hoisted  with  the  annulling  flag  over  it,  it  indicates  that  the  boat  so 
designated  shall  not  return  to  the  ship  at  the  time  previously 
prescribed,  but  shall  wait  for  the  further  display  of  her  recall. 

211.  At  night  a  boat  may  be  recalled  by  the  display  of  "  I,"  fol- 
lowed by  the  number  of  the  boat,  and  by  the  ship's  call  if  there 
can  be  any  uncertainty  as  to  which  ship  is  signaling;  or  special 
night  recalls  may  be  assigned  for  particular  occasions,  observing 
due  care  that  the  recall  used  shall  not  be  such  as  to  render  it 
possible  to  be  mistaken  by  other  ships  as  a  signal  to  them. 

212.  The  quarantine  flag  (alphabet  flag  "  Q")  is  hoisted  at  the 
foremast  head  or  most  conspicuous  hoist  on  all  infected  ships  or 
ships  in  quarantine.  It  shall  be  kept  flying  day  and  night  and  be 
carried  in  the  bow  of  all  boats  belonging  to  the  ship  having  this 
flag  hoisted.  It  should  be  hoisted  by  incoming  ships  as  a  signal 
to  the  health  officer  of  the  port  that  pratique  is  desired. 

213.  The  battle  efficiency  pennant  shall  be  worn  at  the  fore 
when  at  anchor  on  such  vessels  as  may  have  been  officially  declared 
entitled  to  fly  it  for  excellence  in  battle  efficiency. 

214.  The  Red  Cross  flag  is,  by  international  agreement,  to  be 
worn  at  the  fore  on  all  hospital  vessels.  It  shall  also  be  displayed 
over  the  field  hospital  of  any  naval  force  on  shore  and  on  hospital 
boats  of  landing  parties. 

215.  The  submarine  warning  flag  is  hoisted  on  the  tender  or 
parent  ship  of  submarines  or  on  launches  a^ccompanying  them  to 
indicate  that  submarines  are  operating  submerged  in  that  vicinity. 

216.  The  church  pennant  shall  be  hoisted  at  the  same  place  of 
hoist  and  over  the  ensign  during  the  performance  of  divine  service 
on  board  vessels  of  the  Navy. 

217.  The  battalion  flags  for  infantry  and  artillery  are  provided 
for  naval  landing  forces. 

218.  The  Naval  Militia  distinguishing  flag  shall  be  hoisted  at 
the  masthead  (fore  when  there  is  more  than  one  mast)  at  all 
times  on  all  vessels  loaned  by  the  Navy  Department  to  a  State  for 
the  use  of  the  Naval  Militia  or  Naval  Reserve,  and  on  all  vessels 
*'  in  commission  in  reserve  "  and  assigned  to  the  States  for  the 
instruction  of  the  Naval  Militia  or  Naval  Reserve,  when  such  ves- 
sels are  actually  under  the  command  of  a  Naval  Militia  or  Naval 
Reserve  officer. 

219.  The  Naval  Militia  commission  pennant  and  commodore's 
pennant  shall  be  worn  by  Naval  Militia  vessels  in  the  same  way 
that  is  prescribed  for  the  similar  pennants  on  vessels  of  the.  Navy. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  99 

MAN-OF-WAR  LIGHTS. 

220.  At  night  when  approaching  an  anchorage  where  men-of- 
war  are  likely  to  be  found,  all  ships  shall  display  at  the  peak  two 
white  lights  in  a  vertical  line.  When  at  anchor  in  port  and  sighting 
an  incoming  vessel  making  this  display  of  lights,  United  States 
ships  at  anchor  shall  answer  sucti  signal  by  making  the  same 
display. 

SPEED  INDICATORS. 

221.  Speed  indicators  are  primarily  intended  for  use  in  forma- 
tion. But  as  the  actual  moment  of  leaving  or  joining  a  formation 
is  manifestly  indeterminate,  ships  maneuvering  in  the  presence  of 
other  ships  under  conditions  which  render  it  advisable  that  the 
latter  should  be  apprised  of  their  movements  shall  use  the  speed 
indicators  day  or  night. 

DAY. 

222.  The  dial  speed  of  a  ship  in  formation  may  be  indicated  by 
the  position  of  a  speed  cone,  2^  feet  in  diameter  at  the  base  and 
3  feet  in  height,  hoisted  at  the  signal  yardarm.  As  a  black  cone  is 
not  easily  seen  when  projected  against  the  gray  smoke  pipes, 
cage  masts,  etc.,  the  cones  shall  be  of  a  bright-yellow  color  on 
odd-numbered  ships  in  formation  and  bright  red  on  the  even- 
numbered  ships.  (This  assists  in  recognizing  a  ship  for  signaling 
or  measuring  distance.)     The  significations  are  as  follows: 

Apex  up. — All  the  way  up  to  yardarm,  "  Going  ahead  at  stand- 
ard speed."  About  two-thirds  way  up  to  yardarm,  "  Going  ahead 
at  two-thirds  standard  speed."  (It  should  show  above  the  smoke 
pipes.)  About  one-third  way  up  to  yardarm,  "Going  ahead  at 
one-third  standard  speed."  (It  should  show  well  clear  above 
semaphores,  etc.) 

Apex  down. — Hoisted  part  way  to  yardarm,  **  Engines  backing." 
All  the  way  up  to  yardarm,  "  Engines  backing  full  speed." 

Lowered  out  of  sight,  "  Engines  stopped." 

223.  The  cone  shall  be  hoisted  on  the  weather  side  clear  of 
smoke.  Ships  shall  not  change  the  place  of  hoist  of  the  speed 
cone  during  an  evolution ;  and  when  changing,  the  first  cone  is  not 
to  be  started  until  the  second  one  is  hoisted  to  its  place.  The 
senior  officer  may  direct  the  use  of  two  speed  cones,  one  on  each 
side,  when  in  column  formation,  in  getting  underway  or  coming 
to  anchor  or  when  engaged  in  tactical  drills.  If  the  flagship  hoists 
a  second  cone,  other  vessels  shall  do  so  without  further  orders. 
The  speed  cone  may  be  dispensed  with  entirely  by  the  senior  officer 
when  at  sea  m  open  water ;  this  shall  be  done  by  signal. 


100  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

224.  The  full-speed  pennant  at  yardarm,  next  to  the  speed  cone 
(apex  up),  "Going  ahead  i  knot  or  more  faster  than  standard 
speed."  It  shall  indicate  what  is  being  actually  done,  not  simply 
what  it  is  desired  or  attempted  to  do. 

NIGHT. 

225.  The  night  speed  indicators  consist  of  a  double,  electric  lamp 
at  the  main  truck,  showing  red  or  white.  The  significations  are  as 
follows : 

White  light. — Steady  light:  "Going  ahead  at  standard  speed." 
Single  flashes :  "  Going  ahead  at  one-third  standard  speed." 
Double  flashes :   "  Going  ahead  at  two-thirds  standard  speed." 

Red  light. — Steady  light :  "  Stopped."  ( In  emergency,  toots  for 
10  seconds  with  steam  whistle  also.)  Single  flashes:  "Engines 
backing."  (In  emergency,  three  blasts  with  steam  whistle  also.) 
Double  flashes:  "Engines  backing  full  speed."  (In  emergency, 
three  blasts  with  steam  whistle  also.) 

226.  In  all  cases  of  double  flashing  the  double  flashes  should  be 
well  accentuated. 

227.  The  fore-truck  lights  shall  not  be  used  for  speed  indicators 
except  in  case  of  failure  of  those  on  the  main.  Truck  lights  shall 
not  be  used  for  signaling  except  when  all  other  means  fail. 

228.  At  night, when  under  way  in  formation  each  ship  shall 
carry  the  "  light  for  an  overtaken  vessel  "  prescribed  by  article  lo. 
International  Rules  for  Preventing  Collisions.  This  light  shall  be 
capable  of  being  so  screened  as  to  show  through  only  a  small  arc 
and  of  being  projected  downward  to  illuminate  only  the  wake 
when  advisable  to  restrict  its  range  of  visibility.  In  its  normal 
position  this  light  shall  be  referred  to  as  the  "  stern  light " ;  when 
projected  downward,  as  the  "  wake  light."  A  screened  speed  and 
steering  light  installed  on  the  rail  aft  may  be  used  in  place  of  the 
stern  or  wake  light  under  circumstances  rendering  it  inadvisable 
to  display  the  truck  light  or  other  high  lights.  It  shall  be  capable  of 
being  so  screened  as  to  show  through  only  a  small  arc  and  to  be 
so  projected  as  not  to  be  discernible  outside  of  the  formation;  and 
it  shall  contain  a  red  and  a  white  lamp  capable  of  being  manipu- 
lated in  the  same  way  as  the  regular  night  speed  indicator  to  indi- 
cate going  ahead,  backing,  etc.  The  displays  of  this  light  and  of 
the  stern  and  wake  lights  may  all  be  producible,  as  needed,  in  one 
lantern. 

OIL  LANTERNS. 

229.  In  the  event  of  the  failure  of  all  electric  speed  indicators, 
oil  lanterns  shall  be  used  as  follows:  One  white  lantern  at  the 
yardarm :    "  Going  ahead  at  standard  speed."     One  white  lantern 


The  Deck  anit  3o>t  Book.  ioi 

at  the  yardarm  and  another  halfway  Up  r  "  Go mg  ahead  at  two- 
thirds  speed  or  less."  One  red  lantern  at  the  yardann  :•  "  Engines 
stopped."  (In  emergency,  toots  for  lo  seconds  with  steam  whistle 
also.)  One  red  lantern  at  the  yardarm  and  a  white  lantern  half- 
way up :  "  Engines  backing."  ( In  emergency,  three  blasts  with 
steam  whistle  also.) 

INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  THE  USE  OF  ALL  SYSTEMS  IN 
SIGNALING. 

SIGNALING    WITH    FLAGS. 

230.  To  send  a  flag  signal,  search  in  the  signals,  in  alphabetical 
order,  for  one  of  the  principal  words  of  the  signal  which  it  is 
desired  to  send.  The  signal  letters  will  be  found  in  the  left-hand 
column  abreast  the  signal  meaning;  or,  if  the  signal  has  been 
assigned  letters  under  some  other  word,  the  signal  letters  will  be 
found  at  the  right-hand  side  of  the  page. 

231.  All  commodities,  distances,  weights,  measures,  etc.,  are 
expressed  in  terms  in  accordance  with  the  following  table: 

Table  of  Units. 

Boards,  planking,  etc In  running  feet. 

Fresh  meat,  vegetables,  bread,  dry  or 

canned  commodities  (except  beans), 

and  small  stuff In  pounds. 

Cordage In  fathoms. 

Coal  and  fuel  oil In  tons   (long). 

Water,  oil  (except  fuel),  liquids,  and 

beans In  gallons. 

Salt  beef  and  pork,  etc In  barrels. 

Ammunition In  rounds. 

Distances  at  sea In  sea  miles  or  yards. 

Distances  on  land In  statute  miles  or  yards. 

Depths In  feet    ( unless  specifically 

stated    otherwise    in    the 
signal). 

232.  To  receive  a  flag  signal,  look  in  the  left-hand  column  of 
the  signals  for  the  group  of  letters  in  alphabetical  order  and 
abreast  it  will  be  found  the  message  intended  to  be  conveyed.  If 
understood,  "answer"  by  repeating.  (Boats  and  such  vessels  as 
are  provided  with  only  the  Deck  and  Boat  Book  shall  answer  both 
deck  and  boat  signals  with  the  answering  pennant,  boats  using  the 
hand   pennant ;   ship  flotilla   flag  boats   in   formation   repeat   the 


102  'i'HE    DkCK    AND    BOAT    BoOK. 

Signals  and -hoist  chc*  answering  pennant  when  all  boats  of  the^/ 
flotilla  have  answered.)-  If  this  signal  can  not  be  read,  or  if  it  can 
be  read  but  is  not  understood,  hoist  the  interrogatory. 

233.  In  general,  with  the  exception  of  an  emergency  signal — 
such  as  danger,  breakdown,  man  overboard,  etc. — all  flag  signals 
made  by  any  ship  are  intended  for  ^nd  are  replied  to  by  the  com- 
mander of  the  division  to  which  the  signaling  ship  belongs,  or,  if  it 
does  not  belong  to  any  division,  to  the  senior  oflicer  present.  On 
the  receipt  of  a  signal,  the  division  commander  either  acts  upon  it 
or  repeats  it  to  the  commander  in  chief,  as  the  case  may  require. 
In  the  case  of  an  incoming  ship,  however,  the  senior  officer  shall 
give  or  withhold  permission  to  anchor  and  shall  assign  the  berth, 
unless  specific  instructions  to  do  this  shall  have  been  given  to 
division  or  squadron  or  flotilla  commanders ;  for  which  purpose 
specific  signals  are  provided. 

234.  If  signals  are  flying  on  any  flagship  at  the  time  routine 
reports  are  required  to  be  made,  such  routine  signals  shall  not  be 
hoisted  by  vessels  of  that  division  until  the  signals  on  the  flagship 
in  question  are  hauled  down. 

235.  To  address  a  signal  to  a  particular  ship  or  division  or 
squadron  or  flotilla  or  group,  hoist  the  call  of  the  unit  addressed 
above  the  signal-flag  hoist.  To  exempt  any  ship  or  division  or 
squadron  or  flotilla  or  group,  hoist  the  call  of  the  unit  exempted 
under  the  signal-flag  hoist. 

236.  Except  as  noted  in  article  232  for  vessels  using  only  the 
Deck  and  Boat  Book,  all  flag  signals  made  by  a  flagship  shall  be 
answered  by  each  ship  addressed  hoisting  the  same  signal,  includ- 
ing such  ships  as  may  be  indicated  as  exempt.  In  addition,  divi- 
sion commanders  shall  hoist  the  answering  pennant  when  all  the 
ships  of  their  divisions  have  hoisted  the  signal.  When  in  a 
squadron  formation,  squadron  commanders  shall  hoist  the  answer^ 
ing  pennant  when  all  the  ships  of  their  squadrons  have  done  the 
same. 

237.  Repeating  signals. — Under  special  circumstances  a  com- 
mander in  chief  may  designate  a  certain  ship  to  repeat  signals. 
The  signal  to  such  ship  to  take  that  duty  is  the  second  repeater 
under  the  ship's  call.  In  such  cases  when  a  ship,  not  a  flagship, 
repeats  a  flag  signal  she  shall  exhibit  the  first  repeater  over  the 
call  of  the  ship  signaling  over  the  signal  to  show  that  it  is  a 
repetition ;  and  if  it  is  intended  for  a  particular  ship,  the  repeating 
ship  shall  exhibit  the  call  of  the  ship  for  which  the  message  is  in- 
tended over  the  first  repeater,  or  shall  hoist  at  the  same  time  the 
said  ship's  signal  letters.  When  a  flag  signal  made  by  a  flagship  is 
a  signal  to  all  ships,  and  is  therefore  to  be  repeated  by  all  as 
acknowledgment,  it  is  manifestly  not  necessary  for  the  repeating 
ship  to  exhibit  the  first  repeater  over  it. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  103 

238.  In  repeating  signals  from  an  individual  ship  to  the  flagship 
/  of  the  commander  in  chief,  a  division  commander  shall  hoist  first 

repeater  over  the  call  of  the  vessel  signaling  over  the  signal ;  but 
in  repeating  the  reply  he  shall  not  hoist  the  repeater.  For  example  : 
Should  the  Virginia,  in  the  fourth  division,  hoist  a  signal  upon 
which  only  the  commander  in  chief  could  act,  it  would  be  answered 
by  the  Georgia,  flagship  of  the  fourth  division,  which  would  then 
hoist  "  first  repeater,  over  Virginia's  call  over  the  signal,"  which 
would  be  answered  by  the  Wyoming,  flagship  of  the  commander 
in  chief. 

239.  A  reply  to  a  signal  which  is  repeated  is  addressed  to  the 
division  or  squadron  commander  who  repeated  it.  For  example  ^ 
Taking  the  case  as  above,  supposing  the  reply  of  the  commander 
in  chief  to  the  signal  to  be  in  the  affirmative,  the  signal  made  by 
the  Wyoming  would  be  "  Virginia's  call,  Affirmative."  This  would 
be  intended  for  the  Georgia,  but  having  the  Virginia's  call  above  it 
the  Georgia  would,  instead  of  answering  it,  repeat  it,  "  Virginia's 
call,  Affirmative,"  without  repeater.  This  would  be  at  the  same 
time  an  acknowledgment  to  the  commander  in  chief  and  a  c^ll  to 
the  Virginia.  The  Wyoming  would  then  haul  down ;  the  Georgia 
would  keep  the  signal  flying  until  the  Virginia  acknowledged  it. 
In  this  way  the  squadron  or  division  commanders  never  use  the 
repeater  when  repeating  signals  from  a  senior  to  a  ship  under  their 
immediate  commands. 

240.  It  will  sometimes  happen,  on  detached  service  or  otherwise, 
that  one  vessel  may  wish  to  communicate  with  another  not  within 
signal  distance  by  means  of  an  intermediate  vessel,  available 
through  position  for  transmitting  messages  by  signal.  In  such 
cases  the  third  repeater  hoisted  below  a  call  is  a  request  to  the  ship 
designated  to  repeat  the  signal,  which  will  be  hoisted  at  the  same 
time  and  will  appear  with  the  call  of  the  ship  addressed.  The 
repeating  ship  then  repeats  the  signal  according  to  the  rules  above 
and  repeats  back  the  acknowledgment  or  the  reply  to  the  ship 
originating  the  signal. 

241.  Vessels  of  the  Navy  meeting  at  sea  shall  make  their  calls 
as  soon  as  within  signal  distance.  As  soon  as  one  vessel  reads 
the  other's  signal  she  shall  "  Answer."  If  using  flag  signals,  the 
ship  which  answers  shall  not  haul  down  her  signal  until  answered 
by  the  other  ship.  At  night,  as  a  preliminary,  vessels  shall  make 
Cornet,  and  when  answered  shall  make  their  calls.  In  case  two  or 
more  vessels  are  in  company  the  senior  alone  shall  make  her  call 
and  answer  that  of  the  communicating  vessel.  A  vessel  coming 
into  port  shall  be  the  first  to  make  her  call.  In  case  a  ship  is  so 
situated  that  she  can  see  the  signal  of  an  incoming  ship  before  the 
senior  officer  present,  she  shall  repeat  the  signal  of  the  arrivin'^ 


104  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

ship.  When  this  is  answered  by  the  senior  officer,  she  shall  repeat 
the  call  of  the  senior  officer's  ship  to  the  one  comin.e:  in. 

242.  Numeral  signals,  by  any  method  of  signaHng,  are  con- 
crete numbers.  The  answering  pennant  is  used  as  a  divisional 
point  to  represent  the  divisions  of  mixed  quantities  and  also  as  the 
decimal  point.  Thus,  in  signaling  amounts  of  United  States  money 
or  decimar  fractions,  it  represents  the  decimal  point. 

243.  As  a  number  greater  than  9,999  can  not  be  made  by  one 
numeral  hoist,  a  special  signal  in  the  Signal  Book  is  provided  which 
means :  "  The  numeral  which  follows  represents  thousands.  A 
second  numeral  following  represents  units."  For  example:  (the 
signal) — 71  means  71,000;  or  (the  signal) — 71 — 454  means  71,454. 

244.  Compass  signals  given  in  the  table  in  the  General  Signals 
express  true  azimuths,  whether  courses  or  bearings ;  those  given 
in  the  Boat  Signals  express  magnetic  courses  or  bearmgs. 

245.  Soundings  shall  be  reported  by  signal  in  feet,  unless 
specifically  stated  otherwise  in  the  signal.  The  numeral  flag  above 
represents  the  number  of  feet  (or  fathoms)  when  bottom  is 
reached ;  below,  the  depth  reached  with  "  No  bottom." 

246.  Time  signals. — The  time  of  day  shall  be  signaled  by  the 
signals  in  the  General  or  Boat  Signals,  which  give  a  separate  signal 
for  each  hour.  The  minutes  shall  be  indicated  by  a  numeral  below 
the  signal.  To  signal  seconds  of  time,  display  the  numeral  indi- 
cating the  seconds  in  a  separate  hoist ;  but  in  this  case  there  should 
be  two  flags  to  indicate  minutes  and  two  to  indicate  seconds,  thus : 
"  To  make  I  hour  00  minutes  03  seconds,  a.  m.,"  the  signal  would 
be  "  (signal) — 00"  on  one  hoist  (indicating  i  hour  00  minutes), 
and  "03,"  indicating  the  seconds  on  the  other. 

247.When  two  or  more  ships  are  in  company  the  senior  officer 
present  shall  af  6.55  a.  m.  make  the  uniform  signal,  hauling  down 
the  signal  at  7  a.  m.  as  a  time  signal  for  the  purpose  of  comparing 
deck  clocks.  In  case  it  is  not  necessary  to  make  a  uniform  signal, 
the  preparatory  flag  shall  be  used  for  the  time  signal,  and  the 
uniform  shall  be  understood  to  be  the  same  as  on  the  preceding 

X' 

248.  Colors  signal. — In  port  and  under  way  when  preparing  to 

hoist  colors,  when  two  or  more  ships  are  in  company,  the  senior 
officer  present  shall,  at  7.45  a.  m.,  hoist  the  preparatory  flag  over  a 
numeral  to  indicate  to  the  other  ships  present  the  number  of  the 
ensign  to  be  hoisted  at  colors.  Thus  :  "  Preparatory  4  "  will  indi- 
cate that  a  "  No.  4  ensign  and  jack  "  shall  be  worn  during  the  day. 
(Auxiliary  vessels  and  torpedo  and  other  small  craft  shall  display 
colors  of  size  corresponding  to  those  designated  for  large  ships.) 
If  the  signal  is  hoisted  after  8  a.  m.  colors,  ships  shall  answer  and, 
upon  its  being  hauled  down,  shall  promptly  shift  colors  to  the 
size  ordered. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


105 


249.  In  port  the  preparatory  flag  shall  be  hoisted  at  the  yardarm 
of  the  ship  of  the  senior  officer  present,  morning  and  evening,  at 
the  time  the  call  for  colors  is  sounded,  and  it  shall  be  started  from 
the  point  of  hoist  at  the  same  instant  that  the  ensign  is  started  up 
or  down  and  with  the  first  note  of  the  national  anthem. 

SIGNALING  BY  OTHER  METHODS  THAN  FLAG  SIGNALING. 

250.  When  a  signal  is  characterized  as  being  modified  by  the 
negative  or  preparatory  or  annulling  or  interrogatory  or  affirmative 
above  it  or  by  a  numeral  signal  below  it  (in  flag  signaling),  the 
modification  is  expressed  in  all  other  modes  of  signaling  by  pre- 
ceding the  signal  with  those  that  are  stated  to  be  above  it  and 
following  it  with  those  that  are  stated  to  be  below  it. 

251.  All  signals  shall  be  considered  official  unless  preceded  by 
the  letters  **  UN."  Unofficial  signals  shall  in  all  cases  be  prefaced 
by  the  letters  "  UN,"  and  may  be  made  by  any  system  except  the 
Ardois  or  Very.  Official  signals  shall  not  be  addressed  nor  signed 
unless  necessary  for  perfect  understanding;  they  shall  be  under- 
stood to  come  from  the  senior  line  officer  on  board  the  sending 
ship  or  station  and  to  be  addressed  to  the  senior  line  officer  on 
board  the  receiving  ship  or  station  unless  otherwise  stated  in  the 
signal.  No  unofficial  message  shall  be  transmitted  by  any  method 
of  signals  unless  signed  by  and  addressed  to  an  officer  except  by 
special  permission  in  each  case. 

252.  Night  signals  to  boats  are  answered  by  a  hand  lantern  or 
torch  or  Very's  red  star. 

THE  DOT   AND  DASH    CODE. 

253.  The  Dot  and  Dash  Code  comprises  the  alphabet  and 
numerals  of  the  International  Morse  Code,  together  with  certain 
additional  symbols  and  secondary  meanings,  as  follows : 


Alphabet. 

A 

J  , . 

S 

B 

K 

T 

C 

L 

U 

D 

M 

V 

E  . 

N 

w 

F  . 

o 

X 

G 

P 

Y 

H  .  .  .  . 

Q .  ., 

z . 

I  .  . 

.  R  .  —  . 

io6 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 
.  Numerals. 


6  — 

7  — 


Double  interval  (sig- 
nature also  preced- 
ed by  **  Sig.  Inter* 
val"). 


Additional  symbols. 

Cornet I   Code  interval  or  designator 

Letters  (follow) .    |  .  —  .  

Signals  (follow)  .  . 

Conventional  Signals. 

For  use  in  all  methods  of  signals  except  flag  hoists  and  Very. 

Exceptions ;    Ardois 
and  Semaphore. 

End  of  word Interval. 

End  of  sentence Double  interval. 

End  of  message Triple  interval. 

Signal  separating  preamble     —  ...  — 

from    address ;    address 

from    text;     text    from 

signature. 

Acknowledgment    —  .   (R). 

Error A  * 

Interrogatory ..     O* 

Repeat  after   (word)    ....Interrogatory, 
A   (word). 

Repeat  last  word  Interrogatory 

twice. 

Repeat  last  message Interrogatory' 

three  times. 

Send  faster   .^ ORQ. 

Send  slower  .' QRS. 

Cease  sending  QRT. 

Wait  a  moment —  .  . 

Execute IX,    IX. 

Move  to  your  right MR. 

Move  to  your  left ML. 

Move  up  MU. 

Move  down   MD. 

Finished  (end  of  work) —  .  —    None. 

*  Upper  light  pulsated  in   Ardois ;   flags  or  arms  chopped  in 
semaphore. 


None. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


107 


Secondary  Meanings. 

Used  only  in  flag  hoists,  Ardois,  Semaphore,  Very  or  in  trans- 
mitting Navy  Flag  Code  by  other  systems.  (The  use  of  Navy 
Flag  Code  is  indicated  by  "  Signals  follow  "    .  . ) 


Negative  (K)  —  .  — 
Preparatory  (L)  .  —  . 
Annulling   (N)   —  . 


Interrogatory   (O) 
Affirmative   (P)    .  • 


'  Intervals  "  are  expressed  as  follows  in  the  various  systems : 


Double 
Interval. 


Triple 
Interval. 


Interval. 

Radio,   flashing  or    .  —  .  —  .  —  .  . 

occulting  light..      (The  "interval"  is  not  used  between  words 
in  spelled-out  messages.) 

Whistle Very  long  blast .  .  , 

Bell •    . 

Wigwag   Front. 


(twice). 
Semaphore Flags    crossed  2  chop-chop 


or  machine 
closed. 


signals. 


Ardois 


—  (twice). 


(3   times). 

3  chop-chop 

withdraw  flag 

or    close 

machine  and 

indicator   arm. 

(3    times). 


254.  The  wigwag  system  is  directly  applicable  to  signaling  with 
hand  flag,  hand  torch  or  electric  portable,  swinging  hand  lantern, 
and  beam  of  searchlight.  The  Dot  and  Dash  Code  as  given  above 
is   used. 

255.  Any  wigwag  signal  is  a  spelled-out  message,  unless  pre- 
ceded by  "  Signals,"  in  which  case  it  is  to  be  sought  in  the  General 
Signal  Book.    A  return  to  spelling  is  indicated  by  "  Letters." 

A  motion  to  the  right  is  a  dot  (.)  and  a  motion  to  the  left 
is  a  dash  ( — ).  One  motion  to  the  front  is  "  Interval  "  ;  two  such 
motions  "  Double  interval  " ;  three  such  motions  "  Triple  interval." 

256.  In  the  wigwag  system  there  is  one  position  and  three 
motions.  "  Position  "  is  with  the  flag  or  other  signal  appliance 
held  vertically,  the  signal  man  facing  squarely  toward  the  station 


io8  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

with  which  it  is  desired  to  communicate.  In  the  first  motion 
("dot"  or  .),  the  flag  is  waved  to  the  right  of  the  sender,  and 
shall  embrace  an  arc  of  90°,  starting  from  the  vertical  and  return 
ing  to  it,  and  shall  be  made  in  a  plane  at  right  angles  to  the  line 
connecting  the  two  stations.  The  second  motion  ("  dash"  or  — ) 
is  a  similar  motion  to  the  left  of  the  sender.  To  make  the  third 
motion,  "  Interval,"  the  flag  is  waved  downward  directly  in  front 
of  the  sender  and  instantly  returned  to  "  position."  To  prevent 
the  flag  fouling  on  the  staff,  make  a  scoop  in  making  the  side 
motions.  Make  the  first  part  of  the  scoop  to  the  front  if  the  wind 
is  behind  the  sender  and  to  the  rear  if  the  wind  is  in  front.  Be 
careful  not  to  brmg  the  flag  beyond  the  vertical  at  the  end  of  a  mo- 
tion unless  the  immediately  succeeding  motion  is  to  the  other  side. 

257.  It  is  important  to  obtain  a  good  background,  and  to  select 
a  color  of  flag  which  will  afl^ord  the  most  marked  contrast  with  the 
background ;  to«  this  end  the  red  or  the  white  flag  shall  be  used  as 
found  best  from  the  standpoint  of  visibility.  When  signaling  to  a 
considerable  distance  with  a  hand  torch,  electric  portable,  or  hand 
lantern,  a  footlight  should  be  used  as  a  point  of  reference  to  the 
motions ;  otherwise  the  methods  are  the  same  as  for  the  hand  flag. 
With  an  oil  hand  lantern  a  variation  is  permissible,  as  the  lantern  is 
more  conveniently  swung  out  and  upward  by  hand  from  the  foot- 
light  for  "  dot  "  and  "  dash  "  and  raised  vertically  for  "  Interval." 

258.  To  call  a  station,  face  it  and  make  its  call ;  if  necessary  to 
attract  attention,  wave  the  flag  (or  torch),  making  the  call  at 
frequent  intervals.  The  station  called  makes  "  acknowledgment  " : 
the  sending  station  then  makes  "  acknowledgment "  and  proceeds 
with  the  message.  At  night  ^ach  ship  called  shall  acknowledge 
by  making  her  own  call  letter;  the  calling  ship  then  makes  her 
own  call  letter  which  the  receiving  ships  repeat;  the  calling  ship 
then  makes  acknowledgment  and  proceeds  with  the  message. 

259.  A  day  wigwag  message  for  the  entire  force  or  for  a  group, 
flotilla,  squadron,  division,  or  ship  is  indicated  by  the  display,  half 
yardarm  high,  of  the  cornet  or  of  the  proper  call.  This  is  acknowl- 
edged by  the  ship  or  ships  called  hoisting  the  answering  pennant 
halfway ;  when  all  ships  have  thus  answered,  the  message  is  pro- 
ceeded with.  At  the  end  of  a  message  sent  as  prescribed,  the  flag- 
ship hoists  the  call  or  the  cornet,  as  the  case  may  be,  close  up  to  the 
yardarm,  whereupon,  if  the  message  is  understood,  the  receiving 
ship  or  ships  run  the  answering  pennant  close  up  to  the  yardarm. 
The  hauling  down  of  the  call  or  cornet  by  the  flagship  is  the 
acknowledgment  of  the  answers,  and  the  receiving  ship  or  ships 
then  haul  down  their  answering  pennants. 

260.  Any  ship,  division,  squadron,  flotilla,  or  group  may  be 
exempted   from   any   wigwag   call   by   displaying  its   call   under 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  log 

annulling  under  the  call  of  the  larger  force  called.  In  this  case 
the  unit  exempted  shall  not  answer. 

261.  If,  in  the  course  of  a  signal,  the  sender  discovers  that  he 

has   made  an  error,   he   should   make   " interval/' 

after  which  he  proceeds  with  the  signal,  beginning  with  the  word 
in  which  the  error  occurred.  If,  in  the  course  of  a  signal  addressed 
to  a  single  ship,  the  receiver  does  not  understand  a  word,  char- 
acter, or  display,  he  should  "break  in"  with  the  characters 
corresponding  to  "  repeat  last  word  " ;  or,  to  have  a  whole  mes- 
sage repeated,  he  should  make  the  displays  which  signify  "  repeat 
last  message."  In  the  case  of  a  message  addressed  to  several 
ships,  an  individual  ship  failing  to  understand  a  word  shall 
not  break  in,  but  shall  continue  to  read  as  much  of  the  message 
as  possible,  and  after  the  whole  message  has  been  sent  request 
shall  be  made  to  the  next  ship,  or  to  the  division  commander,  or 
to  the  commander-in-chief  to  repeat  the  missing  portion.  ^ 

262.  The  second  repeater  under  a  call  is  an  order  to  the  snip 
indicated  to  repeat  the  message  to  the  ship  whose  call  is  shown 
below  the  repeater. 

263.  A  signal  made  to  one  or  more  ships  to  be  passed  down  the 
line  or  column  is  conveniently  referred  to  as  a  P.  D.  L.  message. 

FLASHING    OR    OCCULTING-LIGHT    SYSTEM. 

264.  The  Dot  and  Dash  Code  is  used.  Any  signal  is  a  spelled- 
out  message  unless  preceded  by  "  Signals,"  in  which  case  it  is  to  be 
sought  in  the  General  Signal  Book.  A  return  to  spelling  is  indi- 
cated by  "  Letters."  Use  a  short  flash  for  "  dot,"  a  long  flash  for 
"  dash,-'  and  a  long,  steady  display  for  "  Interval." 

Double  interval  is Triple  interval  is .    The 

interval  is  not  used  between  words  in  spelled-out  messages. 

265.  To  call  the  whole  force  or  a  ship,  division,  squadron, 
flotilla,  or  group  make  cornet  or  the  calls  until  acknowledged. 
Each  ship  called  acknowledges  by  making  her  own  call  letter.  The 
calling  ship  then  makes  her  own  call  letter,  which  the  receiving 
ships  repeat.  The  calling  ship  then  makes  a  steady  light  until 
answered  by  a  steady  hght,  and  then  proceeds  with  the  message. 
To  call  two  or  more  ships,  call  one  ship  until  answered,  then  call 
the  others,  one  at  a  time,  until  all  have  answered. 

SOUND    SYSTEM. 

(Note.— Not  to  be  used  except  in  emergencies  or  except  for 
exercise  in  unfrequented  regions.) 

266.  The  Dot  and  Dash  Code  is  used.  Except  when  made  by 
the  steam  whistle,  any  signal  is  a  spelled-out  message  unless  pre- 
ceded by  '*  Signals,"  in  which  case  it  is  to  be  sought  in  the  General 


no  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

Signal  Book.  A  return  to  spelling  is  indicated  by  "  Letters."  Use 
a  toot  or  very  short  blast  for  "  dot,"  and  a  longer  blast  for  *'  dash," 
and  a  much  longer  blast  for  "  Interval."  In  using  a  bell  or  other 
appliance  by  which  t)ie  duration  of  the  sound  cannot  be  con- 
trolled, use  two  strokes  in  quick  succession  for  "  dash  "  and  three 

strokes   for   "  Interval."     Double   interval   is     Triple 

interval  is When  signaling  by  bell,  triple  interval  be- 
comes   .     ..          ..     .     The  interval  is  not  used  between  words 

in  spelled-out  messages. 

2G7.  To  call  the  whole  force,  or  a  ship,  division,  squadron, 
flotilla,  or  group,  sound  cornet  or  the  calls  until  acknowledged. 
Acknowledgment  is  made  by  sounding  own  call  letter  immediately 
after    .  — .     .  — .    "Interval."      The    calling    ship    then    sounds 

. .  "  Interval "  and  own  call  letter,  and  proceeds  with 

the  message.  To  call  two  or  more  ships,  call  one  ship  until 
an^iwered ;  then  call  the  others,  one  at  a  time,  until  all  have 
answered.  Two  or  more-  ships  within  hearing  of  each  other  shall 
never  attempt  to  make  signals  at  the  same  time. 

FOG   BELL. 

268.  Ships  at  anchor  shall  in  thick  weather  sound  the  ship's  bell 
in  accordance  with  the  International  Rules  for  Preventing  Col- 
lisions. When  boats  are  away  from  the  ship  and  are  expected 
to  return,  the  ship's  call  letter  may  be  sounded  at  intervals  for 
their  guidance,  provided  such  call  is  not  the  same  as  that  of  any 
neighboring  permanent  fog  bell  on  the  shore  or  on  board  a  Hght- 
vessel. 

SIGNALING    WITH    STEAM    WHISTLE. 

(Note. — Not  to  be  used  except  in  emergencies,  or  except  for 
exercise  in  unfrequented  regions.  This  does  not  apply  to  the 
signals  indicating  change  of  course  or  stopping.) 

269.  See  that  the  condensed  steam  is  blown  clear  of  the  pipe 
before  starting.     Make  the  calls  as  directed  for  sound  signals. 

270.  While  a  signal  or  message  is  being  sent  by  a  vessel,  the 
sounding  of  a  whistle  by  other  vessels  within  hearing  distance 
shall  cease,  or  be  limited  to  sounding  it  for  strictly  navigation 
purposes  in  accordance  with  the  '*  Rules  of  the  Road." 

^71.  Ships  answering  a  general  inquiry  from  the  flagship  shall 
answer  in  the  order  of  their  proximity  to  the  flagship. 

272.  All  signals  sent  by  steam  whistle  shall  be  flag  code  signals 
unless  preceded  by  "  Letters."  The  code  "  interval  "  shall  be  used 
to  separate  code  groups. 

273.  To  change  the  direction  of  the  head  of  the  column,  the 
flagship  if  leading,  shall  indicate  by  one  short  blast  if  the  course 
is  i3eing  changed  to  the  right  and  by  two  short  blasts  if  it  is  being 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  hi 

changed  to  the  left,  and  shall  then  signal  the  new  course  to  be 
steered  (true),  taken  from  the. table  of  compass  signals.  If  not 
leading,  the  flagship  shall  call  the  leader  and  then  make  the  signal 
for  the  desired  change  of  course,  and  finally  the  Execute  (IX). 
In  thick  weather  and  at  night  each  ship  in  column  shall  indicate 
in  turn  by  the  whistle  the  moment  of  putting  the  rudder  over ; 
but  in  the  daytime,  with  clear  weather,  ships  other  than  the  leader 
shall  not  make  this  signal. 

274.  To  change  the  speed  of  the  fleet  the  flagship  shall  make 
Cornet,  then  the  signal  corresponding  to  the  new  speed,  followed 
by  the  Execute.  Except  in  cases  of  emergency,  changes  of  speed 
should  not  be  executed  until  all  ships  have  answered. 

275.  Signals  by  steam  whistle  shall  be  transmitted  in  the  follow- 
ing manner :  The  flagship,  desiring  to  send  a  signal,  sounds 
"  cornet "  or  the  desired  call.    Each  ship  in  succession  hearing  it 

acknowledges  by  making  .  —  .     .  —  .     ,  followed  by  her 

own  call  letters,  beginning  with  the  one  next  in  formation.  All 
ships  then  listen  to  the  signal  and  endeavor  to  read  and  under- 
stand it.  Those  that  do  understand  it  shall  acknowledge,  in  their 
order  in  formation,  beginning  with  the  vessel  nearest  the  flagship, 
by  signaling  "acknowledgment,"  followed  by  their  call.  If  any 
vessel  notes  that  her  next  beyond  in  the  formation  does  not 
acknowledge,  she  shall  repeat  the  signal  without  delay.  If  only 
the'  first  ship,  for  instance,  heard  it  and  understood  it,  she  would 
repeat  it  to  the  next  ship  in  the  formation,  and  so  on.  Whe- 
the  last  ship  of  the  formation  has  received  the  signal,  her  acknow'- 
edgment,  followed  by  her  call,  shall  be  repeated  from  ship  to  ship 
back  to  the  flagship.  The  repetition  of  this  signal  will  be  both 
an  answer  to  the  repeating  ship  and  a  call  to  the  next  ahead  lo 
repeat  it  on.  The  commander  in  chief  will  thus  know  that  all 
his  force  understands  the  signal.  If  he  gets  back  the  answering 
call  of  some  other  ships,  he  knows  just  how  much  of  his  forc^ 
understands  the  signal.  The  "Execute"  is  then  sounded,  to  be 
repeated  by  each  ship  down  the  formation.  For  example,  the 
flagship  wishes  to  signal  "  Anchor."  She  would  make  cornet, 
which  would  be  answered  down  the  line  as  far  as  heard.  She 
would  then  make  the  desired  signal.  This  might  be  received  and 
answered  by  four  ships,  which  would  be  shown  by  the  fourth 
ship  acknowledging.  As  the  fifth  ship  did  not  acknowledge,  it 
would  be  the  duty  of  the  fourth  ship  to  repeat  the  message. 

THE    ARDOIS    SYSTEM.* 

276.  The  Dot  and  Dash  Code,  except  numerals,  is  transmitted 
by  the  Ardois  system,  a  four-lamp  system  of  incandescent  lamps 
in  a  vertical  hoist,  showing  either  red  or  white  lights,  singly  or  in 

*  The  Ardois  equipment  is  being  removed  from  ships  and  will  not  be  used 
in    the   future. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


combination  to  the  number  of  four  lamps,  by  which  any  character 
is  made  in  a  single  display.  A  red  light  stands  for  a  "  dot,"  and 
a  white  light  for  a  "  dash."  The  upper  hght  is  pulsated  for  the 
secondary  meanings.  The  upper  light  is  not  pulsated  in  making 
"Acknowledge  (R)  "  and  "Execute  (IX)." 

Conventional  signals  of  five  or  six  elements  cannot  be  made 
by  Ardois  and  must  be  spelled  out. 

Exceptions. 

Error "A"   (Upper  light  pulsated). 

Interrogatory    "  O  "  (Upper  light  pulsated). 


277. 

The  Ardois 

alphabet 

Char- 
acter. 

Bis- 

play. 

Secondary 

meaning 

(upper 

light  pul- 

Char- 
acter. 

Dis- 
play. 

Secondary 

meaning 

(upper 

light  pul- 

Char- 
acter. 

Dis- 
play. 

Secondary 
meaning 

ligh?miJ- 
sated) 

A 

B 

E....:. 
P...... 

cr. 

H 

I 

J 

K.      .. 

fR..... 
W..,.. 
W. 
R. 
R. 

R; 
w 
R. 

|W 
R. 
fW, 

k. 

IR- 

R. 
fR. 

R. 

w. 

R. 

W. 

w. 

R. 
R 
R 
R 
R 
/R. 

I 

W. 

w. 

R..-.. 
W 

|Error. 
iNegative 

n;..,.. 

0...... 

p...., 

Q.v... 

R 

S 

T 

U 

V 

fR.... 
W.... 
R.... 
R.... 
W. 

\w.. 
rw.... 

\R.... 
W.... 
W.... 

w 

R.... 
W.... 
W.... 
R.... 
W.... 
W.... 
R.... 
W.... 
R.... 

hv.... 

[R.... 

R.--. 
^R.... 

R..-. 

W.... 
fR...- 

R..-. 

W.... 

R.... 

R.... 

R.... 

W.... 

IPreimrar 
'    tory, 

\An  nul- 
ling. 

Interrog- 
atory. 

Affirma- 
tive. 

1. 

2. 

3. 
4. 
5. 

6. 

W...... 

X. ...... 

Y. ...... 

Z 

Cornet . . 

Letters 
(foUow). 

Signals 
(follow). 

IntervaL 

fR.... 
W.... 
W.... 

w..:. 

R..., 
R.... 
W..., 
W.... 
R.... 
W.... 
W.... 
W.... 
W.... 
R.... 

R.*:. 

W. 

w. 

W. 

w. 
w. 
w. 
w. 

R. 
R.. 
R. 

W. 

w. 

R.... 
W.... 
R.... 
W.... 

7. 
& 
9. 
0. 

Ipesig'^ 
1    nator. 

"  C  "  no  longer  has  a  secondary  meaning. 
"  R  "  pulsated  signifies  2. 

"  R  "    used    to    signify    "  acknowledge  "    is    a    conventional    signal,    not    a 
secondary  meaning,  and  is  not  pulsated 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  113 

278.  The  numeral  "4"  is  also  a  night  speed  indicator.  Care 
shall  be  taken  not  to  make  numerals  in  this  way  if  there  is  any 
possibility  of  confusion  when  underway  in  formation.  It  will 
generally  be  more  convenient  to  spell  out  the  number ;  but  cases 
may  arise  when  these  secondary  meanings  will  be  useful,  such  as 
in  recalling  a  boat  or  under  conditions  that  render  it  advisable  to 
have  each  display  repeated  by  all  ships  before  making  the  next. 

279.  "  Interval "  shall  be  made  once  to  indicate  the  end  of  a 
word,  "  Double  interval "  for  the  end  of  a  sentence,  and  "  Triple 
interval "  for  the  end  of  a  message.  In  this  system,  "  Double 
interval "  is  two  intervals  and  "  Triple  interval "  is  three  intervals. 

280.  "Signature  follows"  is  transmitted  by  Sig  "  Irterval." 

281.  To  indicate  that  an  error  has  been  made,  make  "  interval," 
then  "  error,"  then  "  interval,"  and  begin  with  the  word  in  which 
the  error  occurred. 

282.  (Struck  out,  Department  correction.) 

283.  To  annul  a  signal  when  the  "  Execute  "  is  displayed,  keep 
the  signal  turned  on  and  make  "  Annulling  "  by  a  second  set  or 
by  blinker  or  other  separate  means ;  when  this  has  been  answered 
by  all  ships,  turn  off  the  "  Annulling "  and  the  "  Execute "  to- 
gether. 

284.  Any  message  is  a  spelled-out  message  unless  preceded  by 
"  Signals  " ;  the  *'  Letters  "  call  therefore  shall  not  be  made  except 
to  commence  spelling  out  z   ter  a  flag  code  signal. 

285.  To  call  the  whole  force,  or  a  ship,  division,  squadron, 
flotilla,  or  group,  turn  on  "  Cornet"  (steady  display),  or  make  the 
desired  call  (flashing)  until  acknowledged.  To  call  two  or  more 
ships,  call  one  ship  until  answered ;  then  call  the  others,  one  at 
a  time,  until  all  have  answered.  Each  ship  called  acknowledges 
by  making  her  own  call ;  the  calling  ship  then  makes  her  own 
call,  which  the  receiving  ships  repeat.  The  calling  ship  then 
proceeds  with  the  message. 

286.  Each  display  of  a  flag  code  signal  shall  be  repeated  by  the 
ships  receiving  the  signal,  and  this  repeating  takes  the  place  of 
any  other  acknowledgment. 

287.  When  spelling  out,  only  the  "  repeating  ships  "  shall  repeat 
the  signal,  but  all  shall  turn  on  the  "  interval "  at  the  end  of  each 
sentence  and  of  the  message  to  indicate  that  it  is  understood.  If 
the  whole  or  any  part  is  not  understood,  the  interrogatory  shall 
be  displayed. 

288.  If,  because  of  a  message  being  very  important,  or  for  any 
other  reason,  the  flagship  should  wish  the  display  repeated  in  cases 
where  this  would  not  be  done  under  these  instructions,  "  Repeat " 


114  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

shall  be  made  immediately  after  the  call,  after  which  each  display 
as  it  is  made  shall  be  repeated  by  the  receiving  ships. 

289.  When  many  ships  are  in  company,  it  is  not  advisable  for 
the  flagship  to  stop  a  signal  to  repeat  to  an  individual  ship  unless 
the  signal  is  a  tactical  one  involving  an  immediate  movement  of 
the  ships  of  the  formation,  in  which  case  the  flagship  shall  repeat 
at  once,  as  requested.  In  other  ca'ses  the  division  or  squadron 
commander  shall  repeat  the  signal  to  the  ship  failing  to  receive  it 
after  the  flagship  has  finished  her  message. 

290.  When  the  interrogatory  is  displayed  by  a  flagship  without 
connection  with  any  other  signal,  all  ships  in  that  command  shall 
display  their  calls  to  indicate  their  location. 

291.  Signals  which  require  a  change  of  formation,  course, 
speed,  or  order,  or  the  execution  of  which  must  manifestly  be 
simultaneous,  shall  be  considered  preparatory  and  shall  not  be 
executed  until  the  turning  of  the  "  Execute."  All  other  signals 
are  intended  for  immediate  execution  or  reply,  unless  the  message 
itself  states  or  distinctly  implies  otherwise. 

292.  In  pulsating  the  upper  light  and  in  flashing  an  entire  dis- 
play, the  lights  must  be  left  turned  off  and  turned  on  for  a 
sensible  length  of  time — the  former  to  permit  the  glow  to  die  out 
and  leave  the  interval  of  darkness  appreciable  and  the  latter  to 
give  time  for  it  to  be  easily  read.  A  display  shall  not  be  turned 
on  until  the  preceding  one  has  been  turned  off. 

293.  It  is  particularly  important  that  flag  code  signals  shall  be 
made  slowly  and  in  as  perfect  a  manner  as  is  possible,  and  every 
attempt  at  undue  speed  should  be  discouraged. 

294.  All  lights,  except  speed  indicators,  which  might  cause 
confusion  or  interfere  in  any  way  with  the  signal  lights  must  be 
extinguished  or  covered  while  signaling. 

295.  The  calls  having  been  answered,  proceed  with  the  mes- 
sage, prefacing  it  with  the  "  Signals  "  or  "  Letters  "  call  if  required. 
Example :  The  commander-in-chief  desires  to  execute  the  move- 
ment "  Squadrons  change  course  to  right  45°."  The  signals  are 
as  follows:  "Cornet"  (answered  by  the  same  display  on  all 
ships)  ;  "  Signals,"  "  Interval,"  signal  for  squadrons  change  course 
to  right  45°,  "Interval"  three  times.  Each  display  is  repeated 
by  all  ships.  When  nearly  ready  to  execute  the  evolution  the 
"  Execute  "•shall  be  turned  on  and  repeated  by  every  ship,  and  the 
movement  shall  be  executed  upon  turning  off  the  "  Execute." 

296.  A  tactical  movement  may  be  signaled  to  the  fleet  by  a 
speiled-out  message. 


The  Deck  ^AND  Boat  Book.  115^ 

297.  When  a  ship  intervenes  between  or  masks  the  signal  lights 
of  two  others  desiring  to  communicate,  the  intervening  ship  must 
repeat  the  displays. 

298.  But  one  course  of  messages  is  to  be  maintained  at  the  same 
time,  except  in  cases  of  great  urgency,  and  in  that  event  only 
when  the  receiving  ships  are  all  on  such  bearings  that  the  signals 
made  by  one  set  of  lights  will  not  interfere  with  those  being  sent 
by  the  other. 

299.  If  a  communication  is  going  on  between  two  or  more  ships 
and  the  flagship  makes  a  call,  all  signaling  must  cease  until  the 
message  sent  by  the  flagship  is  finished. 

300.  If  it  becomes  necessary  to  put  a  signal  message  into  cipher, 
the  marking  of  the  keyboard  shall  not  be  changed  to  accomplish 
the  object. 

THE   SEMAPHORE   SYSTEM. 

301.  Signals  may  be  transmitted  by  the  two-arm  semaphore 
method,  using  either  hand  flags  or  machine.  With  the  machine,  a 
third  arm  or  "  indicator  "  is  displayed  on  the  right  of  the  sender 
(the  left  as  viewed  by  the  receiver)  as  shown  in  the  diagrams 
to  indicate  which  is  the  sender's  right  and  which  his  left ;  at  night 
a  red  light,  screened  to  the  rear,  indicates  the  direction  of  sending. 

302.  The  machine  will  be  mounted  on  the  ends  of  the  bridge, 
if  practicable,  otherwise  at  some  available  point  so  situated  that  it 
may  be  seen  through  the  greatest  arc  of  the  horizon.  By  means  of 
electric  lights  installed  on  the  vanes,  the  machine  is  made  available 
for  night  as  well  as  for  day  signaling.  The  vanes  of  the  sema- 
phore machine  shall  be  painted  yellow. 

303.  Hand  flags  shall  be  from  12  to  15  inches  square,  of  blue 
with  a  white  square  (similar  to  the  alphabet  flag  "  P  ")  or  red  and 
yellow  diagonally  (similar  to  the  alphabet  flag  "O"),  the  one  to 
be  used  depending  upon  the  background ;  they  shall  be  attached  to 
a  light  wooden  staff  about  two  feet  in  length. 

304.  With  hand  flags  and  machine  all  positions  and  motions  are 
the  same  for  both  methods  with  the  exception  of  "  Interval." 

305.  Secondary  meanings  are  imparted  by  holding  the  character 
for  an  appreciable  time  and  agitating  the  arms  or  flags  in  that 
position ;  or,  as  may  be  preferable  at  times  with  the  more  im- 
portant ones,  the  word  may  be  spelled  out. 

306.  There  are  no  numerals ;  numbers  shall  be  spelled  out. 

307.  With  the  machine  "  interval "  is  made  by  closing  the 
arms  but  leaving  the  indicator  showing.  "  Double  interval "  is 
two  successive  chop-chop  signals.  "  Triple  interval "  is  three 
successive  chop-chop  signals,  followed  by  the  closing  of  both 
arms  and  indicator.     The  chop-chop  signal  is  made  by  placing 


308. 


The  Semaphore  Alphabet 


»         2 


Two-arm  semaphore. 


Ma- 
chine. 


Handl 


Second- 
ary mean- 
ings. 


Two-arm  semaphcnre. 


Ma- 
chine. 


Hand  flags. 


Second- 
ary mean- 
ings. 


A 


\ 


/ 


ii6 


Error. 


K 


^ 


A 


/ 


IX 

Exe- 
cute 


Neg^ 
tive. 


Pre- 
para- 
tory. 


The  Semaphore  Alphabet — Continued. 


Two-arm  semaphore. 


A  c  . 
knowl- 


HK 


^ 


V 


w 


Two-arm  semaphore. 


chine.     Hand    flags. 


r 


Second- 
ary mean- 
ings. 


IT? 


The  Semaphore  Alphabet — Continued. 


Two-ann  semaphore. 


Ma- 
chine. 


Hand  flags. 


Second- 
ary  mean- 
ings. 


Two-arm  semaphore. 


Ma- 
chine. 


Hand  ( 


8ec(»id- 
ary  mean- 
ings. 


\=> 


f^ 


W^ 


Cor- 
net 


Let- 
ters 
(fol- 
low). 


Sic- 
nais 
(fol- 
low). 


In- 
ter- 
val. 


K 


\ 


Desig- 
nator., 


ii8 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  up 

both  arms  at  the  right  horizontal  and  then  moving  them  up  and 
down  in  a  cutting  motion,  the  indicator  being  displayed.  With 
hand  flags,  "  interval "  is  as  shown  in  table ;  "  double  interval " 
is  two  successive  chop-chop  signals ;  "  triple  interval "  is  three 
successive  chop-chop  signals  and  withdrawing  the  flags  from  view. 
Conventional  signals  are  used  with  the  following  exceptions  : 

Error    "A"  (agitated). 

Interrogatory    "  O  "  (  agitated  ) . 

Those  of  five  or  six  elements  cannot  be  made  and  must  be 
spelled  out. 

309.  Any  signal  is  a  spelled-out  message  unless  preceded  by 
"  Signals,'.'  in  which  case  it  is  to  be  sought  in  the  General  Signal 
Book.    A  return  to  spelling  out  is  indicated  by  "  Letters." 

310.  To  call  a  station,  face  it  squarely  and  make  its  call.  If 
there  is  no  immediate  reply,  wave  the  flags  over  the  head  or  wave 
the  arms  toward  the  upper  vertical  to  attract  attention,  making  the 
call  at  frequent  intervals.  A  day  semaphore  message  to  the  whole 
force  may  be  indicated  in  the  same  way  as  for  a  wigwag  message. 
The  station  called  answers  by  making  its  own  call.  With  the  ma- 
chine this  call  is  left  displayed  until  the  message  has  been  received 
and  understood.  When  the  sender  makes  *'  end  of  message  "  the 
receiver,  if  message  is  understood,  extends  the  arms  or  flags  hori- 
zontally and  waves  them  until  the  sender  does  the  same,  when 
both  leave  their  stations. 

311.  The  General  Instructions  in  regard  to  sending  semaphore 
messages  are  the  same  as  those  given  for  the  wigwag. 

312.  Signaling  by  the  two-arm  semaphore  is  the  most  rapid 
method  of  sending  spelled-out  messages.  It  is,  however,  very 
liable  to  error  if  the  motions  are  slurred  over  or  run  together  in 
an  attempt  to  make  speed.  Both  arms  should  move  rapidly  and 
simultaneously,  but  there  should  be  a  perceptible  pause  at  the  end 
of  each  letter  before  making  the  movements  for  the  next  letter; 
and  care  must  be  taken,  with  hand  flags,  to  hold  the  staffs  so  as 
to  form  a  prolongation  of  the  arms.  The  system  possesses  an 
important  element  of  accuracy  in  that  each  display  may  be  kept 
displayed  indefinitely.  Exceptional  certainty  of  correct  receiving 
may  be  effected  by  requiring  the  receiving  ship  to  repeat  each 
display ;  this  shall  be  called  for  by  sending  the  words  "  Repeat 
signals  "  after  the  call. 

THE  VERY  SYSTEM. 

313.  The  code  is  transmitted  by  projecting  red  stars  and  green 
stars  into  the  air  from  a  specially  constructed  pistol,  supplemented 
by  rockets.    The  code  used  is  the  Navy  Flag  Code.    In  the  displays 


120  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

which  form  the  letters  of  the  flag  code  a  red  star  corresponds  to 
the  dot  and  the  green  star  to  the  dash  of  the  Dot  and  Dash  Code ; 
but  the  conventional  signals,  being  necessarily  limited  in  number, 
differ  from  those  of  the  dot  and  dash  code. 

314.  Conventional  signals. 

General  call  (cornet) Rocket  and  Green  Star. 

Answering  (acknowledgment) Red  star  (.) 

Repeat  Green  star  (— ) 

Interval  (separating  the  alphabet/ Red  Star \-p      ,    ,    , 

letters  of  a  signal) \Green  Star j^tlracketed. 

Double  interval  (separating  the  code  groups)  ..... .Two  intervals 

Triple  interval  (end  of  message) Three  intervals 

Note. — Bracketed  stars  are  stars  fired  simultaneously;  great 
care  should  be  taken  to  insure  their  being  discharged  together  and 
in  such  directions  as  not  to  be  too  widely  separated. 

Execute  Rocket  and  Red  Star. 

Distress  or  Danger Red  star  several  times. 

Numerals  follow    (or  end) ^°^^^^{ Green  s[ar  * }^^^^^^- 

315.  To  send  a  signal,  make  general  call  or  the  call  of  the 
group,  flotilla,  squadron,  division,  or  ship  addressed.  The  ship  ad- 
dressed, or  the  senior  officer  of  the  unit  addressed,  acknowledges. 
The  signaling  ship  ?hen  proceeds  with  the  signal. 

316.  Stars  should  be  projected  nearly  vertically  and  so  as  to 
fall  in  the  direction  of  the  unit  addressed.  If  a  star  be  broken  by 
the  shock  of  discharge,  the  pieces  shall  be  considered  as  one  star. 
If  the  receiver  is  led  to  believe  that  he  has  missed  a  star  or  that 
confusion  of  any  kind  exists,  he  shall  at  once  make  "  Repeat." 
In  such  case  the  sender  shall  cease  signaling,  wait  for  about  a 
minute,  and  then  recommence  the  signal  from  the  beginning. 

317.  On  seeing  a  triple  interval,  the  receiver  shall  make  "  An- 
swering "  if  the  signal  is  understood,  or  *'  Repeat "  if  it  is  not 
understood. 

318.  Signals  which  require  a  change  of  formation,  course,  speed, 
or  order,  or  the  execution  of  which  must  manifestly  be  simul- 
taneous, shall  be  considered  preparatory  and  shall  not  be  executed 
until  the  "  Execute  "  is  made. 

TOWING  SIGNALS. 

319.  In  towing,  in  thick  weather  or  at  other  times,  the  follow- 
ing special  sound  signals  may  be  used  if  agreed  upon  previously; 
but  some  special  arrangement  must  always  be  made  between  the 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  I21 

commanding  officers   of  the  ships   towing  and  being  towed   for 
communicating  under  various  conditions  of  wind  and  weather : 

320.   (i)  All   signals  to   be  preceded  by  a  long  blast  of  the 
steam  whistle  of  about  seven  seconds  duration. 

(2)  A  single  blast  of  the  whistle  to  be  about  one-half  second 
duration. 

(3)  A  double  blast  of  the  whistle  to  be  two  single  blasts  made 
in  quick  succession. 

(4)  Interval  betwen  single  blasts  or  between  a  double  blast  and 
a  single  blast  to  be  one  second. 

(5)  Steer  more  to  starboard:    One  single  blast. 

(6)  Steer  more  to  port :    Two  single  blasts. 

(7)  Towline  is  fast  or  is  towline  fast :   Three  single  blasts. 

(8)  Shorten  in  on  towline:   One  double  and  one  sins^le  blast. 

(9)  Veer  on  towline :    One  single  and  one  double  blast. 
(10)  Let  go  towline :   Two  double  blasts. 


CHAPTER  IX. 
MISCELLANEOUS. 

U.  S.  STORM  SIGNALS. 

321.  The  various  civilized  nations  of  the  world  give  warning  to 
mariners  of  the  approach  of  storms.  These  notices  are  received 
by  telegraph  at  various  stations  along  the  coast,  and  indicate  the 
approach  of  storms  and  the  expected  direction  of  the  wind.  In 
the  United  States  the  system  of  weather  signals  is  very  complete, 
information  of  the  approach  of  storms  being  received  from  vari- 
ous stations  in  the  United  States,  and  even  throughout  the  West 
Indies.  These  warnings  are  published  at  the  various  seaports  by 
the  display  of  flags  by  day  and  by  lanterns  at  night,  also  by 
bulletins  and  reports  furnished  to  newspapers.  Every  effort  is 
made  by  the  Weather  Bureau  of  the  United  States  Department  of 
Agriculture  to  give  these  warnings  as  early  as  possible  at  all  points 
where  they  may  be  of  service  to  ipariners  and  others. 

322.  (i)  Storm  warnings  are  displayed  by  the  United  States 
Weather  Bureau  at  142  stations  on  the  Atlantic  and  Gulf  coasts 
and  at  46  stations  on  the  Pacific  coast. 


Small  craft.       NE.  winds.       SE.  winds,      SW.  winds.      NW.  winds.  Hurricane 
Flags  8  feet  square.     Pennants  5-foot  hoist,  12-foot  fly. 

(2)  Small-craft  warnings. — A  red  pennant  indicates  that  mod- 
erately strong  winds  are  expected. 

(3)  Storm  warnings. — A  red  flag,  with  a  black  center,  indicates 
that  a  storm  of  marked  violence  is  expected. 

(4)  The  pennants  displayed  with  the  flags  indicate  the  direction 
of  the  wind :  Red,  easterly ;  white,  westerly.  The  pennant  above 
the  flag  indicates  that  the  wind  is  expected  to  blow  from  the 
northerly  quadrants ;  below,  from  southerly  quadrants. 

(5)  By  night  a  red  light  indicates  easterly  winds,  and  a  white 
light  below  a  red  light,  westerly  winds. 

(6)  Hurricane  warnings. — Two  red  flags,  with  black  centers, 
displayed  one  above  the  other,  indicate  the  expected  approach  of 

122 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  123 

a  tropical  hurricane,  or  one  of  those  extremely  severe  and  dan- 
gerous storms  which  occasionally  move  across  the  Lakes  and 
northern  Atlantic  coast. 

(7)  Small-craft  and  hurricane  warnings  are  not  displayed  at 
night. 

SIGNALS  OF  LIFE-SAVING  SERVICE. 

323.  (i)  The  following  signals,  approved  by  the  International 
Marine  Conference,  convened  at  Washington  in  October,  1889,  have 
been  adopted  by  the  U.S. Life-Saving  Service  and  will  be  used  and 
recognized  by  the  officers  and  employees  as  occasion  may  require : 

(a)  Upon  the  discovery  of  a  wreck  by  night  the  life-saving 
force  will  burn  a  red  pyrotechnic  light  or  a  red  rocket  to  signify : 
"  You  are  seen ;  assistance  will  be  given  as  soon  as  possible." 

(b)  A  red  flag  waved  on  shore  by  day,  or  a  red  light,  red  rocket, 
or  red  Roman  candle  displayed  by  night,  will  signify :   "Haul  away." 

(c)  A  white  flag  waved  on  shore  by  day,  or  white  light  slowly 
swung  back  and  forth,  or  a  white  rocket,  or  white  Roman  candle 
fired  by  night,  will  signify:    "  Slack  away." 

(d)  Two  flags,  a  white  and  a  red,  waved  at  the  same  time  on 
shore  by  day,  or  two  lights,  a  white  and  a  red,  slowly  swung  at  the 
same  time,  or  a  blue  pyrotechnic  light  burned  by  night,  will  signify : 
"Do  not  attempt  to  land  in  your  own  boats.    It  is  impossible." 

(e)  A  man  on  shore  beckoning  by  day,  or  two  torches  burning 
near  together  by  night,  will  signify :  "This  is  the  best  place  to 
land." 

(2)  Any  of  these  signals  may  be  answered  from  the  vessel  as 
follows :  In  the  daytime,  by  waving  a  flag,  a  handkerchief,  a  hat, 
or  even  the  hand ;  at  night,  by  firing  a  rocket,  a  blue  light,  or  a 
gun,  or  by  showing  a  light  over  the  ship's  gunwale  for  a  short 
time  and  then  concealing  it. 

INTERNATIONAL  SIGNALS. 

Note. — For  complete  detailed  instructions  as  to  the  use  of  the 
International  Code,  see  International  Signal  Book. 

324.  (i)  These  are  a  set  of  signals  which  have  been  adopted  by 
all  nations  in  order  that  all  ships  may  have  a  method  of  signaling 
to  each  other. 

(2)  This  code  consists  of  26  flags,  burgees  or  pennants  (the  same 
as  the  Navy  Alphabet  Code),  one  for  each  letter  in  the  alphabet, 
and  a  code  pennant,  which  is  also  used  as  an  answering  pennant. 

(3)  In  the  International  Code  any  particular  hoist  has  the  same 
meaning  in  each  language. 

(4)  V^^hen  making  a  signal  by  this  code,  look  up  the  signal  in 
the  International  Signal  Book,  and  bend  on  (in  order,  reading 
from  up,  down),  the  flags  corresponding  to  the  letters  abreast 
this  signal. 


124  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

(5)  Hoist  the  code  pennant  under  the  ship's  ensign  and  hoist 
the  signal  where  it  can  best  be  seen. 

(6)  If  receiving  a  message,  the  meaning  will  be  found  abreast 
the  letters  represented  by  the  flags  in  the  hoist. 

(7)  The  following  instructions  show  in  a  general  way  the 
manner  in  which  the  International  Signal  Book  is  divided  and  how 
the  arrangement  of  the  flags  gives  a  distinctive  character  to  the 
signal : 

(a)  One-flag  signals. — B,  C,  D,  L,  P,  Q,  S,  hoisted  singly, 
have  special  significations.  The  code  flag  over  each  of  the  signal 
flags  are  signals  of  a  general  nature  of  most  frequent  use.  Signal 
flags  hoisted  singly  after  numeral  signal  No.  i  refer  to  the  numeral 
table,  as  do  also  two-flag  signals  with  code  flag  under  them. 

(b)  Two-flag  signals  without  code  flag  are  urgent  and  im- 
portant signals ;  with  code  flag  over  them  are  latitude  and  longi- 
tude, time,  barometer,  and  thermometer  signals. 

(c)  Three-flag  signals  express  points  of  compass,  money, 
weights  and  measures,  and  all  ordinary  signals  required  for  com- 
munication. 

(d)  Four-flag  signals  with  a  burgee  (A  or  B)  uppermost  are 
geographical  signals ;  with  C  uppermost  are  spelling  or  vocabulary 
signals ;  with  G  uppermost  are  names  of  men-or-war ;  with  squarie 
flag  uppermost  are  names  of  merchant  vessels  and  are  not  in 
signal  book. 

Note. — If  the  vessel  flies  a  United  States  flag  it  will  be  found  in 
list  of  United  States  merchant  vessels.  Naval  vessels  are  usually 
not  supplied  with  merchant  lists  of  foreign  nations  and  therefore 
the  vessel  can  not  be  generally  made  out ;  there  can,  however,  be 
no  doubt  as  to  the  meaning  of  a  four-flag  international  signal 
with  square  flag  on  top. 


f^ 


INTERNATIONAL  "CODE  FLAG"   AND  "ANSWERING 

PENNANT." 

Note. — When  used  as  the  "  code  flag  "  it  is  to  be  hoisted  under 
the  ensign.  When  used  as  the  "  answering  pennant."  it  is  to  be 
hoisted  at  the  masthead  or  where  best  seen. 


The  Dkck  and  Boat  Book.  125 

INTERNATIONAL  SIGNALS  OF  DISTRESS. 

325.  When  a  vessel  is  in  distress  and  requires  assistance  from 
other  vessels  or  from  the  shore,  the  follov^ing  shall  be  the  signals 
to  be  used  or  displayed  by  her,  either  together  or  separately : 

326.  In  the  daytime — 

(i)  A  gun  or  other  explosive  signal  fired  at  intervals  of  about 
a  minute. 

(2)  The  International-code  signal  of  distress  indicated  by  NC 

(3)  The  distant  signal,  consisting  of  a  square  flag,  having  either 
above  or  below  it  a  ball  or  anything  resembling  a  ball, 

(4)  The  distinct  signal,  consisting  of  a  cone,  point  upward, 
having  either  above  it  or  below  it  a  ball  or  anything  resembling  a 
ball/ 

(5)  A  continuous  sounding  with  any  fog-signal  apparatus. 

327.  At  night— 

(i)  A  gun  or  other  explosive  signal  fired  at  intervals  of  about  a 
minute. 

(2)  Flames  on  the  vessel  (as  from  a  burning  tar  barrel,  oil 
barrel,  etc.). 

(3)  Rockets  or  shells,  throwing  stars  of  any  color  or  descrip- 
tion, fired  one  at  a  time  at  short  intervals. 

(4)  A  continuous  sounding  with  any  fog-signal  apparatus. 

INTERNATIONAL  SIGNALS  FOR  A  PILOT. 

328.  The  following  signals,  when  used  or  displayed  together, 
or  separately,  shall  be  deemed  to  be  signals  for  a  pilot: 

329.  In  the  daytime— 

(i)   The  jack,  to  be  hoisted  at  the  fore. 

(2)  The  International-code  pilot  signal  indicated  by  PT. 

(3)  The  International-code  flag  S,  with  or  without  the  code 
pennant  over  it. 

(4)  The  distant  signal,  consisting  of  a  cone,  point  upward, 
having  above  it  two  balls  or  shapes  resembling  balls. 

330.  At  night— 

(i)  The  pyrotechnic  light,  commonly  known  as  a  blue  light, 
every  15  minutes ;  or 

(2)  A  bright  white  light,  flashed  or  shown  at  short  or  frequent 
intervals  just  above  the  bulwarks  for  about  a  minute  at  a  time. 

^  This  is  purely  a  code  signal  and  is  not  one  of  the  signals  of  distress  given 
in  the  "Rules  of  the  Road,"  the  needless  exhibition  of  which  entails  penalties 
upon  the  master  of  the  vessel  displaying  it. 


1126  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

TO  DRESS  SHIP. 

331.  Lower  into  places  where  secured,  all  derricks,  tbooms,  etc. 
Hoist  a  national  ensign  at  each  masthead,  all  such  ensigns  being  of 
the  same  size  if  the  masts  are  of  the  same  height.  At  the  peak  or 
on  a  staff  aft  display  the  largest  ensign  with  which  the  ship  is 
furnished.  Forward,  on  the  jackstaff,  hoist  the  jack.  Personal 
flags  and  broad  pennants  shall  be  displayed  as  prescribed  in  the 
Navy  Regulations. 

332.  If  the  dressing  is  complimentary  to  some  other  nation, 
then  the  ensign  or  standard  of  that  nation  shall  be  hoisted  as 
provided  in  the  Navy  Regulations. 

TO  FULL  DRESS  SHIP. 

333.  In  addition  to  the  dressing  of  the  mastheads,  as  described 
for  dressing  ship,  a  ship  may  be  full  dressed  with  a  rainbow  of 
flags  reaching  from  the  water  line  forward  to  the  water  line  aft 
by  way. of  head  booms,  the  topgallant  mastheads  (or  topmast 
heads  if  there  are  no  topgallant  masts),  peak,  and  end  of  spanker 
boom.  In  ships  having  no  head  booms  or  spanker  boom,  the 
lines  shall  be  brought  to  the  jackstaff  at  the  height  of  the  ridge 
rope  forward  and  the  flagstaff  at  the  height  of  the  ridge  rope  aft. 
In  ships  rigged  with  cage  masts  the  lines  shall  be  brought  to  the 
platform  of  the  top. 

334.  In  single-masted  ships  the  rainbow  shall  extend  from  for- 
ward to  the  masthead  and  thence  in  two  lines  to  the  heads  of  the 
after  boat  davits  on  each  side. 

335.  Flags  shall  be  stopped  on  the  lines  at  a  uniform  distance 
of  about  12  inches  apart,  and  in  the  sequences  exhibited  in  the 
following  table,  thus :  There  are  two  sequences,  as  shown.  The 
upper  flag  of  each  line  shall  be  brought  to  the  middle  of  the  rain- 
bow ;  this  point  will  generally  be  between  the  fore  and  main, 
though  in  some  ships  it  may  be  at  the  main  and  in  some  abaft  it. 
From  this  middle  point  one  line  shall  be  carried  forward  and  the 
other  aft,  surplus  flags  at  each  lower  end  being  discarded. 

Note. — In  a  small  vessel,  when  only  one-half  of  the  total  num- 
ber of  flags  is  required,  one  complete  set  of  alphabet  flags  and 
repeaters  may  be  dispensed  with,  as  the  surplus  flags  for  one-half 
of  the  length  of  each  line  from  the  lower  end  make  the  complete 
set.  Example :  In  the  Pennsylvania  a  complete  rainbow  requires 
two  sets  of  signal  flags ;  in  the  Nashville  only  one  complete  set 
will  be  required. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


127 


Arrangement  of  Flags. 


First  line 

Middle. 

Second  line 

(continued). 

First  line. 

Second  line. 

(continued). 

First  Repeater. 

N. 

O. 

Meal. 

P. 

Third    Repeater. 

R. 

S. 

T. 
Second  Repeater. 

U. 

V. 

W. 
Int.  Code  Pennant. 

X. 

Y. 
Answering. 

Z. 

Own  Group  Call. 

Church. 

A. 

B. 

G. 

Numeral. 

Guard. 

D. 
Danger. 
Recall. 
E. 
H. 
I. 
F. 

t 

C. 
L. 
M. 

Z. 
Answering. 

Y. 

X. 
Position. 

W. 

V. 

U. 
Second  Repeater. 

T. 

S. 

R. 
Third   Repeater. 

9: 

Meal. 

O. 

N. 

-First  Repeater. 

M. 
L. 
C. 
K. 

k 

I. 
H. 

E. 
Recall. 
Danger. 

D. 

Guard. 

Numeral. 

G. 

B. 

A. 

Own   Ship   Call. 

Cornet. 

336.  L.  ships  where  radio  spreaders  or  other  equipment  or 
arrangement  of  masts  and  smoke  pipes  render  impracticable  the 
methods  herein  given  for  running  the  dressing  lines,  the  com- 
mander in  chief  shall  authorize  such  modifications  as  seems  ad- 
visable, adhering  to  the  prescribed  arrangement  of  flags.  All 
such  departures  from  prescribed  methods  shall  be  immediately 
reported  to  the  Navy  Department  by  the  commanding  ofiicer  of 
the  ship  concerned. 


TO  PASS  IN  REVIEW. 

337,  The  order,  formation,  speed,  and  distance  and  the  uniform 
will  be  prescribed  by  signal  or  order.  The  directions  for  passing 
in  review  apply  equally  to  ships  reviewed  at  anchor. 

338.  In  being  reviewed,  ships  that  have  boats  so  stowed  that 
they  interfere  with  manning  the  rail  continuously  shall,  if  practi- 
cable, restow  them  on  the  inboard  nests  or  anchor  them  inshore, 
so  that  the  line  of  men  at  the  rail  shall  be  continuous.  Boats  at 
davits  shall  be  lowered  flush  with  the  rail  or  anchored.  All  broad- 
side guns  shall  be  trained  abeam  and  turret  guns  fore  and  aft  and 
all  level. 


128  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

339,  For  the  President:  The  marine  detachment,  whether 
posted  as  a  guard  or  not,  shall  be  paraded  under  arms  aft  on  the 
side  next  to  the  reviewing  vessel.  The  seaman  guard,  if  posted, 
shall  be  paraded  under  arms  on  the  left  of  the  marine  detachment. 
Forward  of  this  formation  the  crew  shall  man  the  rail  in  one  rank 
close  to  the  side,  officers  of  divisions  in  rear  of  their  divisions;  all 
other  officers  in  line  on  the  bridge  or  bridges.  The  men  shall  be 
evenly  spaced  along  the  side  and  may  take  distance  by  extending 
their  arms  or  elbows,  but  shall  have  their  hands  at  their  sides  at 
the  time  of  the  review. 

340,  Men  shall  not  be  stationed  in  tops  of  battleships  or  on 
turrets  or  on  bridges  on  the  amidship  line. 

341,  As  each  ship  arrives  at  a  point  where  the  bridge  of  the 
reviewing  vessel  bears  45°  forward  of  the  bridge  of  the  ship  re- 
viewed, the  officers  and  men  of  the  latter  shall  salute  and  shall 
remain  in  that  position ;  the  marine  detachment  and  the  seaman 
guard,  if  posted,  shall  present  arms,  the  drums  give  four  ruffles, 
and  the  bugles  sound  four  flourishes.  The  ruffles  and  flourishes 
shall  be  followed  by  the  National  Anthem  by  the  band. 

342,  As  soon  as  well  clear  after  having  passed  or  been  passed 
by  the  reviewing  vessel,  each  ship  shall  fire  a  national  salute,  offi- 
cers and  crew  resuming  the  position  of  "  attention  "  at  the  first 
gun. 

343,  Officers  and  men  shall  be  at  their  stations  for  manning  the 
rail  before  the  ship  has  arrived  within  1,200  yards  of  the  review- 
ing vessel  and  shall  remain  at  their  stations  until  the  reviewing 
ship  has  been  passed  by  more  than  1,200  yards. 

344,  For  the  Secretary  of  the  Navy:  The  same  honors  shall  be 
paid  as  for  the  President,  except  that  the  crew  shall  be  formed  at 
quarters  for  inspection  facing  the  reviewing  vessel,  and  the  salute 
shall  consist  of  19  guns. 

345,  For  the  Assistant  Secretary  of  the  Navy:  The  same  honors 
shall  be  paid  as^for  the  Secretary  of  the  Navy,  except  that  the 
drums  shall  give  four  ruffles  and  the  bugles  sound  four  flour- 
ishes and  the  salute  shall  consist  of  17  guns.  The  uniform  for 
officers  is  dress  instead  of  special  full  dress. 


CHAPTER  X. 

DECK  SIGNALS. 

Note. — Deck  signals  are  entered  alphabetically  under  their  lead- 
ing words.  Some  are  entered  additionally  under  a  second  leading 
word  to  facilitate  the  sender's  finding  the  signal  meaning  desired. 


Signals. 


Signal  meanings. 


ABS 
ABT 
ABU 
ABV 
ABW 
ABX 
AFU 
AGC 
AGP 
AHG 
AH  I 
AH  J 
AHK 
AID 
AIL 


AIM 
A  I  N 


Attention.     Be  on  the  alert  fo/  signals  or  movements 

of  this  ship  or  to  note  danger. 
Absentee-s.    Recall  all. 

Absentee-s.    Report  number  of. 

Absentee-s.     All,  or  number  indicated  have  returned. 

Absentee-s.     Send  for. 

Absentce-s.     Sick  and,  reports.     Make. 

Absentee-s.     Wait  for. 
Afloat.     The  boat-s  or  the  one-s  indicated  is  (are). 
Aground.     The  boat-s  or  the  one-s  indicated  is  (are). 
Ahead.     Boat-s :     Go. 
Air  bedding. 

Air  bunting. 
Aired  bedding.     Pipe  down. 

Aired  bunting.     Pipe  down. 
Allow  boats  from  shore  to  come  alongside. 
Allowance,  .of  fresh  meat  in  days*  rations  for  ship's 

company  as   indicated   by  numeral   may  be   drawn 

from  supply  ship. 

Allowance,  .of  fresh  provisions  in  days'  rations  for 

ship's  company  as  indicated  by  numeral  may  be 
drawn  from  supply  ship. 

Allowance,  .of  fresh  vegetables  in  days'  rations  for 
ship's  company  as  indicated  by  numeral  may  be 
drawn  from  supply  sliip. 

129 


130 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signals. 


Signal  meanings. 


Anchor.     Number  of  fathoms  of  cable  may  follow  (on 
each  anchor  in  mooring) i.QSR 

Anchor  ahead  of  this  or  designated  ship. 

Anchor  astern  of  this  or  designated  ship. 

Anchor  with  this  ship,  or  the  ship  or  object  desig- 
nated,  bearing  as   indicated.     (Distance   in   hun- 
dreds of  yards  may  follow.) 
Anchor  in  berth-s  previously  assigned. ...  Q  S  T 

Anchor  in  berth-s  previously  occupied. 

Anchor  between  the  ships  or  units  designated. 

Anchor  with  the  or  the  designated  buoy  bearing  as 
indicated. 

Anchor  with  15  fathoms  of  cable.^ 

Anchor  with  30  fathoms  of  cable. 

Anchor  with  45  fathoms  of  cable.  I  On  each  anchor 

Anchor  with  60  fathoms  of  cable,  f    in  mooring. 

Anchor  with  75  fathoms  of  cable. 

Anchor  with  90  fathoms  of  cable.  J 

Anchor  on  the  cross  bearings  of  the  two  objects  des- 
ignated, their  respective  bearings  to  be  indicated 
m  order. 

Anchor.  Come  to  with  single;  number  of  fathoms 
of  chain  may  be  indicated. 

Anchor  in  the  depth  of  water  indicated  in  feet. 

Anchor  as  directed  by  commander  of  auxiliaries. 

Anchor  at  discretion. 

Anchor  near  the  ship-s  or  type  or  unit-s  designated. 
Anchors  and  hawsers.     Send  boats  with,  to  this  or  des- 
ignated ship. 
Ardois  system  of  signals.    Use. 
Article-s  condemned.     Land. 

Article-s  condemned.  Send,  to  this  or  the  vessel  or 
place  designated. 

Article-s  indicated.     Have. 

Article-s  or  supplies.     Need,  as  indicated. 

Article-s  required.  Send  list-s  of,  or  communicate 
name-s  and  quantities  by  signal. 

Article-s  indicated.     Running  short  of. 

Article-s  indicated.     Can  spare. 

Article-s  indicated.  Report  by  signal  quantity-ies 
of,  that  )'ou  can  spare  for  the  use  of  this  or  des- 
ignated ship. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


131 


Signals.  ! 


Signal  meanings. 


Ashes  may  be  thrown  overboard  Pt  this  anchorage. 
Ash  lighter  will  take  the  ashes   *>n  the  days  indicated. 
Assemble.     Board  or  court  or  mat  indicated  will,   on 
board  this  or  designated  ship  or  place  immediately 
or  at  time  indicated. 
Assemble.    A  board  composed  of  officers  designated 
will   on  board  this   or   designated   ship  or   place 
immediately  or  at  time  indicated. 
Assist  the  boat-s  or  the  one-s  designated. 

Assist  distressed  ship-s  or  ship-s  designated. 
Assist  the  strange  vessel-s. 
Assistance.     Additional,  is  required. 

Assistance.     Immediate,  can  be  rendered. 
Assistance.     Immediate,  will  be  rendered. 
Assistance.     Medical.  Need. 
Assistance.     Need. 

Assistance  by  towing  or  tugs.     Need. 
Assistance.     What,  do  you  require? 
Asylum.     Give,  to  refugees. 
Athletic  officer-s  :    Repair  on  board  this  or  designated 

ship  now  or  at  time  indicated. 
♦Attention,  .is  called  to  article  and  paragraph  of  Navy 
Regulations  indicated  in  order. 
♦Attention,  .is   called   to   article   and   paragraph   of 

Naval  Instructions  indicated  in  order. 
♦Attention,  .is  called  to  the  indicated  section  of  the 

Revised  Statutes  of  the  United  States. 
♦Attention,  .is  called  to  the  article  and  paragraph  of 

the  Deck  and  Boat  Book  indicated  in  order. 
♦Attention,  .is   called   to   Note    (first   or   No.   indi- 
cated) in  Deck  and  Boat  Book  on  page  indicated. 
Bags.     Scrub. 

Bags,  scrubbed.     Pipe  down. 

Bank  fires X  T  R 

Bank  fires  low.     Ships  with  water  tube  boilers  allow 
unnecessary  fires  to  die  out. 
Barometer.     Correct  height  of,  now  or  at  the  time  indi- 
cated is  (was)  as  indicated  in  inches. 

*  if  this  signal  is  addressed  to  a  particular  officer  other  than  the  commanding: 
officer,  he  may  be  designated  after  the  signal  is  completed. 


13^ 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signal  meanings. 


Barricaded.     Streets  are. 

Battalion  Commander-s:  Repair  on  board  this  or  des- 
ignated ship  now  or  at  time  indicated. 
Beach  master:  Repair  on  board  this  or  designated  ship 

now  or  at  time  indicated. 
Berth-s.     Shift. 

Berth-s.  Take,  inside  of  mole  or  breakwater.  (Or- 
der may  be  indicated  by  call  letters.) 

Berth-s.     Harbor  master  will  assign. 
Bill  of  health.     Get,  before  sailing. 
Board  or  court  or  that  indicated  will  assemble  on  board 
this  or  designated  ship  or  place  immediately  or  at 
time  indicated   ATP 

Board.  A,  composed  of  officers  designated  will  as- 
semble on  board  this  or  designated  ship  or  place 
immediately  or  at  time  indicated ATQ 

Board  or  court  now  in  session  is  dissolved. 

Board  or  court  or  one  indicated  is  postponed  until 
further  orders  or  to  time  indicated. 

Board  of  Examiners  will  adjourn. 

Board  of  Examiners  will  assemble  on  board  this  or 
designated  ship  or  at  designated  place  immediately 
or  at  time  indicated. 

Board  of  Examiners  is  dissolved. 

Board  of  Inspection  will  assemble  on  board  this  or 
designated  ship  or  at  designated  place  immediately 
or  at  time  indicated. 

Board  of  Investigation  will  assemble  on  board  this 
or  designated  ship  or  at  designated  place  imme- 
diately or  at  time  indicated. 

Board  of  Medical  Survey  will  assemble  on  board  this 
or  designated  ship  or  at  designated  place  imme- 
diately or  at  time  indicated. 

Board  of  Survey  will  adjourn. 

Board  of  Survey  will  assemble  on  board  this  or  des- 
ignated ship  or  at  designated  place  immediately  or 
at  time  indicated. 

Board  of  Survey  is  dissolved. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


133 


.  Signal  meanings. 


Board,  on,  of  their  respective  ships.  All  persons  will  go, 
immediately.  (When  this  signal  is  made  and  has 
been  answered  each  ship  shall  hoist  the  cornet  at 
the  fore  and  keep  it  flying  so  long  as  there  are 
absentees.) 

Board,  on.     All  are. 

Board  on.     All  must  be,  by  time  indicated. 

Board,  on.     The  commander  in  chief  is. 

Board,  on.     The  flag  officer  commanding  this  or  des- 
ignated unit  is. 

Board,   on.     The  oflicial-s  or  person-s  indicated  is 
(are),  this  or  designated  ship. 
BoAT-s.     Allow,  from  shore  to  come  alongside.  ..AID 

Boat-s.     All,  must  be  alongside  by  dark. 

Boat-s.     Cast  off^  the. 

Boat-s.     Cast  off  towlines  beginning  with  the  rear. 

Boat-s.     Exercise,  at  hour  indicated. 

Boat-s.     Send,  alongside  this  or  designated  ship  for 
exercise. 

Boat-s.     Each  ship  exercise  her  own. 

Boat-s.     Away  all,  for  exercise  under  oars. 

Boat-s.     Awa3^  all,  for  exercise  singly  under  oars. 

Boat-s.     Exercise  at  away  all,  armed  and  equipped 
for  landing  force. 

Boat-s.     Away  all,  for  exercise  under  sail. 

Boat-s.     Away  all,  for  exercise  singly  under  sail. 

Boat-s.     Hoist  all. 

Boat-s.     Hoist  in  all. 

Boat-s.     Hoist  out  all. 

Boat-s  can  land  safely. 

Boat-s.     Lower  all,  from  davits. 

Boat-s :  Muster  alongside  this  or  designated  ship  in 
prescribed  order. 

Boat-s.     Prepare,  for  racing. 

Boat-s.     Recall  the  or  the  designated. 

Boat-s.     Send  a,    (or  number  indicated)  to  this  or 
designated  ship. 

Boat-s.     Send  a,  (or  number  indicated)  on  shore. 

Boat-s.     Send,  for  the  ofiicer-s  or  person-s  indicated. 


134 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signal  meanings. 


BoAT-s — Continued. 

Boat-s.     Send,  with  anchors  and  hawsers,  to  this  or 

designated  ship  ANE 

Boat-s.     Send,  with  hawser-s  to  this  or  designated 


ship. 
Boat-s. 
Boat-s. 
Boat-s. 


Start  the. 
Stop  all. 
Wait  for. 
Boat  Signals.    Use. 

BoATSWAiN-s :  Repjiir  on  board  this  or  designated  ship 
now  or  at  time  indicated'. 
Boatswain-s.     Send,  with  working  party  to  this  or 
designated  ship  or  place  now  or  at  time  indicated. 
BoiLEK-s  and  engine-s.     Permission  requested  to  over- 
haul  and   clean.     (Number   of   days   required   as 
indicated.) 
Boiler-s  and  engine-s  may  be  overhauled.    (Number 

of  days  allowed  may  be  indicated.) 
Boiler-s  and  engine-s.     Overhaul,  and  put  in  order 

with  least  possibe  delay. 
Boiler-s.     Repair. 
Breakfast.     Men  going  on  duty  will  take,  with  them. 
Breakfast.     There  will  be  time  for  the  crew-s  to  get 
their. 
BuoY-s.     Moor  to,  or  one-s  indicated. 
Bury  the  dead.     (Hour  may  be  indicated.) 
Cable.     Heave  in  (or  veer)  to  the  number  of  fathoms, 
indicated. 
Cable  has  parted. 
Cable.     Shorten  in. 
Cable.     Veer  more. 
Call  Letter- s.     Your 
Cargo  consists  of  articles  indicated. 
Cargo.     Discharge  the. 
Cargo.     Land  the. 
C.\RPENTER-s :    Repair  on  board  this  or  designated  ship 
now  or  at  time  indicated. 
Carpenter-s.     Send,  to  this  or  designated  ship  with 

carpenter's  gang  now  or  at  time  indicated. 
Carpenter's  gang.     Send,  to  this  or  designated  ship 
or  place. 


is  (are)  as  designated. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


135 


Signal  meanings. 


Cast  or  turn  to  starboard R  X W 

Cast  or  turn  to  port RXY 

Ceremonies.  The  funeral,  will  begin  at  the  time  indi- 
cated. 

Chaplain-s  :  Repair  on  board  this  or  designated  ship 
now  or  at  time  indicated. 

Cheer  ship.    (Person  or  ship  to  be  honored  may  follow.) 

Chronometer-s.  Compare,  with  this  or  ship-s  designated. 
Chronometer-s.      Error    of,    Get    as    accurately    as 

possible  before  leaving  port. 
Chronometer-s.    Note  time  by,  for  comparison  when 
this  signal  is  hauled  down  or  prearranged  signal 
made. 

Close  up  R  Y  Q 

Clothes.    Scrub  and  wash. 

Clothes.     Pipe  down  washed. 
Clothes.    Reef,  on  the  lines. 

Clotheslines.     Get  up. 

Coal  or  fuel  reports.    Make. 

Coal  taken  last  hour  or  in  time  designated,  amount 
shown  in  separate  hoist  under  numeral. 

Coaling  is  completed,  number  of  tons  received  as  indi- 
cated. 

Colors.    Half  mast  the. 

Colors.     Haul  down  the. 
Colors.     Hoist  the. 

Commander-s,  company :  Repair  on  board  this  or  desig- 
nated ship  now  or  at  the  time  indicated. 

Commander-s  of  division-s,  other  than  submarine  or  tor- 
pedo :  Repair  on  board  this  or  designated  ship  now 
or  at  the  time  indicated. 

CoMMANDER-s  of  squadrou-s,  other  than  submarine  or 
torpedo :  Repair  on  board  this  or  designated  ship 
now  or  at  the  time  indicated. 

CoMMANDER-s  of  Submarine  division-s  :  Repair  on  board 
this  or  designated  ship  now  or  at  the  time  indi- 
cated 

CoMMANDER-s  of  torpedo  division-s:  Repair  on  board 
this  or  designated  ship  now  or  at  the  time  indi- 
cated. 

CoMMANDER-s  of  Submarine  flotilla-s :  Repair  on  board 
this  or  designated  ship  now  or  at  the  time  indicated. 

Danger.    You  are  standing  into. 


136 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signals.  J 


Signal  meanings. 


CoMMANDER-s  of  torpedo  flotilla-s :   Repair  on  board  this 

or  designated  ship  now  or  at  the  time  indicated. 
Commander-in-chief.      Have    dispatches    for    the,    or 
senior  officer  present. 
Commander-in-chief.    Have  dispatches  from  the. 
Commanding  officer-s  :    Repair  on  board  this  or  desig- 
nated ship  now  or  at  the  time  indicated. 
Commanding  officer-s.  .other  than  auxiliaries  or  sub- 
marines or  torpedo  craft :  Repair  on  board  this  or 
designated  ship  now  or  at  the  time  indicated. 
Commanding  officer-s.  .of  submarine-s :    Repair  on 
board  this  or  designated  ship  now  or  at  the  time 
mdicated. 
Commanding  officer-s.  .of  torpedo  craft:   Repair  on 
board  this  or  designated  ship  now  or  at  the  time 
indicated. 
Commissary  officer-s  :  Repair  on  board  this  or  desig- 
nated ship  now  or  at  the  time  indicated. 
Communicate,  .with  the  authorities  of  the  place. 

Communicate,  .with  the  consul  of  the  United  States 
(or  of  nation  indicated). 
CoMPASS-ES.     Compensate. 

Compass-es.     Swing  ship  for  deviation  of. 

Condemned  articles.     Land ASL 

Condemned  articles.     Send,  to  this  or  the  vessel  or 

place  designated ASM 

Condemned.     Man  (men),  by  medical  survey.   Send, 

to  the  hospital  on  shore  or  at  place  designated. 
Condemned.     Man  (men),  by  medical  survey.    Send, 

to  this  or  designated  ship  or  place. 
Condemned.     Officer-s,  by  medical  survey.     Send,  to 

the  hospital  on  shore  or  at  place  designated. 
Condemned.    Officer-s,  by  medical  survey.    Send,  to 
this  or  designated  ship  or  place. 
Consulate,  U.  S.  (or  of  nation  indicated).   Send  to,  for 

mail. 
Course.  ,  Proceed  on. 

Court  or  board  or  that  indicated  will  assemble  on  board 
this  or  designated  ship  or  place  immediately  or  at 
time  indicated ATP 


IHE  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


137 


Signals.  Signal  meanings. 


Court — Continued. 

Court  or  board  now  in  session  is  dissolved.  . .  B  I  F 
Court  or  board  or  one  indicated  is  postponed  unti: 

further  orders  or  to  time  indicated B  I  0 

Court.     Officers  of  the  ship-s  designated  are  relieved 
from  further  attendance  upon  the. 
Court  of  Inquiry,  .will  adjourn. 

Court  of   Inquiry,  .will  assemble  on  board  this  or 

designated  ship,  immediately,  or  at  time  indicated. 

Court  of  Inquiry.    (A  signal  for  the  daily  meeting  of 

a,  on  board  the  ship  making  the  signal.) 
Court  of  Inquiry,  .is  dissolved. 

Court  of  Inquiry.   Proceedings  of.  in  the  case  of  the 
person  designated  are  approved. 
Court-martial,  .will  adjourn. 

Court-martial,  .will  adjourn  until  to-morrow  or  time 

indicated. 
Court-martial,  .will  assemble  on  board  this  or  desig- 
nated ship  immediately,  or  at  time  indicated. 
Court-martial,  .is  dissolved. 

Court-martial.     Proceedings  of,   in  the  case  of  the 
person  designated  are  approved. 
Crews  are  invited  to  an.  entertainment  on  board  this  or 
designated  ship  or  at  designated  place  at  time  in- 
dicated.   (Number  may  be  indicated.) 
Custom  house  officials  will  visit  ship-s  addressed  or  des- 
ignated.   (Time  may  be  indicated.) 
Danger  bears  as  indicated. 

Danger.     You  are   standing  into C 

Days  of  the  week  : 
Sunday. 
Monda3^ 
Tuesday. 
Wednesday. 
Thursday. 
Friday. 
Saturday. 
Prepare  for  an  early  departure. 
r^EPTii  OF  \v.\TF,K  is  A<  indicated. 


138 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signal  meanings. 


Dinner.     There  will  be  time  for  the  crew-s  to  get  their. 

Dinner.     Men  going  on  duty  will  take,  with  them. 
Disorder.    There  is  great,  in  the  or  the  indicated  place. 

(For  additional  signals  concerning  disorder  see  Boat 
Signals  MTJ-MTU.) 
Divine  service  will  be  held  on  board  of  this  or  the  des- 
ignated ship  or  place  at  the  time  indicated. 

Divine  service  will  be  held  on  shore  at  the  hour  in- 
dicated. 
Dress.     Officers  of  the  Navy. 

Special  full  dress. 

White  special  full  dress. 

Full  dress. 

White  full  dress. 

Dress. 

Dress,  with  white  trousers. 

White  dress  (or  white  undress). 

Undress. 

Undress,  with  white  caps. 

Undress,  with  white  trousers  and  white  caps. 

Undress,  without  swords. 

Undress,  with  white  caps,  without  swords. 

Undress  with  white  trousers  and  white  caps,  without 
swords. 

Service  dress. 

Service  dress  with  white  caps. 

Service  dress  with  white  trousers  and  white  caps. 

Service  dress  with  swords. 

Service  dress  with  white  caps  and  swords. 

Service  dress  with  white  trousers,  white  caps,  and 
swords. 

White  service  dress. 

White  service  dress  with  blue  trousers. 

White  service  dress  with  swords. 

White  service  dress  with  blue  trousers  and  swords. 

Evening  full  dress. 

Evening  dress. 

Evening  dress  with  full  dress  trousers. 

Evening  dress  with  full  dress  trousers,  epaulets,  and 
blue  cap. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


139 


Signals. 

Signal  meanings. 

Dress.    Officers  of  the  Navy — Continued. 

CXQ 

Dinner  dress. 

CXR 

Mess  dress. 

cxs 

Mess  dress  with  white  trousers. 

CXT 

Uniform-A. 

cxu 

Uniforrn-A,  all  white. 

CXT 

Uniform-B. 

cxw 

Uniform-B,  all  white. 

CXY 

Uniform-C;  evening  full  dress. 

cxz 

Uniform-C;  evening  full  dress  without  swords  and 

with  blue  caps. 

C  Y 

Unifonn-C ;  dinner  dress. 

C  YA 

C  YB 

Dress.    Officers  of  the  Marine  Corps. 

C  YD 

Special  full  dress. 

CYE 

Special  full  dress  with  full  dress  trousers. 

C  YF 

Special  full  dress  with  white  trousers. 

C  YG 

Special  full  dress  mounted. 

C  YH 

White  special  full  dress. 

C  Y  I 

Full  dress.                                           ^ 

CY  J 

Full  dress  with  white  trousers. 

C  YK 

Full  dress  mounted. 

CYL 

White  full  dress. 

C  YM 

Undress. 

C  YN 

Undress  with  white  caps. 

C  YO 

Undress  with  white  trousers  and  white  caps. 

C  YP 

Undress  without  swords. 

C  YQ 

Undress  with  white  caps,  without  swords. 

C  YR 

Undress  with  white  trousers  and  white  caps  without 

swords.                                                                  / 

C  YS 

Undress  mounted. 

C  YT 

Undress  mounted,  with  white  caps. 

C  YU 

Undress  mounted,  without  swords. 

€  YY 

Undress  mounted,  with  white  caps,  without  swords. 

C  YW 

White  undress. 

C  YX 

White  undress  without  swords. 

C  YZ 

White  undress  with  undress  trousers. 

CZ 

White    undress     with    undress     trousers,     without 

swords. 

CZ  A 

Mess  dress. 

X40 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signal  meanings. 


Dress.     Officers  of  the  Marine  Corps — Continued. 
Mess  dress  with  undress  caps. 
Mess  dress  with  white  mess  jacket. 
White  mess  dress. 
Summer  field  dress. 

Summer  field  dress  with  field  trousers,  without  leg- 
gings. 
Summer  field  dress  without  coats,  with  flannel  shirts. 
Summer  field  dress  without  coats,  with  flannel  shirts 

and  field  trousers,  without  leggings. 
Summer  field  dress  with  summer  field  caps. 
Summer  field  dress  with  field  trousers  and  summer 

field  caps,  without  leggings. 
Summer  field  dress  with  field  trousers,  flannel  shirts, 

and  summer  field  caps,  without  coats  or  leggings. 
Winter  field  dress. 

Winter  field  dress  with  trousers,  without  leggings. 
Winter  field  dress  with  flannel  shirts,  without  coats. 
Winter  field  dress  with  trousers  and  flannel  shirts, 

without  coats  or  leggings. 
Winter  field  dress  with  winter  field  caps. 
Winter   field   dress   with  trousers   and   winter   field 

caps,  without  leggings. 
Winter  field  dress  with  flannel  shirts  and  winter  field 

caps,  without  coats. 
Winter  field  dress  with  trousers,  flannel  shirts,  and 

winter  field  caps,  without  coats  or  leggings. 


Dress.     Enlisted  men  of  the  Navy. 
Blue  dress. 

Blue  dress  with  white  hats. 

Blue   dress    with   white   hats ;    chief   petty   officers, 
bandsmen,  and  servants  in  white  trousers. 
Blue  undress. 

Blue  undress  with  white  hats. 
Blue  undress  with  white  hats ;  chief  petty  officers, 

bandsmen,  and  servants  in  white  trousers. 
Blue  undress  without  jumpers,  and  white  hats. 
White  dress. 
White  dress  with  blue  trousers. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


141 


Signals. 


Signal  meanings. 


Dress.     Enlisted  men  of  the  Navy — Continued. 
White  undress. 

White  undress  with  blue  trousers. 
White  undress  without  jumpers. 
Blue  working  dress. 
Blue  working  dress  with  white  hats. 
Blue  working  dress  with  white  hats ;  chief  petty  offi- 
cers, bandsmen,  and  servants  in  white  trousers. 
White  working  dress. 
Dungarees  with  blue  caps. 
Dungarees  with  white  hats. 
Dungarees  with  watch  caps. 


Dress.-    Enlisted  Men  of  the  Marine  Corps. 
Dress. 

Dress  with  white  cap  covers. 
Dress  with  white  trousers  and  white  cap  covers. 
Summer  field  dress. 

Summer  field  dress  with  summer  field  cap  covers. 
Summer  field  dress  with  flannel  shirts,  without  coats. 
Summer  field  dress  with  flannel  shirts  and  summer 

field  cap  covers,  without  coats. 
Summer  field  dress  without  leggings. 
Summer  field  dress  with  summer  fi.eld  cap  covers, 

without  leggings. 
Summer  field  dress  with  flannel  shirts,  without  coats 

and  without  leggings. 
Summer  field  dress  with  flannel  shirts  and  summer 

field  cap  covers,  without  coats  and  without  leg- 
gings. 
Winter  field  dress. 

Winter  field  dress  with  winter  field  caps. 
Winter  field  dress  with  flannel  shirts,  without  coats. 
Winter  field  dress  with  flannel  shirts  and  winter  field 

caps,  without  coats. 
Winter  field  dress  without  leggings. 
Winter  field  dress  with  winter  field  caps,   without 

leggings. 
Winter  field  dress  with  flannel  shirts,  without  coats 

and  without  leggings. 


142 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signal  meanings. 


Dress.     Enlisted  Men  of  the  Marine  Corps — Contd. 
Winter  field  dress  with  flannel  shirts  and  winter  field 
caps,  without  coats  and  without  leggings. 


Dress.     Bandsmen  of  the  Navy. 

(Note. — The  following  signals  need  not  be  made  unless  a  uniform 
is  to  be  prescribed  for  the  band-s  different  from  that  for  other 
enlisted  men  of  the  Navy.) 

Blue  dress. 

Blue  dress  with  white  cap  covers. 

Blue  dress  with  white  trousers. 

Blue  undress. 

Blue  undress  with  white  cap  covers. 

Blue  undress  with  white  trousers. 

White  dress. 

White  dress  with  blue  trousers. 

White  undress. 

White  undress  with  blue  trousers. 

Blue  working  dress. 

Blue  working  dress  with  white  cap  covers. 

White  working  dress. 


Dress.     Chief   petty   offtcfrs    will,    the    same    as    the 

oflficers. 
Dress.     Chief  petty  officers,  Marines  and  Band  will, 

the  same  as  officers. 
Dress.     Officers  and  Crew-s  will,  the  same  as  yester- 
day. 
Dress.     Officers  and  crew-s,  will,  with  overcoats. 
Dress.     Officers  and  crew-s  will,  without  overcoats. 
Dress.     Officers  and  crew-s  will,  in  blue. 
Dress.    Landing  force  will,  in  the  uniform  of  the  day, 
with  leggings. 
Dress.     Landing  force  will  with  overcoats. 
Dress.    Landing  force  will,  without  overcoats. 
Dress.     Landing  force  will,  in  the  uniform  desig- 
nated, with  leggings. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


143 


Signal  meanings. 


Dress.     OFFICERS  attending  the  ceremonies  or  enter- 
tainment will,  in  the  uniform  indicated. 
Dress.     Officers  attending  the  funeral  will,  in   the 
uniform  of  the  day  or  that  indicated. 
Dress.    Working  parties  will,  in  blue  working  dress. 
Dress.    Working  parties  will,  in  white  working  dress. 
Dress.     Working  parties  will,  with  watch  caps. 
Dress  ship.    (Nation  to  be  honored  may  be  designated.) 
Dress  ship,  .to-morrow,  at  the  hoisting  of  the  colors. 

(Nation  to  be  honored  may  be  designated.) 
Dress  ship,  .to-morrow  at  sunrise.      (Nation  to  be 
honored  may  be  designated.) 
Dress  ship,  full.    (Nation  to  be  honored  may  be  desig- 
nated.) 
Dress  ship,  full,  .to-morrow,  at  the  hoisting  of  the 
colors.   (Nation  to  be  honored  may  be  designated.) 
Dress  ship,  full,  .to-morrow,  at  sunrise.    Nation  to 
be  honored  may  be  designated.) 
Dry.     Hoist  flags  to. 

Dry  all  wet  gear  and  clothing. 
Engine-s.  .and  boilers.     Permission  requested  to  over- 
haul and  clean.    (Number  of  days  required  as  in- 
dicated.)  B  L  S 

Engine-s.  .and  boiler-s  may  be  overhauled.     (Num- 
ber of  days  allowed  may  be  indicated.)  .  . . .  B  L  T 
Engine-s.  .and  boilers.    Overhaul  and  put  in  order, 

with  least  possible  delay BLU 

Engine-s.     Repair. 
Engineer  0FFiCER-s( senior)  :    Repair  on  board  this  or 

designated  ship  now  or  at  time  indicated. 
Entertainment,  .on  board  this  or  designated   ship  or 
at    designated    place    at    time    indicated.     Crew-s 
are    invited    to    attend.     (Number    may   be    indi- 
cated.)     CHO 

Entertainment.     Officers    attending    the    ceremonies 

or,  will  dress  in  the  uniform  designated. . .  1)  C  P 

Entertainment,  .on  board  this  or  designated  ship  or 

at  designated  place  at  time  indicated.     Officers  are 

invited  to  attend.    (Number  may  be  indicated.) 


144 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signals. 


Signal  meanings. 


Equipped.     Fully. 

Equipped.     Lightly. 
Excused,  .from  guard  duty  to-morrow  or  day  designated. 
Excused,  .from  shore  patrol. 
Excused,  .from  obeying  the  last  signal. 
Executive  officer-s  :  Repair  on  board  this  or  designated 
ship  now  or  at  time  indicated. 

Fires.    Bank X  T  R 

Fires.     Bank,   low.     Ships   with   water  tube  boilers 

allow  unnecessary  fires  to  die  out B  C  M 

Fires.     Let  unnecessary,  die  out. 
Fires.     Light. 

Fires.     Spread XTU 

Fire  and  Rescue  Parties.     Send,  to  the  place  or  ship 
designated  or  requiring  them. 

Flags.     Hoist,  to  dry DEL 

Flags  or  bunting.     Pipe  down. 
Flag  lieutenant-s  :  Repair  on  board  this  or  the  ship 

designated  now  or  at  time  indicated. 
Fog  bell.     Sound  ship's  call  letter  on,  to  indicate  position. 

Fog.    Form  for X  T  ^V 

Fuel  or  coal  reports.     Make B  X  E 

Funeral,  .ceremonies  will  begin  at  the  time  indicated.  . 

BS  J 
Funeral,  .honors  will  be  paid  to  the  deceased  at  the 

time  indicated. 
Funeral.     Officers  that  can  be  spared  from  duty  will 

attend  the,  (at  the  time  and  place  indicated). 
Funeral.     Officers  and  men  that  can  be  spared  from 
duty  will  attend  the,   in  prescribed   uniform    (at 
time  and  place  indicated). 
Funeral.     Officers   attending  the,   will   dress  in   the 

uniform  of  the  day  or  that  designated D  C  Q 

Funeral.     Officers  are  invited  to  attend  the  (at  the 
time  and  place  indicated). 
Garbage  may  be  thrown  overboard  at  this  anchorage. 
Guard  boats  will  make  mail  trips  at  hour-s  indicated. 
Guard  mail.     Send,  to  this  or  designated  ship  or  place 

now  or  at  time  indicated.    < 
GuNNER-s :  Repair  on  board  this  or  designated  ship  now 
or  at  time  indicated. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


145 


Signal  meanings. 


Hail.     Come  within,  of  this  cr  designated  ship.  .X  V  T 
Hammocks.     Pipe  down  scrubbed. 

Hammocks.     Reef  scrubbed. 

Hammocks.     Scrub. 

Hammocks.     Shake  out  reef  in  scrubbed. 
Harbor  master.     Arrange  with,  to  take  your  ship-s  to 
buoy-s  or  berth-s. 

Heave  short XYU 

Hoist  all  boats 1 BJY 

Hoist  in  all  boats B  J  TV 

Hoist  out  all  boats BJX 

Hoist  in  power  boat-s. 

Hoist  out  power  boat-s. 
Hospital  ship  or  ship  designated  will  leave  with  sick  and 

wounded  at  time  indicated. 
Hospital  ticket-s.   Send,  of  persons  invalided  to  this  or 

designated  ship  or  place. 
Intercourse.     Permit,  with  the  shore. 
Leave  of  absence.     Grant. 

Leave  of  absence.     Grant  the  usual,  to  officers. 

Leave  of  absence.     Grant  the  usual,  to  officers  and 
men. 
Liberty.     Grant,  to  crew-s  for  number  of  hours  indi- 
cated. 

Liberty.     Grant,  to  special  first  conduct  class  men. 

Liberty.     Grant  to  first  conduct  class  men. 

Liberty.     Grant  the  usual,  to  crews. 
Liberty  men.     Recall  all. 
Mail  has  arrived  (from  place  that  may  be  designated). 

Mail.     Send  for,  to  consulate  of  U.  S.  or  nation  in- 
dicated   CEU 

Mail.     Have,  for  the  fleet  or  ships  present. 

Mail.     An    opportunity   offers    for   sending,   at    the 
time  indicated. 

Mail.     An    opportunity   offers    for    sending,   to   the 
place  or  in  the  direction  indicated. 

Mail.     Send  to  post  office  for  the. 

Mail.     Send,  to  post  office. 

Mail.     Send  on  shore  for  the. 

Mail.     Send,  on  shore. 

Mail.     Send  for,  to  this  or  designated  ship. 


146 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signal  meanings. 


Mail — Continued. 

Mail,     ^jend,  to  this  or  designated  ship. 
Mail.    Wait  for  the. 
Man  overboard. 

Man  the  rail  or  yards. 

Man  (men).    Need.    (Ratings  and  numbers  may  be 

indicated.) 
Man  (men).     Recall  all,  without  delay. 
Man  (men).. has  (have)  been  saved. 
Man    (men).    Send,  to  this  or  designated   ship  or 

place.     (Ratings  and  numbers  may  follow.) 
Man    (men).. whose   terms   of   service   will    expire 
within  the  number  of  days  indicated.    Send  list  of 
names  and  ratings  of. 
Man   (men).. whose  terms  of  service  have  expired. 

Send  list  of  names  and  ratings  of. 
Man   (men).. whose  terms  of  service  have  expired 
or  will  expire  within  the  number  of   days  indi- 
cated.    Report  by  signal  ratings  and  numbers  of. 
Marines.     Commanding  officer-s  of :   Repair,  on  board 
this  or  designated  ship  now  or  at  time  indicated. 
Meat.     Fresh,  may  be  drawn  from  supply  ship  as  indi- 
cated in  days'  rations  for  ship's  company  as  indi- 
cated by  numeral  following. 

Medical  assistance.     Need AT  I 

Medical  officer-s,  Senior :  Repair  on  board  this  or  des- 
ignated ship  now  or  at  time  indicated. 
Medical  officer-s.     Send  a,  or  number  indicated  to 
this  or  designated  ship  or  place. 
Moor  ship.     (Under  Negative:   "Unmoor"  or  "Do  not 

moor.")    Y  R W 

Moor  to  buoy-s  or  to  one-s  indicated BO  1 

Navigator-s  :  Repair  on  board  this  or  designated  ship 

now  or  at  time  indicated. 
Navy  yard.     Supplies  will  be  sent  from,  or  naval  sta- 
tion. 

Need  articles  or  supplies  as  indicated A  S  0 

Numeral.     The,  signal  following  represents  thousands; 
a  second  numeral  signal  following  represents  units. 
Ordnance  officer-s  :   Repair  on  board  this  or  the  desig- 
nated ship  now  or  at  time  indicated. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


147 


Signal  meanings. 


Overboard.     Man    FDJ 

Pass  in  review. 

Pay  officer-s  of  ships :     Repair  on  board  this  or  the 

designated  ship  now  or  at  time  indicated. 
Permission  granted  to  proceed. 
Position  buoys.     Put  over.   (Under  Negative:     "Take 

in.") 
Power  Boat-s.    Prepare,  for  use. 

Power  boat-s.    Send,  to  tow  or  assist  vessel  in  dis- 
tress or  designated. 
Pratique  has  been  granted. 
Prepare  for  review. 
Proceed. 

Proceed  on  service  assigned. 
Provisions.     Fresh.     Can  procure,  on  shore  or  at  place 
designated. 
Provisions.     Send  to  supply  ship  or  ship  or  place 
designated  for,  or  suppHes. 
Race  is  postponed  indefinitely  or  until  time  indicated. 
Race  will  start  at  time  indicated. 

Racing.    Prepare  boats  for .BKF 

Racing.    Recall  the,  boats.  , 
Register.    Use  the  Navy,  of  the  date  of  which  the  last 

two  figures  are  indicated  by  numeral. 
Rescue  those  in  distress. 

Rescue  the  drowning  person-s. 
Rescue  the  fugitive-s  or  refugee-s. 
Rescue  the  wrecked  people. 

Search  Light-s.    Use,  as  prescribed  for  fog YWS 

Salute  the  Commander-in-Chief  or  person  designated. 

Semaphore  signal  system.    Use. 

Sick  and  wounded.    Hospital  ship-s  or  ship-s  designated 

will  leave  with  the,  at  time  indicated EST 

Signal  drill,  now  or  at  time  designated,  with  flag  hoists 

or  by  method  designated. 
Signal  drill,  now  or  at  time  designated ;   ship  desig- 
nated   leading    ship;    ships    whose    distinguishing 
pennants  are  shown  under  first  repeater,  repeating 
ships. 


143 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signals. 


Signal  meanings. 


Signals.    Storm,  are  displayed  on  shore.     (Direction  of 
approaching  wind  may  follow.) 

Signals.     Use  Ardois,  system APY 

Signals.    Use  blinker,  system BOM 

Signals.    Use  boat   BLN 

Signals.    Use  semaphore,  system HDY 

Signals.     Use  sound,  system. 
Signals.     Use  Very,  system. 
Signals.     Use  wigwag,  system. 
Signal  Books.     Send  naval,  to  this  or  designated  ship 

for  comparison  and  correction. 
Signal  officer-s  :     Repair  on  board  this  or  designated 
ship  now  or  at  time  indicated. 

Spare.     Can,  article-s  indicated ASR 

Spare  for  the  use  of  this  or  designated  ship.    Report 
by  signal  the  quantities  of  article-s  indicated  that 

you   can    AST 

Speed.  Be  prepared  to  make,  indicated  in  quarter  knots 
at  the  time  indicated. 
Speed.  Each  ship  or  the  ship-s  addressed  will  re- 
port the  number  of  hours  required  to  have  steam 
for  standard,  designated  in  knots. 
Speed.  Standard,  will  be  or  will  be  changed  at  the 
time  indicated  to  that  indicated  in  quarter  knots. 

Streets  are  barricaded BCX 

Streets  are  cleared. 
Supper.    Men  going  on  duty  will  take,  with  them. 

Supper.     There  will  be  time  for  the  .crew-s  to  get 
their. 

Underway.    Get,  now  or  at  time  indicated Z  Y  S 

Uniform.    See  Dress. 

Time.     Shown  by  accompanying  hoist  under  numeral, 
answering  pennant  separating  hours  from  minutes. 
Unmoor,  .ship. 

Unmoor.,  ship     and     ride     to     upstream     anchor. 

Fathoms  may  be  indicated  by  numeral. 
Unmoor.. ship    and    ride    to    downstream    anchor. 

Fathoms  may  be  indicated  by  numeral. 
Unmoor,  .ship  on  next  ebb  tide,  and  ride  to  upstream 
anchor.    Fathoms  may  be  indicated  by  numeral. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


149 


Signals. 


Signal  meanings. 


HWL 
HWP 


HY 
QSR 

QS  T 
RXW 
RXY 
RYQ 
XTR 
XTU 
XTW 
XYT 
XYU 
YRW 

YWS 
Z  YS 
Z  YX 


Unmoor,  .ship  on  next  flood  tide,  and  ride  to  down- 
stream   anchor.      Fathoms   may   be    indicated   by 
numeral. 
Vegetables.    Fresh,  may  be  drawn  from  supply  ship  as 
indicated  in  days'  rations  for  ship's  company  by 
numeral. 
Well  done.     (Under  Negative  :    "  Badly  done.").Z  Y  X 
Whistle.    Sound  the. 

Anchor.    Number  of  fathoms  of  cable  may  follow  (on 
each  anchor  in  mooring). 
Anchor  in  berths  previously  assigned. 
Cast  or  turn  to  starboard. 

Cast  or  turn  to  port. 
Close  up. 
Fires.     Bank. 

Fires.    Spread. 
Fog.     Form  for. 
Hail.    Come  within,  of  this  or  designated  ship. 
Heave  short. 
Moor  ship.     (Under  Negative:    "Unmoor"  or  "Do  not 

moor.") 
Searchlight-s.    Use,  as  prescribed  for  fog. 
Underway.    Get,  now  or  at  the  time  indicated. 
Well  done.     (Under  Negative:     "Badly  done.") 


CHAPTER  XL 
BOAT  SIGNALS. 

Note. — Boat  signals  are  entered  in  only  one  place,  being  divided 
for  convenience  into  various  classes  and  subheadings.  See  Intro- 
duction, Arts.  3-7. 


Signal  meanings. 


BOAT    DRILL    SIGNALS. 

Formation  and  order. 

Form  column. 

Form  column  with  the  boats  of  each  flotilla  in  the  order 
best  adapted  for  towing. 

Form  column  on  this  or  designated  boat. 

Form  column  on  starboard  beam  of  this  or  designated 
ship. 

Form  column  on  port  beam  of  this  or  designated  ship. 

Form  column  with  power  boats  of  each  ship  flotilla  tow- 
ing the  pulling  boats. 

Form  line. 

Form  line  on  this  or  designated  boat. 

Form  line  on  starboard  beam  of  this  or  designated  ship. 

Form  line  on  port  beam  of  this  or  designated  ship. 

Form  line  of  ship  flotillas. 

Form  line  of  division  flotillas. 

Form  ship  flotillas  for  service  as  previously  arranged. 

Form  as  prescribed  for  making  an  opposed  landing. 

Formation.     Leave  the,  and  follow  at  such  speed  as  can. 

Formation.     Leave  the,  and  return  to  your  ship-s.  . 

Order  of  ship  flotillas  in  formation  is  as  indicated  by 
ship  calls. 

Order.  Ship  flotillas :  Form  in  inverted  of  flotillas  in 
formation. 

Ship  flotillas  or  the  one  addressed :  Form  column  on 
starboard  beam  of  respective  ships. 


150 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


151 


Signals. 

Signal  meanings. 

BOAT  DRILL  SIGNALS— Continued. 

' 

Formation  and  order — Continued. 

JAU 

Ship  flotillas  or  the  one  addressed :    Form  column   on 

port  beam  of  respective  ships. 

JAY 

Ship  flotillas  or  the  one  addressed :    Form  individual 

column-s  on  starboard  beam  of  this  or  designated 

ship-s. 

JAW 

Ship   flotillas   or  the   one   addressed :     Form   individual 

column-s  on  port  beam  of  this  or  designated  ship-s. 

J  AX 

JAY 

Primary   movements. 

J  AZ 

JB 

Boats  right  15  degrees. 

JBA 

Boats  right  30  degrees. 

JBC 

Boats  right  45  degrees. 

JBD 

Boats  right  60  degrees. 

JBE 

Boats  right  75  degrees. 

JBF 

Boats  right  90  degrees. 

JBG 

Boats  right  about,  180  degrees. 

JBH 

Boats  right,  number   of   degrees   indicated  by  numeral 

or  to  course  indicated. 

JBI 

Boats  left  15  degrees. 

JBK 

Boats  left  30  degrees. 

JBL 

Boats  left  45  degrees. 

JBM 

Boats  left  60  degrees. 

JBN 

Boats  left  75  degrees. 

JBO 

Boats  left  90  degrees. 

JBP 

Boats  left  about,  180  degrees. 

JBQ 

Boats  left,  number  of  degrees  indicated  by  numeral  or 

to  course  indicated. 

JBR 

Column-s  right  15  degrees. 

JBS 

Column-s  right  30  degrees. 

J  BT 

Column-s  right  45  degrees. 

152 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signals. 


Signal  meanings. 


BOAT  DRILL  SIGNALS— Continued. 
Primary  movements — Continued. 

Column-s  right  60  degrees. 

Column-s  right  75  degrees. 

Column-s  right  90  degrees. 

Column-s  right  countermarch ;  head  of  column-s  right 
about. 

Column-s  right,  number  of  degrees  indicated  by  numeral 
or  to  course  indicated. 

Column-s  left  15  degrees. 

Column-s  left  30  degrees. 

Column-s  left  45  degrees. 

Column-s  left  60  degrees. 

Column-s  left  75  degrees. 

Column-s  left  90  degrees. 

Column-s  left  countermarch ;  head  of  colnmn-s  left 
about. 

Column-s  left,  number  of  degrees  indicated  by  numeral 
or  to  course  indicated. 

Ship  flotillas,  Column  right  15  degrees. 

Ship  flotillas.  Column  right  30  degrees. 

Ship  flotillas,  Column  right  45  degrees. 

Ship  flotillas,  Column  right  60  degrees. 

Ship  flotillas,  Column  right  75  degrees. 

Ship  flotillas,  Column  right  90  degrees. 

Ship  flotillas,  right  countermarch,   180  degrees. 

Ship  flotillas,  Column  right,  number  of  degrees  indi- 
cated by  numeral  or  to  coursee  indicated. 

Ship  flotillas,  Column  left  15  degrees. 

Ship  flotillas  Column  left  30  degrees. 

Ship  flotillas.  Column  left  45  degrees. 

Ship  flotillas,  Column  left  60  degrees. 

Ship  flotillas,  Column  left  75  degrees. 

Ship  flotillas.  Column  left  90  degrees. 

Ship  flotillas,  left  countermarch,  180  degrees. 

Ship  flotillas,  Column  left,  number  of  degrees  indicated 
by  numeral  or  to  course  indicated. 

Front,  change,  to  the  right  15  degrees,  oblique  method. 

Front,  change,  to  the  right  30  degrees,  oblique  method. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


153 


Signals. 


Signal  meanings. 


JD 

JDA 

JDB 

JDC 

JDE 


JDF 
JDO 
JDH 
JD  I 
JDK 
JDL 
JDM 


JDN 
JDO 


BOAT  DRILL  SIGNALS— Continued. 


Primary  movements — Continued. 


Front, 
Front, 
Front, 
Front, 
Front 


Front 
Front 
Front 
Front 
Front 
Front, 
Front 


change, 
change, 
change, 
change, 
,  change, 
number 
method. 
,  change, 
,  change, 
,  change 
,  change, 
,  change, 
,  change, 
,  change, 
number 
method. 


to  the  right  45  degrees,  oblique  method, 
to  the  right  60  degrees,  oblique  method, 
to  the  right  75  degrees,  oblique  method, 
to  the  right  90  degrees,  oblique  method, 
to  the  right  to  course  indicated  or  the 
of  degrees  indicated  by  numeral,  oblique 

to  the  left  15  degrees,  obHque  method, 
to  the  left  30  degrees,  oblique  method, 
to  the  left  45  degrees  oblique  method, 
to  the  left  60  degrees,  oblique  method, 
to  the  left  75  degrees,  obHque  method, 
to  the  left  90  degrees,  oblique  method. 
,  to  the  left  to  course  indicated  or  the 
of  degrees  indicated  by  numeral,  oblique 


Note. — The  14  preceding  signals  for  changing  front  are  to  be  used 
when  in  Line  or  Line  of  Flotillas  or  Column  of  Flotillas.  In  other 
cases  of  changing  course  use  the  previous  signals  in  this  section. 


154  The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 

MAGNETIC   COMPASS    SIGNALS. 

All  courses  or  bearings  are  Magnetic. 


Northeast  quadrant. 

Signals. 

De- 
grees. 

Points. 

Signals. 

De- 
grees. 

Potots. 

JDP 

jDa 

JDR 

JDS 

JDT 

JDir 

JDV 

JDW 

JDX 

JDY 

JDZ 

JE 

JEA 

JEB 

JEO 

JED 

JEF 

JEG 

JEH 

JEI 

JEE 

JEL 

JEM 

JEN 

JEO 

JEP 

JEQ 

JER 

JES 

JET 

JEU 

JEV 

JEW 

JEX 

JEY 

JEZ 

JF 

JFA 

JFB 

JFO 

JFD 

JFE 

JFG 

JFH 

JFI 

JFK 

0* 
!• 
2*» 
3' 
4« 
6» 
6» 
7» 
8» 
9» 

11* 
12*» 
13« 
14- 
15* 
16« 
!?• 
18» 

20« 
21* 
22* 
23'* 
24«» 
25' 
26« 
27  *• 
28*» 
29» 
30* 
SI'* 
32» 
33"» 
34» 
35"» 
SB* 
37  • 
38" 
39** 
40» 

J^: 

43« 
44  • 
45* 

North. 

JFK 

JFL 

JFM 

JFN 

JFO 

JFP 

JFQ 

JFR 

JFS 

JFT 

JFTT 

JFV 

JFW 

JFX 

JFY 

JFZ 

JG 

JGA 

JGB 

JGC 

JGD 

JGE 

JGF 

JGH 

JGI 

JGK 

JGL 

JGM 

JGN 

JGO 

JGP 

JGQ 

JGR 

JGS 

JGT 

JGU 

JGV 

JGW 

JGX 

JGY 

JGZ 

JH 

JHA 

JHB 

JHO 

JHD 

45" 
46" 
470 

48» 
49* 
50* 
51* 
52* 
53* 
54* 
55* 
56* 
57« 
58* 
69* 
60* 
61* 
62* 
63* 
64* 
65* 
66* 
67* 
68* 
69* 
70* 
71* 
72* 
73* 
74* 
75* 
76* 
77* 
78« 
79* 
80* 
81* 
82* 
83* 
84* 
85* 
86* 
87* 
88* 
89* 
90* 

ne. 

... .V  ... . 

neV*  ■ 

East.*** 

The  Deck  and  Boat  Book.  I55 

MAGNETIC  COMPASS  SIGNALS— Continued. 

All  courses  or  bearings  are  Magnetic. 


Southeast  quadrant. 

Signals. 

De- 
grees. 

Points. 

Signals. 

De- 
grees. 

Points. 

JHD 

JHE 

JHF 

JHG 

JHI 

JHK 

JHL 

JHM 

JHN 

JHG 

JHP 

JHQ 

JHR 

JHS 

JHT 

JHU 

JHV 

JHW 

JHX 

JHY 

JHZ 

JI 

JIA 

JIB 

JIG 

JID 

JIE 

JIF 

JIG 

JIH 

JIK 

JIL 

JIM 

JIN 

JIG 

JIP 

JIQ 

JIR 

JIS 

JIT 

JIU 

JIV 

JIW 

JIX 

JIY 

JIZ 

90 "» 

9r 

93' 
94«» 
95  » 
96» 
97" 
98» 
99' 
100" 
101" 
102' 
103* 
104' 
105' 
106' 
107' 
108' 
109' 
110' 
111' 
112' 
113' 
114' 
115' 
116' 
117' 
118' 
119' 
120' 
121 « 
122' 
123' 
124' 
125' 
126' 
127' 
128' 
129' 
130' 
131' 
132' 
133' 
134' 
135' 

East. 

JIZ 
JK 
JKA 
J  KB 
JKC 
JKB 
JKE 
JKF 
JKG 
JKH 
JKI 
JKL 
JKM 
JKN 
JKG 
1      JKP 
JKQ 
JKR 
JKS 
JKT 
JKU 
JKV 
JKW 
JKX 
JKY 
JKZ 
JL 
JLA 
JLB 
JLC 
JLD 
JLE 
JLF 
JLG 
JLH 
JLI 
JLK 
JLM 
JLN 
JLG 
JLP 
JLQ 
JLR 
JLS 
JLT 
JLIT 

135' 
136' 
137' 
138' 
139' 
140' 
141' 
142' 
143' 
144' 
145' 
146' 
147' 
148' 
149' 
150' 
151' 
152' 
153' 
154' 
155' 
156' 
157  « 
158' 
159' 
160' 
161' 
162' 
163' 
164' 
165' 
166' 
167' 
168' 
169' 
170' 
171' 
172' 
173' 
174' 
176' 
176' 
177' 
178' 
179' 
180' 

SE. 
'. . . 

South. 

SE. 

156 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


MAGNETIC  COMPASS  SIGNALS— Continued. 

All  courses  or  bearings  are  Magnetic. 


Southwest  quadrant. 

Signalib. 

De- 
grees. 

PpintS. 

Signals. 

De- 

grees. 

.Points. 

JLU 

JLV 

JLW 

JLX 

JLY 

JLZ 

JM 

JMA 

JMB 

JMC 

JMD 

JME 

JMF 

JMG 

JMH 

JMI 

JMK 

JML 

JMN 

JMO 

JMP 

JMQ 

JMR 

JMS 

JMT 

JMXT 

JMV 

JMW 

JMX 

JMY 

JMZ 

JN 

JNA 

JNB 

JNC 

JND 

JNE 

JNF 

JNG 

JNH 

JNI 

JNK 

JNL 

JNM 

JNO 

JNP 

180« 
181* 
182'' 
183* 
1840 
185* 
186" 
187* 
188" 
189' 
190" 
191° 
192" 
193° 
194° 
195° 
196° 
197° 
198° 
199° 
200° 
201  • 
202° 
203° 
204° 
205° 
206° 
207° 
208° 
209° 
210° 
211° 

fl' 

214° 
215° 
216° 
217° 
218° 
219° 
220° 
221  • 
222° 
223° 
224» 
225° 

Soutji. 

JNP 

JNQ 

JNR 

JNS 

JNT- 

JNU 

JNV 

JNW 

JNX 

JNY 

JNZ 

JO 

JOA 

JOB 

JOC 

JOD 

JOE 

JOF 

JOG 

JOH 

JOI 

JOK 

JOL 

225° 
226° 
227° 
228° 
229° 
230° 
231° 
232° 
233° 
234° 
235° 
236° 
237° 
238° 
239° 
240° 
241° 
242° 
243° 
244° 
245° 
246° 
247° 
248° 
249° 
250° 
251° 
252° 
253° 
254° 
255° 
256° 
257° 
258° 
259° 
260° 
261* 
262° 
263° 
264° 
265° 
266° 
267° 
268° 
269° 
270° 

SW. 

'..'.'.'.'.'.'.. \ 

1 

. 

1 

JOM 
JON 

......... 

J  OP 

JOQ 

JOR 

JOS 

JOT 

JOU 

JOV 

JOW 

JOX 

JOY 

JOZ 

JP 

JPA 

JPB 

JPC 

JPD 

JPE 

JPF 

JPG 

JPH 

JPI 



sw.'*" 

West. 

The  Dfxk  and  Boat  Book.  i57 

MAGNETIC  COMPASS  SIGNALS— Continued. 

All  courses  or  bearings  are  Magnetic. 


Northwest  quadrant. 

Signals. 

De- 
grees. 

Points. 

Signals. 

De- 
grees. 

Points. 

JPI 

JPK 

JPL 

JPM 

JPN 

JPO 

JPQ 

JPR 

JPS 

JPT 

JPU 

JPV 

JPW 

JPX 

JPY 

JPZ 

JQ 

JQA 

JQB 

JQC 

JQD 

JQ£ 

JQF 

JQG 

JQH 

JQL 

JQM 

JQir 

JQO 

JQP 

JQR 

JQS 

JQT 

JQU 

JQV 

JQW 

JQX 

JQY 

JQZ 

JR 

JRA 

JRB 

JRC 

JRD 

270° 
271° 
272° 
273" 
274° 
275° 
276° 
277° 
278° 
279° 
280° 
281° 
282° 
283° 
284° 
285° 
286° 
287° 
288° 
289° 
290° 
291° 
292° 
293° 
294° 
295° 
296° 
297° 
298° 
299° 
300° 
301° 
302° 
303° 
304° 
305° 
306° 
307° 
308° 
309° 
310° 
311° 
312° 
313° 
314° 
315° 

West. 

JRD 
'      JRE 
JRF 
JRG 
JRH 
JRI 
JRK. 
JRL 
JRM 
JRN 
JRO 
JRP 
JRQ 
JRS 
<      JRT 
JRU 
JRV 
JRW 
JRX 
JRY 
JRZ 
JS 
JSA 
JSB 
JSC 
JSD 
JSE 
JSF 
JSG 
JSH 
JSI 
JSK 
JSL 
JSM 
JSN 
JSO 
JSP 
JSQ 
JSR 
JST 

jsir 

JSV 
JSW 
JSX 
JSY 
JDP 

315° 
316° 
317° 
'318° 
319° 
320° 
321° 
322° 
323° 
324° 
325° 
326° 
327° 
328° 
329° 
330° 
331° 
332° 
333° 
334° 
335° 
336° 
337° 
338° 
339° 
340° 
341° 
342° 
343° 
344° 
345° 
346° 
347' 
348° 
349° 
350° 
351° 
352° 
353° 
354* 
355° 
356° 
357° 
358° 
359° 
360° 

NVV. 
North,' 



NW. 

158 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signal  meanings. 


BOAT  DRILL  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Evolutions  from  column. 

Form  line  to  the  front. — Rear  boats,  right  oblique. 

Form  line  to  the  front. — Rear  boats,  left  oblique. 

Form  line  of  ship  flotillas. — Rear  ship  flotillas,  column 
right  30  degrees. 

Form  line  of  ship  flotillas. — Rear  ship  flotillas,  column 
left  30  degrees. 

Form  line  of  division  flotillas. — Rear  division  flotillas, 
column  right  30  degrees. 

Form  line  of  division  flotillas. — Rear  division  flotillas, 
column  left  30  degrees. 

Form  column  of  ship  flotillas. — Ship  flotilla  leaders,  for- 
ward; other  boats,  right  oblique. 

Form  column  of  ship  flotillas. — Ship  flotilla  leaders  for- 
ward ;  other  boats,  left  oblique. 

Evolutions  from  column  of  ship   (or  division)   Hotillas. 

Form  column  to  the  front. — Right  boats  of  ship  (or 
division)  flotillas,  forward ;  other  boats,  right  ob- 
lique. ' 

Form  column  to  the  front. — Left  boats  of  ship  (or 
division)  flotillas,  forward;  other  boats,  left  ob- 
lique. 

Form  line  to  the  front. — Leading  ship  (or  division)  flo- 
tilla, forward ;  other  flotillas,  boats  right  oblique. 

Form  line  to  the  front. — Leading  ship  (or  division) 
flotilla,  forward ;  other  flotillas,  boats  left  oblique. 

Evolutions  from  line. 

Form  column  to  the  front. — Right  boat,  forward;  other 
boats,  right  oblique. 

Form  column  to  the  front. — Left  boat,  forward;  other 
boats  left  oblique. 

Form  column  of  ship  flotillas. — Right  ship  flotilla,  for- 
ward ;  other  ship  flotillas,  boats  right  oblique. 

Form  column  of  ship  flotillas. — Left  ship  flotilla,  for- 
ward; other  ship  flotillas,  boats  left  oblique. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


159 


Signal  meanings. 


BOAT  DRILL  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Evolutions  from  line — Continued. 

Form  line  of  ship  flotillas. — Right  boats  of  ship  flotillas, 

forward ;  other  boats,  right  oblique. 
Form  line  of  ship  flotillas. — Left  boats  of  ship  flotillas 

forward ;  other  boats,  left  oblique. 
Form  line  of  division  flotillas. — Right  boats  of  division 

flotillas  forward;  other  boats,  right  oblique. 
Form  line  of  division  flotillas. — Left  boats  of  division 

flotillas,  forward;  other  boats,  left  oblique. 

Evolutions  from  line  of  ship  (or  division)  flotillas. 

Form  column  to  the  front. — Right  ship  (or  division) 
flotilla  forward;  other  ship  flotillas,  column  right 
30  degrees. 

Form  column  to  the  front. — Left  ship  (or  division) 
flotilla  forward ;  other  ship  flotillas,  column  left 
30  degrees. 

Form  line  to  the  front. — Ship  (or  division)  flotilla  lead- 
ers forward ;  other  boats,  right  oblique. 

Form  line  to  the  front. — Ship  (or  division)  flotilla  lead- 
ers forward;  other  boats,  left  oblique. 


Speed. 

Speed. 

Speed. 

Speed. 

Speed. 

Speed. 

Speed. 

Stop. 

Back. 

Speed. 

Speed. 


Speed. 

Make  all  possible. 

Make,  indicated  in  quarter  knots  by  numeral. 

Standard,  make. 

Full,  make. 

Steerage  way,  Maintain. 

Increase  a  little. 

Decrease  a  little. 


Two-thirds,  make. 
One-third,  make. 


i6o 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signals. 


Signal  meanings. 


BOAT  DRILL  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Distance  and  interval. 

Distance.  Take  standard. 

Distance.  Take  double. 

Distance.  Take  half. 

Distance.  Take  proper. 

Distance.  Take,  as  indicated  in  boat  lengths  by  numeral. 

Distance.  Observe,  carefully. 

Interval.  Take  standard. 

Interval.  Take  double. 

Interval.  Take  half. 

Interval.  Take  proper. 

Interval.  Take,  as  indicated  in  boat  lengths  by  numeral. 

Interval.  Observe,  carefully. 


Guide. 


Guide  right. 

Gui(Je  left. 

Guide  center. 

Guide.     Observe,  carefully. 


Exercise  under  sail  or  oars. 

Ahead.     Go. 

Assist  sails  with  oars. 

Boats.     All,  Return  to  ships  or  to  ship-s  designated. 

Boats.     Power,  Return  to  ships  or  to  ship-s  designated. 

Boats.     Pulling,  Return  to  ships  or  to  ship-s  designated. 

Boats.     Send  a,  or  number  indicated  alongside  this  or 

designated  ship  or  boat. 
Column.     Form,  by  the  wind  on  starboard  tack. 
Column.     Form,  by  the  wind  on  port  tack. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


i6i 


Signal  meanings. 


BOAT  DRILL  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Exercise  under  sail  or  oars — Continued. 

Come  alongside. 

Come  under  the  bow. 

Come  under  the  stern. 

Course.     Steer  magnetic,  indicated  by  compass  signal. 

Course.     Resume. 

Course.  Change,  now  or  at  time  indicated  to  that  (mag- 
netic) indicated  by  compass  signal. 

Go  off  in  succession  number  of  fifteens  of  degrees  indi- 
cated by  numeral. 

Go  off  together  number  of  fifteens  of  degrees  indicated 
by  numeral. 

Hail.  Ship  flotillas  or  the  one  addressed :  Pass  within, 
of  this  or  designated  ship. 

Haul  by  the  wind  in  succession,  starboard  tack. 

Haul  by  the  wind  in  succession,  port  tack. 

Haul  by  the  wind  together,  starboard  tack. 

Haul  by  the  wind  together,  port  tack. 

Haul  up  in  succession  number  of  fifteens  of  degrees  in- 
dicated by  numeral. 

Haul  up  together  number  of  fifteens  of  degrees  indi- 
cated by  numeral. 

Heave  to,  starboard  tack. 

Heave  to,  port  tack. 

Hold  water.    (Power  boats:  "Deaden  headway.") 

Make  best  of  your  way  to  ship-s. 

Masts.     Step. 

Masts.     Unstep. 

Masts.     Unstep,  before  coming  alongside. 

Oars.     Boat  the. 

Oars.     Get  out. 

Oars.     Get,  ready. 

Oars.     Get  up. 

Oars.     Give  way.    (Power  boats,  go  ahead.) 

Oars.     Give  way  easy.    (Power  boats,  go  slow.) 

Oars.     Give  way  strong.    (Power  boats,  go  ahead  fast.) 


l62 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signals. 

Signal  meanings. 

BOAT  DRILL  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Exercise  under  sail  or  ours — Continued. 

JWR 

Oars.     Lay  on.    (Power  boats,  stop.) 

J>VS 

Oars.    Let  fall. 

JWT 

Oars.     Out,  and  give  way. 

JWU 

Oars.     Toss. 

JWY 

Pass.     Ship   flotillas   or  the   one   addressed,    under   the 

bows  of  this  or  designated  ship. 

JWX 

Pass.     Ship   flotillas   or   the   one   addressed,   under   the 

stern  of  this  or  designated  ship. 

JWY 

Position.     Take. 

JWZ 

Position  or  station.     Resume. 

JX 

Position-s.     Take,  in  accordance  with  prescribed  plan. 

JXA 

Pulling.    Boat-s'  crew-s,  well.    (Under  Negative :  "  Pull- 

ing badly.") 

JXB 

Reef  sails. 

JXC 

Reefs.     Shake  out. 

JXD 

Rowing.     Pay  attention  to  the. 

JXE 

Sails.     Bend. 

JXF 

Sails.     Unbend. 

JXO 

Sail.     Make. 

JXH 

Sail.     Shorten. 

JXI 

Sail.     Take  in. 

JXK 

Sail.     Carrying  too  much. 

JXL 

Sails  are  badly  set. 

JXM 

Sheets  are  too  flat  aft. 

JXN 

Sheets  are  not  flat  enough. 

JXO 

Stern  all. 

JXP 

Stroke.     Keep. 

JXQ 

Stroke.     Take  quicker. 

JXR 

Stroke.     Take  longer. 

JXS 

Tack  in  succession. 

JXT 

Tack  together. 

JXU 

•Wear  in  succession. 

JXV 

Wear  together. 

JXW 

Wind.     Keep  close  to  the. 

JXY 

Wind.    You  are  too  close  to  the. 

JXZ 

The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


163 


Signal  meanings. 


BOAT  DRILL  SIGNALS-^Continued. 

Exercise  with  landing  force. 

Advance.     (Attack.) 

Artillery  boats:    Go  ahead  in  prescribed  formation. 

Artillery  boats:    Cover  the  landing  (or  embarkation). 

Boats  with  guns :  Leave  the  formation  and  form  sepa- 
rately (as  may  have  been  prescribed). 

Boats  without  guns :  Leave  the  formation  and  form 
separately  (as  may  have  been  prescribed). 

(See  signals  JAO,  JX.) 

Boats  with  guns :    Return  to  their  ships. 

Boats  without  guns :    Return  to  their  ships. 

Boats.     All,  Return  to  their  ships. 

Boats.     Send,  for  landing  force  (or  force  ashore). 

Embark. 

Embark  the  field  guns. 

Embark  the  machine  guns. 


Firing.     Commence.   (Under  Negative:  "  Cease  firing.") 

Firing.  Commence,  with  boat  guns.  (Under  Negative : 
"  Cease  firing.") 

Firing.  Commence,  with  machine  guns.  (Under  Nega- 
tive :    "  Cease  firing.") 

Firing.  Commence,  with  small  arms.  (Under  Nega- 
tive:   "  Cease  firing.") 

Land.  Advance  and,  when  ship-s  is  (are)  in  position  to 
cover  the  landing. 

Land. 

Land  the  field  guns. 

Land  the  machine  gun«. 

Land  without  field  guns. 

Land.    Make  the  best  of  way  to  beach  or  landing  kfc.d. 

Land.  Advance  and,  when  ship-s  is  (are)  in  posit/ 41  to 
cover  the  landing. 

Ship  flotilla-s :  Keep  clear  of  landing  until  caik«JJ  vn  by 
beach  master. 


i64 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signal^. 


Signal  meanings. 


BOAT  DRILL  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Exercise  with  landing  force — Continued. 

Ship  flotilla-s :   Keep  clear  of  landing  until  preceding  or 

indicated  flotilla-s  has  disenlbarked. 
Ship  flotilla-s :   Keep  clear  of  landing  until  preceding  or 

indicated  flotilla-s  has  embarked. 
Ship   flotilla-s  or  the   one  addressed :    Return   to  your 

ship-s  or  ship-s  designated. 
Ship  flotilla  commander-s :   Take  charge. 
Division  flotilla  commander-s :    Take  charge. 
Landing  force  commander :    Take  charge. 
Senior  officer  :    Take  charge. 
Shell.     Use. 
Shrapnel.     Use. 
Stand  in  to  the  landing  and  disembark  in  natural  order 

of  ship  flotillas  or  in  the  order  indicated  by  ship 

calls. 
Stand  in  to  the  landing ^nd  disembark  in  inverted  order 

of  ship  flotillas. 
Stand  in  to  the  landing  and  report  to  beachmaster. 
Stand  in  to  the  landing  and  embark  the  landing  force  in 
natural  order  of  ship  flotillas  or  in  the  order  indicated 

by  ship  calls 
Stand  in  to  the  landing  and  embark  the  landing  force  in 

inverted  order  of  ship  flotillas. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


I6S 


Signals. 


Signal   meanings. 


TARGET  PRACTICE  SIGNALS. 

(All  signals  relating  to  torpedo  practice  are  grouped  under  Torpedo.) 


Alongside. 
Alongside. 

cated. 
Alongside. 

cated. 
Alongside. 
Alongside. 
Alongside. 
Anchor   near   the 

numeral. 
Anchors.     Require, 


Come. 

Come,  for  relief  crews  now  or  at  time  indi- 

Come,  with  repair  boat  now  or  at  time  indi- 

Come,  as  we  pass  near  target. 
Come,  as  we  pass  near  you. 
Send  power  boat,  now  or  at  time  indicated, 
rafts   or   at   the    range    indicated   by 


(Number  may  follow.) 
Anchors.     How  many,  do  you  require? 
Anchors.     How  many,  have  you? 
Anchors.     Have  one,  or  the  number  indicated. 
Anchors.     Have  one  spare,  or  the  number  indicated. 
Anchors.     Ship  designated  will  give  you.    (Number  may 


follow. 
Batteries.     Require, 


(Number  may  follow.) 
How  many,  "do  you  require? 
How  many,  have  you? 
Have  the  number  of,  indicated. 
Have  the  number  of  spare,  indicated. 
Ship  designated  will  give  you.   (Number  may 


Batteries. 
Batteries. 
Batteries. 
Batteries. 
Batteries. 

follow. 

Block-s.     Require.    (Number  may  follow.) 
Boat-s.     Get,  ready  for  hoisting  in. 
Bolt-s.     Require.    (Number  may  follow.) 
Buoy-s  is  (are)  adrift.    (Number  may  follow.) 
Buoy-s.     Pick  up  the,  adrift. 
Buoy-s.     Have  picked  up  the,   adrift  or  number 

■    cated. 
Buoy-s  is  (are)  in  place. 
Buoy-s.     Replitce  the. 

Buoy-s.     Replace  flag  or  lantern  on  the,  indicated. 
Cleats.     Require. 

Halliards.     Require.    (Number  may  follow.) 
Hawsers.     Reauire.    (Number  may  follow.) 


indi- 


i66 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signals. 


Signal  meanings. 


TARGET  PRACTICE  SIGNALS— Continued. 


Hawsers.     Size  of,  referred  to  is  indicated  by  numeral 

in  inches. 
Hawsers.     How  many,  do  you  require? 
How  many,  have  you? 
Have  the  number  of,  indicated. 
Have  the  number  of  spare,  indicated. 
Ship  designated  will  give  you.   (Number  may 
follow.) 

Hawser-s  referred  to  is  (are)  wire. 
Hits.     The  number  of,  indicated  by  numeral. 

How  many,  on  target  (or  on  each  target)  ? 
How  many,  by  each  caliber? 

Actual,  by  calibers  beginning  with  largest,  indi- 
cated by  numerals. 

Constructive,  additional  to  actual,  by  calibers  be- 
ginning with  the  largest,  indicated  by  numerals. 
Total,  actual  and  constructive,  by  calibers  begin- 
ning with  the  largest,  indicated  by  numerals. 
Recount,  on  target-s  indicated  by  numeral-s. 


Hawsers. 
Hawsers. 
Hawsers. 
Hawsers. 


Hits 
Hits. 
Hits. 


Hits. 

Hits. 

Hits. 

Hits  on  target  No.  i,  indicated  by  numeral. ^  By  calibers  if 
Hits  on  target  No.  2,  indicated  by  numeral.  they  can  be 
Hits  on  target  N0.3,  indicated  by  numeral.  I  distinguish - 
Hits  on  target  No. 4,  indicated  by  numeral.  I  ed,  begin- 
Hits  on  target  No. 5,  indicated  by  numeral.  ning  with 
Hits  on  target  No. 6,  indicated  by  numeral.  J  the  largest. 
Hits.     Examine  edges  of  targets  indicated  by  numeral 

for. 
Hits.     Count  and  paint  out,  on  all  or  target  screens  in- 
dicated bv  numeral. 


Keep  in  rear  of  firing  line. 

Keep  farther  from  the  target-s. 

Lantern-s.     Put,  on  the  or  the  indicated  buoy-s. 

Lanterns.     Put,   on  target  rafts  or  those  indicated 

numeral. 
Lashings.     Require. 


by 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


^ 


Signals. 


Signal  meanings. 


TARGET  PRACTICE  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Lie  in  the  position  designated  during  the  firing. 

Lie  to  the  right  of  the  target-s.    (Distance  in  hundreds 

of  yards  may  be  indicated.) 
Lie  to  the  left  of  the  target-s.    (Distance  in  hundreds 

of  yards  may  be  indicated.) 

Man  overboard  from  target  raft. 

Masts.     Require,  (Number  may  follow.) 

Masts.     How  many,  do  you  require? 

Masts.     How  many  have  you? 

Masts.     How  many  spare,  have  you? 

Masts.     Have  number  of,  indicated. 

Masts.     Have  number  of  spare,  indicated. 

Masts.     Ship  designated  will  give  you.     (Number   may 

follow.) 
Masts.     Erect,    on 

otherwise. 
Masts.     Erect,  on  target-s  requiring  them. 


target-s    designated    by   numeral    or 


Moving  picture  outfit.     Deliver,  to  ship  designated. 

Moving  picture  outfit.     Have. 

Moving  picture  outfit.     Obtain,  from  ship  designated. 

Photographic  outfit.     Deliver,  to  ship  designated. 

Photographic  outfit.     Have. 

Photographic  outfit.     Obtain,  from  ship  designated. 

Raft-s  is  (are)  adrift.    (Number  may  follow.) 

Raft-s  is  (are)  afloat.    (Number  may  follow.) 

Raft-s  is  (are)  aground.     (Number  may  follow.) 

Raft-s.  Anchored,  is  (are)  dragging  out  of  position. 
(Number  may  follow.) 

Raft-s.     Replace  the  anchored,  in  position. 

Raft-s.  Anchored,  will  hold  during  present  condition  of 
sea. 

Raft-s  or  the  one-s  indicated  by  numeral  require-s  re- 
pairs. 

Raft-s.     How  long  will  it  take  to  repair? 


i68 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signal  meanings. 


TARGET  PRACTICE  SIGNALS—Continued. 


Raft-s  can  be  repaired  soon  or  in  the  number  of  quarter 

hours  indicated. 
Raft-s.     Repairs  to,  will  require  some  days  or  number 

of  days  indicated. 
Raft-s  or  the  one-s  indicated  can  be  repaired  with  facili- 
ties at  hand. 
Raft-s  will  be  ready  at  the  hour  indicated  to-day  or  the 

day  indicated.    (Number  may  follow.) 
Raft-s.     Report  condition  of. 
Raft-s  is  (are)  in  serviceable  condition.    (Number  may 

follow.) 
Raft-s  or  the  one-s  indicated  can  be  taken  into  port. 
Raft-s.     Dismantle  the,  indicated  by  numeral  now  or  at 

time  indicated. 
Raft-s.     Take,  alongside  of  you  and  anchor. 
Raft-s.     Do  not  work  on,  until  further  orders. 
Raft-s.     When  will  you  be  ready  to  begin  work  on? 
Raft-s.     Will  be  able  to  begin  work  on,  now  or  at  time 

indicated. 
Raft-s.     At  work  on,  now. 

Raft-s.     Report  when  it  is  too  rough  for  work  on. 
Raft-s.     It  is  too  rough  for  work  on,     - 
Raft-s.     Keep  searchlight  on,  during  the  night. 
Raft-s.     Stand  by,  during  the  night. 
Raft-s.     Follow   the,   adrift   and   take   it  (them)  in   tow 

when  practicable. 
Raft-s.     Have  hold  of,  and  preparing  to  take  it  (them) 

in  tow.    (Number  may  follow.) 
Raft-s.     Have  the,  in  tow.    (Number  may  follow.) 
Raft-s.     Take,  in  tow. 

Raft-s.     Make  up  tandem  of,  now  or  at  time  indicated. 
Raft-s.     Deliver,   to   vessel   designated.     (Number   may 

follow.) 
Raft-s  is  (are)  breaking  up,    (Number  may  follow.) 
Raft-s  has  (have)  broken  up.    (Number  may  follow.) 
Raft-s  has  (have)  sunk.    (Number  may  follow.) 
Raft-s.     Get  underway  with. 
Raft-s.     Repair  the,  indicated  by  numerals. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


169 


Signal  meanings. 


TARGET  PRACTICE  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Raft-s.     Take  the,  to  moorings. 
Raft-s.     Take  the,  in  to  sheltered  anchorage. 
Raft-s.     Take  the,  to  the  position  or  the  range  indicated 
by  numeral. 


Range  base  ship  of  range  No.  i. 
Range  base  ship  of  range  No.  2. 
Range  base  ship  of  range  No.  3. 
Range  base  ship  of  range  No.  4. 
Range  base  ship  of  range  No.  5. 

Relief  crew.     Require,  for  power  boat. 
Relief  crew.     Require,  for  repair  boat. 
Relief  power  boat.     Require. 
Relief  repair  boat.     Require. 
Relief  repair  party.     Require. 

Repairs  are  completed. 

Repairs  will  take  a  short  time  or  the  number  of  hours 
indicated. 

Return  to  ship. 

Return  to  ship  after  taking  down  screens. 

Return  to  ship  leaving  screens  set. 

Return  to  ship  leaving  screens  furled. 

Return  to  ship  after  shifting  screens  as  indicated. 

Return  to  ship  for  reHef  repair  party. 

Return  to  station. 

Run.  Begin  the. 

Run.  Have  begun  the. 

Run.  About  to  begin  the. 

Run.  Have  completed  the. 

Run.  This  is  the  last. 


Salvo.     All  shots  of.  fell  a  little  short. 


170 


The  Deck  andt  Boat  Book. 


Signal  meanings. 


TARGET  PRACTICE  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Salvo.     All  shots  of,  went  a  little  over. 

Salvo  was  well  bunched  and  straddled.  (Number  of 
shots  short  and  number  of  shots  over  may  follow 
in  the  order  given.) 

Salvo  was  well  bunched,  the  center  a  little  short  or  short 
the  number  of  hundreds  of  yards  indicated. 

Salvo  was  well  bunched,  the  center  a  little  over  or  over 
the  number  of  hundreds  of  yards  indicated. 

Salvo  fell  short.  (Outside  limits  may  follow  in  hun- 
dreds of  yards.) 

Salvo  went  over.  (Outside  limits  may  follow  in  hun- 
dreds of  yards.) 

Salvo  straddled,  widely  dispersed.  (Number  of  shots 
short  and  number  of  shots  over  may  follow  in  the 
order  given.) 

Salvo  fell  short,  widely  dispersed. 

Salvo  went  over,  widely  dispersed. 

Salvo  fell  to  the  right. 

Salvo  fell  to  the  left. 


Screen-s.    Bring,  to  ship  from  the  target-s  or  th«  target-s 

indicated  by  numeral-s. 
Screen-s.     Deliver,  to  ship-s  designated. 
Screen-s.     Furl,    on    target-s    or    target-s    indicated    by 

numeral-s. 
Screen-s.     Give    (number  may  be  indicated),   to   ship-s 

designated. 
Screen-s.     Ship  designated  will  give  you,   (number  may 

be  indicated). 
Screen-s.     How  many  turret,  have  you? 
Screen-s.     Have  the  number  of  turret,  indicated. 
Screen-s.     How  many  broadside,  have  you? 
Screen-s.     Have  the  number  of  broadside,  indicated. 
Screen-s.     How  many  torpedo-defense,  have  you? 
Screen-s.     Have  the  number  of  torpedo-defense,  indi- 


cated. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


171 


Signal  meanings. 


TARGET  PRACTICE  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Screen-s.     How  many  battle-target,  have  you? 

Screen-s.     Have  the  number  of  battle-target,  indicated. 

Screen-s.     Set,  facing  to  starboard. 

Screen-s.     Set,  facing  to  port. 

Screen-s.     Set,  on  target-s,  or  on  target-s  indicated  by 

numeral-s. 
Screen-s.     Set,  flat  on  target-s  or  on  target-s  indicated 

by  numeral-s.  x 

Screen-s.     Set  broadside. 
Screen-s.     Set  turret. 

Screen-s.     Set,  for  caliber  indicated  by  numeral. 
Screen-s.     Set,  for  night  practice  on  target-s  or  target-s 

indicated  by  numeral-s. 
Screen-s.     Set,  for  battle  practice. 
Screen-s.     Set,  higher  on  target-s  or  target-s  indicated 

by  numeral-s. 
Screen-s.     Set,   lower  on  target-s  or  target-s  indicated 

by  num^ral-s. 
Screen-s.     Set,  properly  on  target-s  or  target-s  indicated 

by  numeral-s. 
Screen-s.     Shift,   on   target-s   or   target-s   indicated   by 

numeral-s. 
Screen-s.     Take  down,  on  target-s  or  target-s  indicated 

by  numeral-s. 


Send  vessel  designated  to  this  ship"  or  ship  or  place  des- 
ignated. 

Shots.     Report  fall  of. 

Shrouds.     Require.    (Number  may  follow.) 

Shrouds.     How  many,  do  you  require? 

Shrouds.     How  many  have  you  ? 

Shrouds.     Have  the  number  of,  indicated. 

Spikes.     Require. 

Target-s.  The,  or  target-s  indicated  by  numeral-s  re- 
quire repairs. 

Target-s.  How  long  to  repair  target-s  or  target-s  indi- 
cated by  numeral-s? 


172 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signal  meanings. 


TARGET  PRACTICE  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Target-s.     Will  require  a  short  time  or  the  number  of 

hours  indicated  to  repair. 
Target-s.     Repair  the,  or  the  target-s  indicated  by  nu- 

meral-s. 
Target-s.     Mark  the,   or  the  target-s  indicated   by  nu- 

meral-s. 
Target-s.     Set,   or  the   target-s   indicated  by   numeral-s 
p  firino-  line. 


t-s.     :!)et,   or  tne   larget-s 
parallel  to  the  firing  line. 

Target-s.     Visit   the,   or   the   target-s   indicated   by   nu- 
meral-s. 

Target-s.     Keep  dear  of  the,  or  line  of  fire. 

Target-s.     Illuminate  the,   or  the  target-s  indicated   by 
numeral-s. 

Target-s.     Subcaliber,  Get  out. 

Target-s.     Subcaliber,  Take  in. 


What,  have  you  ' 
Require  more. 


Target-practice  material. 

Target-practice  material. 

Target  range  is  clear. 

Target  range  will  be  clear  in  time  for  the  run. 

Target  range  is  not  clear.    (Number  of  quarter  hours 

before  it  will  probably  be  clear  may  be  indicated 

by  numeral.) 
Target  range.     Lay  out  the. 
Target  range.     Pick  up  the.  • 


Torpedo  breached  at  about  the  number  of  hundreds  of 

yards  indicated  from  firing  ship. 
Torpedo-es.     Bring,  alongside. 
Torpedo.     Buoy  the  position  where,  sank. 
Torpedo.     Have  buoyed  the  position  where,  sank. 
Torpedo  has  come  up. 

Torpedo  has  come  up  but  has  been  lost  sight  of. 
Torpedo  curved  to  the  right. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


173 


Signal  meanings. 


TARGET  PRACTICE  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Torpedo  curved  to  the  left. 

Torpedo  is  beyond  you. 

Torpedo  is  this  side  of  you. 

Torpedo  is  to  the  right  of  you  (looking  from  here). 

Torpedo  is  to  the  left  of  you  (looking  from  here). 

Torpedo.     Follow  the  ship  on  range  and  then  follow  the. 

Torpedo.     Heading  for  the. 

Torpedo.     Keep  in  rear  of  firing  line  and  then  follow  the. 

Torpedo.     Last,  fired  made  a  hit. 

Torpedo.     Last,  fired  made  a  half  hit.  ' 

Torpedo.  Number  of,  hits  is  as  indicated  by  numeral. 
(Firing  ship  may  be  designated.) 

Torpedo.  Number  of  half  hits  is  as  indicated  by  nu- 
meral.   (Firing  ship  may  be  designated.) 

Torpedo  passed  ahead  of  target.  (Number  of  tens  of 
yards  may  be  indicated.) 

Torpedo  passed  astern  of  target.  (Number  of  tens  of 
yards  may  be  indicated.) 

Torpedo  is  located. 

Torpedo.  The,  or  number  indicated  has  (have)  been 
lost. 

Torpedo.     Position  of,  is  indicated  by  bubbles. 

Torpedo.  Position  of,  is  not  (or  is  no  longer)  indicated 
by  bubbles. 

Torpedo.  The,  or  number  indicated  has  (have)  been 
recovered. 

Torpedo-es.     How  many,  have  been  recovered? 

Torpedo  did  run. 

Torpedo  is  making  erratic  run  ahead  of  this  or  desig- 
nated ship. 

Torpedo  is  making  erratic  run  astern  of  this  or  desig- 
nated ship. 

Torpedo  is  making  erratic  run  on  starboard  beam  of  this 
or  designated 'ship. 

Torpedo  is  making  erratic  run  on  starboard  bow  of  this 
or  designated  ship. 


174 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signal  meanings. 


TARGET  PRACTICE  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Torpedo  is  making  erratic  run  on  starboard  quarter  of 

this  or  designated  ship. 
Torpedo  is  making  erratic  run  on  port  beam  of  this  or 

designated  ship. 
Torpedo  is  making  erratic  run  on  port  bow  of  this  or 

designated  ship. 
Torpedo  is  making  erratic  run  on  port  quarter  of  this 

or  designated  ship. 
Torpedo  is  northward  of  this  or  designated  ship. 
Torpedo  is  northeastward  of  this  or  desi.crnated  ship. 
Torpedo  is  eastward  of  this  or  designated  ship. 
Torpedo  is  southeastward  of  this  or  designated  ship. 
Torpedo  is  southward  of  this  or  designated  ship. 
Torpedo  is  southwestward  of  this  or  designated  ship. 
Torpedo  is  westward  of  this  or  designated  ship. 
Torpedo  is  northwestward  of  this  or  designated  ship. 
Torpedo  bears  from  this  or  designated  ship  as  indicated 

by  compass  signal. 
Torpedo.     Search  for,  between  ship  and  target  or  in  di- 
rection indicated  from  you.    (Distance  may  follow 

in  hundreds  of  yards.) 
Torpedo.     Search   for,   between    ship   and   target   or   in 

direction  indicated  from  this  ship.    (Distance  may 

follow  in  hundreds  of  yards.) 
Torpedo  has  sunk. 
Torpedo.     Sweep  for. 
Torpedo.     Where  is  the? 


Torpedo  range.     Keep  clear  of  the. 

Torpedo  range.     Lay  out  the. 

Torpedo  range.     Pick  up  the. 

Torpedo  range.  Take  position  on  the,  at  about  the  num- 
ber of  hundreds  of  yards  indicated  from  firing 
point. 

Tow  slowly. 

Tow  faster. 

Tow  at  such  speed  as  is  safe. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


175 


Signal  meanings. 


TARGET  PRACTICE  stONALS— Continued. 

Tow  to  the  right. 

Tow  to  the  left. 

Tow  on  opposite  course. 

Tow  closer  to  the  ship. 

Tow  farther  from  the  ship. 

Tow.     Stop. 


Towline.     Use  length  of,  indicated  in  fathoms. 

Towline.  Lengthen  the.  (Additional  number  of  fath- 
oms may  follow.) 

Towline.  Shorten  the.  (Subtractive  number  of  fathoms 
may  follow.) 

Towline  has  parted. 

Towline  is  foul. 

Towline  can  be  cleared  soon  or  in  the  number  of  hours 
indicated  by  numeral  or  at  the  time  indicated. 

Towline  has  been  cleared. 

TowHne  has  had  to  be  cut  to  clear  it. 

Towline  has  been  spliced. 

Towline-s.     Rectify  length  of. 


Umpire-s.  Ship :  Come  (go)  on  board  now  or  at  the 
time  indicated. 

Umpire-s.  Target:  Come  (go)  on  board  now  or  at  the 
time  indicated. 

Umpire-s.  Do  not  come  (go)  on  board  until  time  indi- 
cated or  further  notice. 

Umpire-s  will  remain  on  board  during  the  night  or  until 
further  notice. 

Umpire-s  :    Return  to  j^our  ship-s. 

Umpire-s.     Send  boat-s  for. 


176 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signal  meanings. 


MISCELLANEOUS   SIGNALS. 
Accident  or  breakdown.     Report  nature  or  extent. 


Afloat.     Am  (are). 

Afloat.     All  boats  or  number  indicated  are. 

Afloat.     Get  all  boats. 


Aground.     Am  (are). 

Aground.     All  boats  or  number  indicated  are. 

Aground.     The  lighter  (or  vessel)  is. 


Ahead.     Keep  farther. 

Assist  the  boat-s  or  vessel-s  requiring  aid. 


Anchor. 

Anchor  upon  reaching  proper  depth. 

Anchor  ahead. 

Anchor  astern. 

Anchor  on  starboard  beam. 

Anchor  on  starboard  bow. 

Anchor  on  starboard  quarter. 

Anchor  on  port  beam. 

Anchor  on  port  bow. 

Anchor  on  port  quarter. 

Anchor  by  the  stern. 

Anchor  farther  inshore. 

Anchor  farther  offshore. 

Anchor.     Weigh,  now  or  at  time  indicated. 

Anchor  until  morning. 

Anchor.     Drag  for. 


Anchors.     {S'ee  Target  Practice  Signals.) 
Anchorage.     Examine  the,  carefully. 
Anchorage  can  be  had  only  close  inshore. 
Anchorage  can  be  had  only  well  offshore. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


177 


Signal  meanings. 


MISCELLANEOUS  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Anchorage  is  safe. 

Approach  is  obstructed. 

Approached.     The  shore  may  be,  without  risk. 


Assistance.     Need. 
Assistance.     Need  immediate. 
Assistance  will  be  sent. 


Awnings.     Spread  boat. 
Awnings.     Furl  boat. 
Bar.     Examine  the,  and  report. 
Bar  is  safe. 


Beachmaster  requires  assistance. 
Beachmaster.     Boats :    Report  to,  for  instructions. 
Beachmaster :    Keep  (or  get)  boats  afloat. 
Beachmaster  :    Prepare  boats  for  embarkation. 


Boat  or  number  indicated  is  (are)  disabled  temporarily. 

Boat  or  number  indicated  is  (are)  disabled  totally. 

Boats  or  number  indicated  is  (are)  leaking. 

Boat  or  number  indicated  is  (are)  repaired. 

Boat  or  number  indicated  is  (are)  in  sinking  condition. 

Boat  or  number  indicated  is  (are)  stove. 

Boat  or  number  indicated  is  (are)  sunk. 

Boat-s.     Do  not  risk,  in  surf. 

Boat-s.     Will  not  risk,  in  surf. 

Boat-s.     Trim,  for  safe  towing. 

Boat.     Surf,  Have. 

Boat.     Surf,  is  damaged.  ^ 

Boat.     Surf,  can  be  repaired  with  available  facilities. 

Boat.     Surf,  is  repaired. 


17^ 


Thf  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signals. 


Signal  meanings. 


MISCELLANEOUS  SIGNALS— Continued. 


Boat  drill.     (See  signals  JA-JZY.) 

Bring  oflF  landing  party. 

Bring  off  liberty  party. 

Bring  off  mail. 

Bring  off  officers. 

Bring  off  working  party. 


Buoy-s  has  (have)  dragged  or  been  misplaced. 

Buoy  the  obstructions. 

Buoys.     Plant  marker. 

Buoy  the  position  before  leaving  it. 

Buoys.     Remove  the. 

Buoys  have  been  removed. 

Buoys.     Replace  the. 

Buoys  have  been  replaced. 

Channel.     The,  is  buoyed. 

Channel.     The,  is  clear. 

Channel.     The,  is  deep. 

Channel.     The,  is  narrow. 

Channel.     The,  is  straight. 

Channel.     Drag  (or  sweep)  the,  for  obstructions. 

Channel.  Keep  near  left  bank  of  the,  (looking  down- 
stream). 

Channel.  Keep  near  right  bank  of  the,  (looking  down- 
stream). 

Channel.     Keep  in  the  middle  of  the. 

Channel.     Mark  the,  by  anchoring  in  the  fairway. 

Channel.  Mark  the,  by  anchoring  or  placing  boats  or 
marks  on  either  side. 

Coal.     Require.    (Number  of  pounds  may  follow;  or  see, 

signal  MYU.) 
Coal.     Have  sufficient. 
Coal  and  water.     Require. 
Coal  and  water.     Have  sufficient. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


179 


Signal  meanings. 


MISCELLANEOUS  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Coal.     Will  send  you. 

Coal  and  water.     Will  send  you. 

Colors.     Hoist  the. 

Compass  signals.     {See  signals  JDP-ISY.) 

Compass.     Have  a  boat. 

Course.     (See  signals  JVQ-JVS.) 

Damage.     Report. 

Damaged.     Am  (are). 

Damaged.     Am  (are),  seriously. 


Day.  First,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Second,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Third,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Fourth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Fifth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Sixth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Seventh,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Eighth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Ninth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Tenth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Eleventh,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Twelfth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Thirteenth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Fourteenth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Fifteenth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Sixteenth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Seventeenth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Eighteenth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Nineteenth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Twentieth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Twenty-first,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Twenty-second,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Twenty-third,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Twenty-fourth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Twenty-fifth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 

Day.  Twenty-sixth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 


i8o 


The^  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signal  meanings. 


MISCELLANEOUS  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Day.     Twenty-seventh,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 
Day.     Twenty-eighth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 
Day.     Twenty-ninth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 
Day.     Thirtieth,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 
Day.     Thirty-first,  of  this  month  or  month  indicated. 
Depth.     Correction  of,  to  plane  of  mean  low  tide  is  as 

indicated  in  feet  by  numeral. 
Depth  is  as  indicated  in  feet. 
Depth.     Least,  is  as  indicated  in  feet. 
Depths  reported  are  reduced  to  plane  of  mean  low  tide. 


Discretion.     Act  at. 

Disorder.  Require  more  petty  officers  to  suppress. 

Disorder.  Require  more  men  to  suppress. 

Disorder.  Suppress  all. 

Disorder.  Can  suppress,  without  further  assistance. 

Disorder.  There  is  some. 

Disorder.  There  is  great. 


Disorderly.     Arrest,  men. 
Disorderly.     Arrest  all,  persons. 
Disorderly.     Send,  men  off  to  their  ships. 
Dispatch.     Use  the  greatest. 
Disregard  movements  of  senior  officer. 
Distance.     (See  signals  JUL-JUQ.) 
Distance.     Decrease  your,  from  the  ship. 
Distance.     Increase  your,  from  the  ship. 

Engine  is  disabled. 

Engine  can  be  repaired  without  assistance. 

Engine  is  repaired. 

Evolutions:    (See  signals  JSZ-JTZ.) 
Follow  this  or  indicated  boat  without  further  orders. 
Formation  and  Order.     (See  signals  JA-JAZ.) 
Gasoline.     Require.     (Number  of  gallons  may  follow.) 
Gasoline.     Have  sufficient. 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


i8i 


Signals. 


Signal  meanings. 


MISCELLANEOUS  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Gasoline.     Will  send. 

Guide.     (See  signals  JV-JVC.) 

Hail.     Come  within. 

Hawsers.     (See  Target-practice  signals.) 

Instructions.     Will  send. 

Interval.     (See  signals  JUR-JUZ.) 

Landing  float  has  sunk. 

Landing  float  has  been  repaired. 

Landing  force  exercises.     (See  signals  JY-JZY.) 

Month  of  January. 

Month  of  February. 

Month  of  March. 

Month  of  April. 

Month  of  May. 

Month  of  June. 

Month  of  July. 

Month  of  August. 

Month  of  September. 

Moi^th  of  October. 

Month  of  November. 

Month  of  December. 

Oars.     Exercise  under. 

Oil.     Require    fuel,    for 

may  follow;  or  see  signal  MY  LT.) 

Oil.     Will  send  fuel,  for  boilers. 

Oil  for  oil  engines.     Require.     (Number  of  gallons 
follow;  or  see  signal  MYU.) 

Oil  for  oil  engines.     Will  send. 

Oil.     Require  lubricating.    (Number  of  gallons  may  fol- 
low.) 

Oil.     Will  send  lubricating. 

Propeller  is  clear. 

Propeller  is  foul. 

Propeller-s  is  (are)  lost.     (All  or  number  indicated.) 

Propeller  has  lost  blades.     (Number  may  follow.) 

Radio  set  is  out  of  commission. 

Radio  set  is  repaired. 


(See  signals  JVE-JXZ.) 
boilers.     (Number    of    gallons 


may 


l82 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


Signals. 


Signal  meanings. 


MISCELLANEOUS  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Radio  receiving  set  is  out  of  commission. 
Radio  sending  set  is  out  of  commission. 


Ready.  Am  (are). 

Ready.  When  will  you  be? 

Ready.  Will  be,  soon  or  at  time  indicated. 

Ready.  Ship  flotilla  is. 

Ready.  Division  flotilla  is. 

Ready.  Fleet  flotilla  is. 

Repairs.     Need  assistance  in  making. 

Repairs.     Can  make,  with  own  force. 

Repairs  are  progresring  well. 

Repairs  will  be  completed  soon  or  at  time  indicated. 

Return.    (See  signals  JVD-JYF  and  MFQ-MFW.) 

Safe.    Am  (are). 


(See  signals  JVD-JXZ.) 


Safe.     Boat-s  is  (are). 

Sails.     Exercises  under. 

Sand.     Get  a  supply  of. 

Shelter.     Seek. 

Sheltered.     Am  (are). 

Sheltered.     Bpats  are. 

Shore.     The,  may  be  approached  without  risk. 

Signal.     Able  to  make  out  last. 

Signal  is  received  but  not  understood. 

Signal.     Repeat  last. 

Signal  is  understood. 


Signaling.     Cease. 
Signals.     Give  attention  to. 
Signals.     You  have  misunderstood. 
Signals.     Repeat.     (Under  Negative: 

peating  signals.") 
Signals.     Boat,  Use. 
Signals.     Flag-hoist,  Use. 
Signals.     Radio,  Use. 
Signals.     Semaphore,  Use. 


'  Discontinue  re- 


The  Deck  and  Boat  Book. 


183 


Signal  meanings. 


MISCELLANEOUS  SIGNALS— Continued. 

Signals.     Semaphore  or  wigwag,  Use. 
Signals.     Sound,  Use. 
Signals.     Wigwag,  Use. 


Sound  frequently  or  at  intervals  indicated  in  minutes  by 

numeral. 
Sound  regularly  and  report  any  material  change  in  depth. 
Sound.     Go  ahead  and,  reporting  as  you  proceed. 
Sound  and  report  depth. 
Sound  in  the  direction  indicated. 


Sounding.  Have  taken ;  depth  reached  is  indicated  in 
feet  by  numeral.  (Numeral  under  Negative  :  "  No 
bottom  at  indicated  depth.") 

Speed.     {See  signals  JU-JUK.) 

Steam.  Get  up,  on  steamers.  (Other  power  boats,  Pre- 
pare.) 

Steer  more  to  starboard. 
Steer  more  to  port. 

Surf.     There  is  too  much,  to  land. 

Target  practice  (gun  and  torpedo).  See  signals  MA- 
MNJ.) 

Time.  One  a.  m.,  Minutes  by  numeral  following. 

Time.  One  p.  m.,  Minutes  by  numeral  following. 

Time.  Two  a.  m.,  Minutes  by  numeral  following. 

Time.  Two  p.  m.,  Minutes  by  numeral  following. 

Time.  Three  a.  m.,  Minutes  by  numeral  following. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFOENIA  LIBRAEY 
BERKELEY 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 

STAMPED  BELOW 

Books  not  returned  on  time  are  subject  to  a  fine  of 
50c  per  volume  after  the  third  day  overdue,  increasing 
to  $1.00  per  volume  after  the  sixth  day.  Books  not  in 
demand  may  be  renewed  if  application  is  made  before 
expiration  of  loan  period. 


I     Nfcv  1^1917   ^,j,^  26 1986       1 


'^ 


O-lO 


AUG  3  1918 


J\1I<! 


RECEIVED 

SEP  2  6 1986 

ICULATION  OEPT. 


k' 


m,  m.  m  ^ 


GENERAL  LIBRARY -U.C.  BERKELEY 


INiillll 


BOQQ&'ISaiS 


301245    . 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


